Nissan Automobile 2009 Altima User Manual
2009  
ALTIMA  
OWNER'S MANUAL  
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOREWORD  
READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY  
Before driving your vehicle, please read this  
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-  
iarity with controls and maintenance require-  
ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your  
vehicle.  
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN  
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with  
confidence. It was produced using the latest  
techniques and strict quality control.  
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE  
This vehicle should not be modified.  
Modification  
performance, safety or durability, and  
may even violate governmental  
could  
affect  
its  
This manual was prepared to help you under-  
stand the operation and maintenance of your  
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-  
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this  
manual before operating your vehicle.  
WARNING  
regulations. In addition, damage or per-  
formance problems resulting from modi-  
fications may not be covered under  
NISSAN warranties.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-  
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!  
Follow these important driving rules to  
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip  
for you and your passengers!  
A separate Warranty Information Booklet  
explains details about the warranties cov-  
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service  
and Maintenance Guide” explains details  
about maintaining and servicing your ve-  
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer  
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will  
explain how to resolve any concerns you  
may have with your vehicle, as well as  
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon  
law.  
● NEVER drive under the influence of al-  
cohol or drugs.  
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits  
and never drive too fast for conditions.  
●
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving  
and avoid using vehicle features or taking  
other actions that could distract you.  
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle  
best. When you require any service or have any  
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the  
extensive resources available to them.  
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-  
priate child restraint systems. Preteen  
children should be seated in the rear seat.  
● ALWAYS provide information about the  
proper use of vehicle safety features to  
all occupants of the vehicle.  
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual  
for important safety information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHEN READING THE MANUAL  
This manual includes information for all options  
available on this model. Therefore, you may find  
some information that does not apply to your  
vehicle.  
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65  
WARNING  
WARNING  
All information, specifications and illustrations in  
this manual are those in effect at the time of  
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change  
specifications or design without notice and with-  
out obligation.  
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,  
and certain vehicle components contain  
or emit chemicals known to the State of  
California to cause cancer and birth de-  
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-  
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles  
and certain products of component wear  
contain or emit chemicals known to the  
State of California to cause cancer and  
birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT  
THIS MANUAL  
You will see various symbols in this manual. They  
are used in the following ways:  
APD1005  
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”  
or “Do not let this happen.”  
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE  
ADVISORY  
WARNING  
This is used to indicate the presence of a  
hazard that could cause death or serious  
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the  
risk, the procedures must be followed  
precisely.  
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-  
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The  
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate  
Material – special handling may apply, See  
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”  
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-  
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the  
vehicle.  
CAUTION  
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these  
indicate movement or action.  
This is used to indicate the presence of a  
hazard that could cause minor or moder-  
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-  
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-  
cedures must be followed carefully.  
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these  
call attention to an item in the illustration.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed to  
Visteon and Xanavi  
Informatics  
Corporation.  
XM Radio௡ requires  
subscription, sold  
separately after first 90  
days. Not available in  
Alaska, Hawaii or  
Guam. For more  
information, visit  
www.xmradio.com.  
© 2009 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.  
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s  
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval  
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any  
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,  
recording or otherwise, without the prior written  
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM  
NISSAN CARES . . .  
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are  
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.  
However, if there is something that your NISSAN  
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to  
provide NISSAN directly with comments or  
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-  
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free  
number:  
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the  
following information:  
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:  
For U.S. customers  
– Your name, address, and telephone number  
Nissan North America, Inc.  
Consumer Affairs Department  
P.O. Box 685003  
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the  
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s  
side)  
Franklin, TN 37068-5003  
For U.S. customers  
1-800-NISSAN-1  
(1-800-647-7261)  
For Canadian customers  
Nissan Canada Inc.  
5290 Orbitor Drive  
– Date of purchase  
– Current odometer reading  
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name  
– Your comments or questions  
OR  
For Canadian customers  
1-800-387-0122  
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5  
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of  
Contents  
Illustrated table of contents  
0
1
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Instruments and controls  
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Starting and driving  
3
4
5
In case of emergency  
6
Appearance and care  
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Technical and consumer information  
8
9
Index  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0 Illustrated table of contents  
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2  
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3  
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5  
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7  
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8  
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-10  
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD  
RESTRAINTS  
1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-27)  
2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-15)  
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)  
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact  
supplemental air bag (P. 1-43)  
5. Head Restraints (P. 1-11 )  
6. Front seat belts (P. 1-15)  
7. Supplemental front-impact air bags  
(P. 1-43)  
8. Seats (P. 1-2)  
9. Occupant classification sensor (pattern  
sensor) (P. 1-52)  
10. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-57)  
11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
CHildren) (P. 1-25)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WII0100  
0-2 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERIOR FRONT  
Coupe  
1. Power windows (P. 2-44)  
2. Windshield (P. 8-20)  
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch  
(P. 2-27)  
4. Engine hood (P. 3-23)  
5. Tie down/towing hooks (if so equipped)  
(P. 6-12)  
6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-33)  
7. Headlight and turn signal switch  
(P. 2-29)  
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)  
9. Tire pressure (P. 8-34)  
10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)  
11. Tire chains (P. 8-42)  
12. Mirrors (P. 3-28)  
13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™  
(if so equipped) , keys (P. 3-4, 3-2, 3-2)  
LII0114  
Illustrated table of contents 0-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sedan  
1. Power windows (P. 2-44)  
2. Windshield (P. 8-20)  
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch  
(P. 2-27)  
4. Engine hood (P. 3-23)  
5. Tie down/towing hooks (if so equipped)  
(P. 6-12)  
6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)  
(P. 2-33)  
7. Headlight and turn signal switch  
(P. 2-29)  
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)  
9. Tire pressure (P. 8-34)  
10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)  
11. Tire chains (P. 8-42)  
12. Mirrors (P. 3-28)  
13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™  
(if so equipped), keys (P. 3-4, 3-2, 3-2)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
LII0094  
0-4 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EXTERIOR REAR  
Coupe  
1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-28)  
2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)  
3. Trunk lid (P. 3-23)  
4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)  
5. Opener operation (if so equipped)  
(P. 3-23)  
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)  
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation  
(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)  
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)  
WII0125  
Illustrated table of contents 0-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sedan  
1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-28)  
2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)  
3. Trunk lid (P. 3-23)  
4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)  
5. Opener operation (if so equipped)  
(P. 3-23)  
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)  
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation  
(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)  
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)  
9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6)  
LII0095  
0-6 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT  
1. Interior trunk access (P. 1-9)  
2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-46)  
3. Sun visors (P. 3-27)  
4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-48)  
5. HomeLinkா (if so equipped) (P. 2-51)  
6. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror  
(if so equipped) (P. 3-28)  
7. Glove box (P. 2-41)  
8. Front cup holders (P. 2-40)  
9. Front console (P. 2-41)  
10. Front seat (P. 1-2)  
11. Rear seat (P. 1-9)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WII0126  
Illustrated table of contents 0-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Driver supplemental air bag/horn  
(P. 1-43, P. 2-34)  
Cruise control main/set switch  
(P. 5-19)  
Windshield wiper/washer switch  
(P. 2-27)  
8.  
9.  
Ignition switch (P. 5-7)  
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)  
10. Front passenger air bag status light  
(P. 1-53)  
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag  
(P. 1-43)  
12. Glove box (P. 2-41)  
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-2)  
14. Heater and air conditioner (manual or  
automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-18)  
15. Shift selector (P. 5-11)  
16. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/  
Storage (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-21, P.2-42)  
WIC1258  
17. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls  
1.  
2.  
Vents (P. 4-10)  
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn  
signal switch (P. 2-29)  
3.  
4.  
Steering wheel switch for audio control  
(if so equipped)/Bluetoothா hands-free  
phone system (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-44, P. 4-46, P. 4-61)  
(P. 3-27)  
18. Vehicle information display controls  
(P. 2-17)  
19. Hood release (P. 3-23)  
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)  
0-8 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
20. Traction Control System (TCS) OFF  
switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-25)  
Trunk opener (P. 3-23)  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF  
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)  
Intelligent Key port (P. 5-7)  
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual.  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
Illustrated table of contents 0-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK  
LOCATIONS  
QR25DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)  
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)  
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid  
reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14, 8-14)  
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)  
5. Fuse block (P. 8-22)  
6. Battery (P. 8-15)  
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)  
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)  
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)  
10. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)  
11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)  
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
(P. 8-15)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
LDI0553  
0-10 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VQ35DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-13)  
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)  
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid  
reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-14, 8-14)  
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-19)  
5. Fuse block (P. 8-22)  
6. Battery (P. 8-15)  
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-22)  
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)  
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)  
10. Drive belt location (P. 8-17)  
11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)  
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
(P. 8-15)  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
LDI0552  
Illustrated table of contents 0-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS  
Warning  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-11  
Warning  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-13  
2-13  
2-13  
1-58  
Indicator  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-14  
2-26  
2-15  
2-35  
Anti-lock Braking  
System (ABS) warn-  
ing light  
Master warning light  
Malfunction Indica-  
tor Light (MIL)  
or  
or  
NISSAN Intelligent  
Key ™ warning light  
Security indicator  
light  
Brake warning light  
2-11  
Seat belt warning  
light and chime  
Slip indicator light (if  
so equipped)  
Supplemental air  
bag warning light  
Traction Control  
System off indicator  
light (if so equipped)  
Charge warning  
light  
2-11  
2-11  
Indicator  
light  
Name  
Page  
2-14  
Turn signal/hazard  
indicator lights  
2-16  
2-35  
Continuously Vari-  
able Transmission  
(CVT) check warn-  
ing light (if so  
Continuously Vari-  
able Transmission  
(CVT) position indi-  
cator light (if so  
equipped)  
Vehicle Dynamic  
Control off indicator  
light (if so equipped)  
equipped)  
Engine oil pressure  
warning light  
2-12  
2-12  
Front passenger air  
bag status light  
2-14  
2-14  
Low tire pressure  
warning light  
High beam indicator  
light (blue)  
0-12 Illustrated table of contents  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Front power seat adjustment  
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25  
(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9  
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15  
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15  
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18  
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19  
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19  
Three-point type seat belt with retractor. . . . . . . . . .1-19  
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22  
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
Child restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27  
Child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . .1-28  
Child restraint installation using the seat  
belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33  
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39  
Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39  
Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41  
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43  
Supplemental air bag warning labels. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58  
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SEATS  
● The seatback should not be reclined  
any more than needed for comfort. Seat  
belts are most effective when the pas-  
senger sits well back and straight up in  
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the  
risk of sliding under the lap belt and  
being injured is increased.  
CAUTION  
When adjusting the seat positions, be  
sure not to contact any moving parts to  
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.  
FRONT MANUAL SEAT  
ADJUSTMENT  
ARS1152  
● For the most effective protection when  
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should  
be upright. Always sit well back in the  
seat with both feet on the floor and  
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-  
tions on seat belt usage” later in this  
section.  
WARNING  
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when  
the seatback is reclined. This can be  
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not  
be against your body. In an accident,  
you could be thrown into it and receive  
neck or other serious injuries. You  
could also slide under the lap belt and  
receive serious internal injuries.  
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat  
to make sure it is securely locked.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0738  
WRS0739  
WRS0740  
Forward and backward  
Reclining  
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s  
seat)  
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you  
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired  
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in  
position.  
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean  
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever  
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever  
to lock the seatback in position.  
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust  
the seat height until the desired position is  
achieved.  
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the  
seatback for occupants of different sizes for  
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat  
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later  
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined  
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is  
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N  
(Neutral) position with the parking brake fully  
applied.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0841  
Coupe  
●
Pull up on the upper seatback release lever  
to release the seatback only. Push the seat-  
back forward to allow for access to items  
behind the front seat. Push the seatback to  
the rear of the vehicle to return the seatback  
to the upright and locked position. The up-  
per seatback release lever does not need to  
be used.  
FRONT POWER SEAT  
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped for  
driver’s seat)  
WARNING  
Before driving the vehicle, return the seat-  
back to an upright seating position after  
manually releasing it. Also, make sure the  
seat is locked in place. Failure to do so  
may cause the seat to move in a collision  
or sudden stop. This may result in damage  
to the seat or personal injury.  
Operating tips  
●
The power seat motor has an auto-reset  
overload protection circuit. If the motor  
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,  
then reactivate the switch.  
●
Do not operate the power seat switch for a  
long period of time when the engine is off.  
This will discharge the battery.  
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the  
seatback for occupants of different sizes for  
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat  
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage”later  
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-  
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-  
hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P  
(Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking  
brake fully applied.  
WRS0751  
Sedan  
Forward and backward  
CAUTION  
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide  
the seat forward or backward to the desired  
position.  
● Do not operate the power recline switch  
when the seatback has been manually  
released using the upper seatback re-  
1
lease lever  
the seat.  
. Doing so can damage  
᭺
Reclining  
Move the recline switch backward until the de-  
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback  
forward again, move the switch forward and  
move your body forward. The seatback will move  
forward.  
● Do not pull on the upper seatback re-  
lease lever or the trim to return the  
seatback to a normal seating position.  
Doing so may damage the seat.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0842  
WRS0743  
WRS0843  
Type A  
Coupe shown, Sedan similar  
Type B  
Lumbar support (if so equipped for  
driver’s seat)  
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s  
seat)  
The lumbar support feature provides lower back  
support to the driver. Push the switch (Type A)  
forward or backward or move the lever (Type B)  
up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.  
Pull the lever up or push down to adjust the angle  
and height of the seat cushion.  
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
●
The seatback and track will not lock until the  
seatback is returned rearward.  
The seat track will not lock until it reaches  
the first position memory point.  
The seatback will return to the first locking  
notch when using the seat recliner lever.  
WRS0789  
WRS0791  
Entry to the rear seat from outside of  
the vehicle on the front passenger side  
(Coupe)  
Entry to the rear seat from outside of  
the vehicle on the driver’s side using  
the upper seatback release lever  
(Coupe)  
1
Pull the seat recliner lever  
to the uppermost  
᭺
2
position folding the seatback forward , releas-  
1
᭺
The use of the upper seatback release lever  
on the inboard side of the passenger seat, allows  
for the driver to:  
,
᭺
ing the seat track.  
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the  
rear seat.  
●
allow passenger entry to the rear seat from  
outside of the vehicle.  
To return the seat to a locked position:  
●
access items located behind the front pas-  
senger seat.  
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-  
back and track are locked.  
Operating tips:  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Pull the upper seatback release lever  
to the  
Operating tips:  
᭺
uppermost position, folding the seatback forward  
●
●
●
The seatback and track will not lock until the  
seatback is returned rearward.  
2
, releasing the seat track.  
᭺
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the  
rear seat.  
The seat track will not lock until it reaches  
the first position memory point.  
To return the seat to a locked position:  
The seatback will return to an upright seating  
position if the lower seatback release lever is  
pushed to the uppermost position.  
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-  
back and track are locked.  
Operating tips:  
●
●
●
The seatback and track will not lock until the  
seatback is returned rearward.  
The seat track will not lock until it reaches  
the first position memory point.  
WRS0790  
Exiting from the rear seat on the front  
passenger side, using the lower  
seatback release lever (coupe)  
The seatback will return to an upright seating  
position if the upper seatback release lever  
is pulled to the uppermost position.  
1
Press on the lower seatback release lever  
᭺
until it reaches the lowermost position. Fold the  
2
seatback forward , releasing the seat track.  
᭺
Slide the entire seat forward for access from the  
rear seat.  
To return the seat to a locked position:  
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-  
back and track are locked.  
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating tips:  
●
●
●
The seatback and track will not lock until the  
seat back is returned rearward.  
The seat track will not lock until it reaches  
the first position memory point.  
The seatback will return to an upright seating  
position if the upper seatback release lever  
is pulled to the uppermost position.  
WRS0791  
Exiting from the rear seat on the  
driver’s side, using the upper seatback  
release lever (coupe)  
1
Pull the upper seatback release lever  
to the  
᭺
uppermost position, folding the seatback forward  
2
, releasing the seat track.  
᭺
Slide the entire seat forward to exit from the rear  
seat.  
WRS0794  
FOLDING REAR SEAT  
Interior trunk access  
To return the seat to a locked position:  
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-  
back and track are locked.  
The trunk can be accessed from the passenger  
side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as  
shown.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. Open the access cover on the rear parcel  
shelf.  
● Closely supervise children when they  
are around cars to prevent them from  
playing and becoming locked in the  
trunk where they could be seriously in-  
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear  
seatback and trunk lid securely latched  
when not in use, and prevent children’s  
access to car keys.  
2. Push down on the button on the rear parcel  
shelf.  
3. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback.  
WARNING  
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo  
area or on the rear seat when it is in the  
fold-down position. Use of these areas  
by passengers without proper restraints  
could result in serious injury in an acci-  
dent or sudden stop.  
WRS0745  
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or  
straps to help prevent it from sliding or  
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than  
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-  
lision, unsecured cargo could cause  
personal injury.  
To fold down the driver’s side of the rear seat,  
reach through the opening and pull on the strap  
1
located behind the seat.  
᭺
The rear seats can be locked using the mechani-  
cal key to prevent unauthorized access. For more  
information on keys, refer to “Keys” in the “Pre-  
driving checks and adjustments” section of this  
manual.  
● When returning the seatbacks to the  
upright position, be certain they are  
completely secured in the latched posi-  
tion. If they are not completely secured,  
passengers may be injured in an acci-  
dent or sudden stop.  
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HEAD RESTRAINTS  
WARNING  
Head restraints supplement the other ve-  
hicle safety systems. They may provide  
additional protection against injury in cer-  
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head  
restraints properly, as specified in this  
section. Check the adjustment after  
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach  
anything to the head restraint stalks or  
remove the head restraint. Do not use the  
seat if the head restraint has been re-  
moved. Failure to follow these instruc-  
tions can reduce the effectiveness of the  
head restraints. This may increase the risk  
of serious injury or death in a collision.  
WRS0167  
LRS0893  
The illustration shows the seating positions  
equipped with head restraints. All of the head  
restraints are adjustable.  
Center armrest (if so equipped)  
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.  
᭡ Indicates the seating position is equipped with  
a head restraint.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LRS0887  
WRS0134  
LRS0888  
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.  
Components  
1. Head restraint  
2. Adjustment notches  
3. Lock knob  
Adjustment  
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level  
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.  
4. Stalks  
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0889  
LRS0890  
LRS0891  
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push  
the head restraint down.  
Removal  
Install  
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-  
justable head restraints.  
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes  
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is  
facing the correct direction. The stalk with  
1
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest  
position.  
the adjustment notches  
must be installed  
᭺
2
in the hole with the lock button  
.
᭺
2. Push and hold the lock knob.  
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the  
head restraint down.  
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.  
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an  
occupant uses the seating position.  
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not  
loose in the vehicle.  
5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint  
before an occupant uses the seating posi-  
tion.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain  
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head  
restraints return to their original position.  
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as  
described in this section.  
SPA1025  
Front-seat Active Head Restraints  
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-  
ing the force that the seatback receives from the  
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement  
of the head restraint helps support the occu-  
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement  
and helping absorb some of the forces that may  
lead to whiplash-type injuries.  
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions  
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that  
whiplash injury occurs most.  
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SEAT BELTS  
SSS0136  
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT  
USAGE  
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-  
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in  
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances  
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the  
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.  
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your  
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,  
even if your seating position includes a supple-  
mental air bag.  
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces  
or territories specify that seat belts be worn  
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SSS0134  
SSS0016  
WARNING  
WARNING  
● Every person who drives or rides in this  
vehicle should use a seat belt at all  
times. Children should be properly re-  
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-  
priate, in a child restraint.  
● The seat belt should be properly ad-  
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may  
reduce the effectiveness of the entire  
restraint system and increase the  
chance or severity of injury in an acci-  
dent. Serious injury or death can occur  
if the seat belt is not worn properly.  
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely  
fastened to the proper buckle.  
● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-  
vated, it cannot be reused and must be  
replaced together with the retractor.  
See your NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or  
twisted. Doing so may reduce its  
effectiveness.  
● Removal and installation of preten-  
sioner system components should be  
done by a NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not allow more than one person to  
use the same seat belt.  
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-  
tractors and attaching hardware,  
should be inspected after any collision  
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-  
mends that all seat belt assemblies in  
use during a collision be replaced un-  
less the collision was minor and the  
belts show no damage and continue to  
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies  
not in use during a collision should also  
be inspected and replaced if either  
damage or improper operation is noted.  
● Never carry more people in the vehicle  
than there are seat belts.  
● If the seat belt warning light glows con-  
tinuously while the ignition is turned  
ON with all doors closed and all seat  
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-  
function in the system. Have the system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
SSS0014  
WARNING  
● Always route the shoulder belt over  
your shoulder and across your chest.  
Never put the belt behind your back,  
under your arm or across your neck. The  
belt should be away from your face and  
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.  
● No changes should be made to the seat  
belt system. For example, do not modify  
the seat belt, add material, or install  
devices that may change the seat belt  
routing or tension. Doing so may affect  
the operation of the seat belt system.  
Modifying or tampering with the seat  
belt system may result in serious per-  
sonal injury.  
● All child restraints and attaching hard-  
ware should be inspected after any col-  
lision. Always follow the restraint  
manufacturer’s inspection instructions  
and replacement recommendations.  
The child restraints should be replaced  
if they are damaged.  
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as  
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE  
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could  
increase the risk of internal injuries in  
an accident.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHILD SAFETY  
Infants  
WARNING  
Children need adults to help protect them.  
They need to be properly restrained.  
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed  
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-  
mends that infants be placed in child restraints  
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards. You should choose a child restraint  
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-  
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.  
Infants and children need special protec-  
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit  
them properly. The shoulder belt may  
come too close to the face or neck. The  
lap belt may not fit over their small hip  
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-  
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal  
injury. Always use appropriate child  
restraints.  
In addition to the general information in this  
manual, child safety information is available from  
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,  
government traffic safety offices, and community  
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure  
to learn the best way to transport your child.  
Small children  
There are three basic types of child restraint  
systems:  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-  
tories require the use of approved child restraints  
for infants and small children. See “Child Re-  
straints” later in this section.  
Children that are over one year old and weigh at  
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-  
facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s  
instructions for minimum and maximum weight  
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-  
mends that small children be placed in child  
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standards. You should choose a child  
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow  
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation  
and use.  
●
●
●
Rear-facing child restraint  
Front-facing child restraint  
Booster seat  
Also, there are other types of child restraints  
available for larger children for additional protec-  
tion.  
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.  
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less  
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing  
child restraints. Front-facing child restraints are  
available for children who outgrow rear-facing  
child restraints and are at least 1 year old.  
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle  
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer  
use a front-facing child restraint.  
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens  
and children be restrained in the rear seat.  
According to accident statistics, children  
are safer when properly restrained in the  
rear seat than in the front seat.  
Larger children  
This is especially important because your  
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-  
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-  
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”  
later in this section.  
Children who are too large for child restraints  
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts  
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit  
properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5  
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and  
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to  
obtain proper seat belt fit.  
PREGNANT WOMEN  
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when  
the seatback is reclined. This can be  
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not  
be against your body. In an accident,  
you could be thrown into it and receive  
neck or other serious injuries. You  
could also slide under the lap belt and  
receive serious internal injuries.  
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use  
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and  
always position the lap belt as low as possible  
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder  
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.  
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-  
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific  
recommendations.  
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a  
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-  
der belt in the child’s seating position fits close to  
the face or neck or if the lap portion of the seat  
belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat  
should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is  
properly positioned across the top, middle por-  
tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the  
hips. A booster seat can only be used in seating  
positions that have a three-point type seat belt.  
The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and  
have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-  
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child  
has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or  
near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt  
without the booster seat.  
● For the most effective protection when  
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should  
be upright. Always sit well back in the  
seat with both feet on the floor and  
adjust the seat belt properly.  
INJURED PERSONS  
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use  
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific  
recommendations.  
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT  
WITH RETRACTOR  
WARNING  
WARNING  
● Every person who drives or rides in this  
vehicle should use a seat belt at all  
times.  
Never let a child stand or kneel on any  
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo  
areas while the vehicle is moving. The  
child could be seriously injured or killed in  
an accident or sudden stop.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0738  
LRS0594  
LRS0595  
Manual front seat shown  
2
3
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor  
and insert the tongue into the buckle until  
you hear and feel the latch engage.  
Position the lap belt portion low and snug  
on the hips as shown.  
᭺
᭺
Fastening the seat belts  
4
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the  
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the  
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder  
and across your chest.  
᭺
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this  
section.  
●
●
The retractor is designed to lock during  
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow  
pulling motion permits the seat belt to  
move, and allows you some freedom of  
movement in the seat.  
The front passenger seat and the rear seating  
positions three-point seat belts have two modes  
of operation:  
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from  
its fully retracted position, firmly pull  
the belt and release it. Then smoothly  
pull the belt out of the retractor.  
●
●
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)  
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow  
the driver and passengers some freedom of  
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt  
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during  
certain impacts.  
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,  
check the operation as follows:  
●
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward  
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-  
strict further belt movement.  
If the retractor does not lock during this check or  
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-  
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.  
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode  
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child  
restraint installation.  
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt  
cannot be extended again until the seat belt  
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully  
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode  
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-  
straints” later in this section for more information.  
WRS0139  
Unfastening the seat belts  
The ALR mode should be used only for  
child restraint installation. During normal  
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode  
should not be activated. If it is activated, it  
may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-  
sion.  
1
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on  
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-  
tracts.  
᭺
Checking seat belt operation  
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt  
movement by two separate methods:  
WARNING  
●
When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the  
retractor.  
When fastening the seat belts, be certain  
that the seatbacks are completely se-  
cured in the latched position. If they are  
not completely secured, passengers may  
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.  
●
When the vehicle slows down rapidly.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The shoulder belt comfort assist arm can be  
adjusted to the position best for you. (See “Pre-  
cautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this sec-  
tion.) To adjust, move the arm up as indicated.  
WARNING  
● After adjustment, release the adjust-  
ment button and try to move the shoul-  
der belt anchor up and down to make  
sure it is securely fixed in position.  
● The shoulder belt anchor height should  
be adjusted to the position best for you.  
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-  
tiveness of the entire restraint system  
and increase the chance or severity of  
injury in an accident.  
LRS0242  
LRS0821  
Shoulder belt height adjustment  
(Sedan, front seats)  
Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)  
The shoulder arm can be adjusted to allow easier  
access to the shoulder belt. The arm can also be  
folded down to allow rear seat passengers easier  
access.  
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-  
justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-  
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)  
1
To adjust, pull out the adjustment button  
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired  
and  
᭺
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS  
2
position , so the belt passes over the center of  
If, because of body size or driving position, it is  
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt  
and fasten it, an extender is available which is  
compatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-  
tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of  
length and may be used for either the driver or  
front passenger seating position. See a NISSAN  
dealer for assistance if an extender is required.  
᭺
the shoulder. The belt should be away from your  
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.  
Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-  
der belt anchor into position.  
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHILD RESTRAINTS  
●
Periodically check to see that the seat  
belt and the metal components, such as  
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires  
and anchors work properly. If loose parts,  
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the  
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-  
sembly should be replaced.  
WARNING  
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made  
by the same company which made the  
original equipment seat belts, should  
be used with NISSAN seat belts.  
● Adults and children who can use the  
standard seat belt should not use an  
extender. Such unnecessary use could  
result in serious personal injury in the  
event of an accident.  
● Never use seat belt extenders to install  
child restraints. If the child restraint is  
not secured properly, the child could be  
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-  
den stop.  
ARS1098  
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD  
RESTRAINTS  
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE  
●
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a  
mild soap solution or any solution recom-  
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.  
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat  
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the  
seat belts to retract until they are completely  
dry.  
●
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt  
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat  
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder  
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-facing  
child restraint in the front seat. An in-  
flating front air bag could seriously in-  
jure or kill your child. A rear-facing child  
restraint must only be used in the rear  
seat.  
● If the child restraint is not anchored  
properly, the risk of a child being in-  
jured in a collision or a sudden stop  
greatly increases.  
● Child restraint anchor points are de-  
signed to withstand only those loads  
imposed by correctly fitted child re-  
straints. Under no circumstances are  
they to be used for adult seat belts or  
harnesses.  
● NISSAN recommends that the child re-  
straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-  
cording to accident statistics, children  
are safer when properly restrained in  
the rear seat than in the front seat. If  
you must install a front-facing child re-  
straint in the front seat, see “Child re-  
straint installation using the seat belts”  
later in this section.  
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-  
tioned to fit the child restraint, but as  
upright as possible.  
WRS0256  
● After attaching the child restraint, test it  
before you place the child in it. Push it  
from side to side while holding the seat  
near the LATCH attachment or by the  
seat belt path. The child restraint  
should not move more than 1 inch (25  
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it  
forward and check to see if the belt  
holds the restraint in place. If the re-  
straint is not secure, tighten the belt as  
necessary, or put the restraint in an-  
other seat and test it again. You may  
need to try a different child restraint.  
Not all child restraints fit in all types of  
vehicles.  
WARNING  
● Improper use or improper installation  
of a child restraint can increase the risk  
or severity of injury for both the child  
and other occupants of the vehicle and  
can lead to serious injury or death in an  
accident.  
● Infants and small children should al-  
ways be placed in an appropriate child  
restraint while riding in the vehicle.  
Failure to use a child restraint can re-  
sult in serious injury or death.  
● Infants and small children should never  
be carried on your lap. It is not possible  
for even the strongest adult to resist the  
forces of a severe accident. The child  
could be crushed between the adult and  
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the  
same seat belt around both your child  
and yourself.  
● Follow all of the child restraint manu-  
facturer’s instructions for installation  
and use. When purchasing a child re-  
straint, be sure to select one which will  
fit your child and vehicle. It may not be  
possible to properly install some types  
of child restraints in your vehicle.  
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for  
infants and small children of various sizes. When  
selecting any child restraint, keep the following  
points in mind:  
●
When your child restraint is not in use,  
keep it secured with the LATCH system  
or a seat belt to prevent it from being  
thrown around in case of a sudden stop  
or accident.  
●
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying  
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
CAUTION  
Remember that a child restraint left in a  
closed vehicle can become very hot.  
Check the seating surface and buckles  
before placing your child in the child  
restraint.  
●
●
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be  
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat  
and seat belt system.  
If the child restraint is compatible with your  
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint  
and check the various adjustments to be  
sure the child restraint is compatible with  
your child. Choose a child restraint that is  
designed for your child’s height and weight.  
Always follow all recommended procedures.  
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child  
restraint lower anchor system, referred to as the  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-  
dren) system. Some child restraints include two  
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can  
be connected to these lower anchors. For details,  
see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for  
CHildren) system” later in this section.  
WRS0795  
LATCH system anchor locations  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers  
for CHildren) SYSTEM  
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor  
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors  
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible  
child restraints. This system may also be referred  
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.  
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle  
seat belt to secure the child restraint.  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or  
territories require that infants and small  
children be restrained in an approved child  
restraint at all times while the vehicle is  
being operated. Canadian law requires the  
top tether strap on front-facing child re-  
straints be secured to the designated an-  
chor point on the vehicle.  
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child  
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See  
“Child restraint installation using the seat belts”  
later in this section. In general, child restraints are  
also designed to be installed with a lap/shoulder  
seat belt.  
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install  
child restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-  
tions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint  
in the center position using the LATCH anchors.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WRS0796  
WRS0829  
LRS0661  
LATCH lower anchor location  
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment  
(if so equipped)  
LATCH lower anchor point locations  
Installing child restraint LATCH anchor  
attachments  
● Do not secure a child restraint in the  
center rear seating position using the  
LATCH anchors. The child restraint will  
not be secured properly.  
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of the  
seat cushion near the seatback. A label is at-  
tached to the seatback to help you locate the  
LATCH anchors.  
LATCH compatible child restraints include two  
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can  
be connected to two anchors located at certain  
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-  
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to  
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-  
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with  
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-  
structions provided by the child restraint manu-  
facturer.  
● Child restraint anchor points are de-  
signed to withstand only those loads  
imposed by correctly fitted child re-  
straints. Under no circumstances are  
they to be used for adult seat belts or  
harnesses.  
WARNING  
● Attach LATCH system compatible child  
restraints only at the locations shown. If  
a child restraint is not secured properly,  
your child could be seriously injured or  
killed in an accident.  
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD  
RESTRAINT  
If the manufacturer of your child restraint requires  
the use of a top tether strap, it must be secured to  
the anchor point.  
WARNING  
● Child restraint anchor points are de-  
signed to withstand only those loads  
imposed by correctly fitted child re-  
straints. Under no circumstances are  
they to be used for adult seat belts or  
harnesses.  
LRS0662  
WRS0797  
● Do not allow cargo to contact the top  
tether strap when it is attached to the  
top tether anchor. Properly secure the  
cargo so it does not contact the top  
tether strap. Cargo that is not properly  
secured or cargo that contacts the top  
tether strap may damage it during a  
collision. Your child could be seriously  
injured or killed in a collision if the top  
tether strap is damaged.  
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment  
Top tether anchor point locations  
LATCH child restraints generally require the use  
of a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child  
restraint” later in this section for installation in-  
structions.  
1
Anchor points  
shelf.  
are located on the rear parcel  
᭺
Installing top tether strap  
When installing a child restraint, carefully read  
and follow the instructions in this manual and  
those supplied with the child restraint. See “Child  
restraint installation using LATCH” later in this  
section.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any  
slack.  
● Inspect the lower anchors by inserting  
your fingers into the lower anchor area  
and feeling to make sure there are no  
obstructions over the LATCH anchors,  
such as seat belt webbing or seat cush-  
ion material. The child restraint will not  
be secured properly if the LATCH an-  
chors are obstructed.  
If you have any questions when installing a  
top tether strap child restraint on the rear  
seat, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-  
tails.  
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION  
USING LATCH  
Front-facing  
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child  
restraint using LATCH system:  
WARNING  
● Attach LATCH system compatible child  
restraints only at the locations shown.  
For the LATCH lower anchor locations  
see “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Teth-  
ers for CHildren) system”. If a child re-  
straint is not secured properly, your  
child could be seriously injured or killed  
in an accident.  
LRS0798  
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH  
System (rear outboard seating positions only) or  
the seat belt, as applicable.  
1
Flip up the anchor cover from the anchor  
point which is located directly behind the  
child seat.  
᭺
● The LATCH anchors are designed to  
withstand only those loads imposed by  
correctly fitted child restraints. Under  
no circumstances are they to be used  
for adult seat belts or harnesses.  
2
Position the top tether strap over the top of  
᭺
the seatback.  
3
Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
bracket that provides the straightest installa-  
tion.  
᭺
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LRS0824  
WRS0799  
WRS0800  
Front-facing web-mounted – step 3  
Front-facing rigid-mounted – step 3  
(if so equipped)  
1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap , pull the  
1
If the seating position does not have an adjust-  
able head restraint and it is interfering with the  
proper child restraint fit, try another seating posi-  
tion or a different child restraint.  
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-  
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check  
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-  
erly attached to the lower anchors.  
᭺
2
flap down to allow access to the anchors  
.
᭺
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-  
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-  
er’s instructions.  
4. The back of the child restraint should be  
secured against the vehicle seatback.  
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint  
to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head  
restraints” earlier in this section.  
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a  
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head re-  
straint when the child restraint is removed.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 4  
through 7.  
Rear-facing  
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child  
restraint using LATCH system:  
LRS0671  
WRS0697  
Front-facing – step 5  
Front-facing – step 7  
5. For child restraints that are equipped with  
webbing mounted attachments, remove any  
additional slack from the anchor attach-  
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly  
in the center of the child restraint with your  
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while tightening the webbing  
of the anchor attachments.  
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the seat near the  
LATCH attachment path. The child restraint  
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),  
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and  
check to see if the LATCH attachment holds  
the restraint in place. If the restraint is not  
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as  
necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
6. If the child restraint is equipped with a top  
tether strap, route the top tether strap and  
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point. See “Top tether strap child restraint”in  
this section.  
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0824  
WRS0801  
WRS0802  
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 3  
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 3  
(if so equipped)  
1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap , pull the  
1
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-  
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check  
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-  
erly attached to the lower anchors.  
᭺
2
flap down to allow access to the anchors  
.
᭺
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-  
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-  
er’s instructions. Check to make sure the  
LATCH attachment is properly attached to  
the lower anchors.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3  
through 5.  
LRS0673  
LRS0674  
Rear-facing – step 4  
Rear-facing – step 5  
4. For child restraints that are equipped with  
webbing mounted attachments, remove any  
additional slack from the anchor attach-  
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly  
in the center of the child restraint with your  
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while tightening the webbing  
of the anchor attachments.  
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the seat near the  
LATCH attachment path. The child restraint  
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),  
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and  
check to see if the LATCH attachment holds  
the restraint in place. If the restraint is not  
secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as  
necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● NISSAN recommends that child re-  
straints be installed in the rear seat.  
However, if you must install a front-  
facing child restraint in the front pas-  
senger seat, move the passenger seat  
to the rearmost position. Also, be sure  
the front passenger air bag status light  
is illuminated to indicate the passenger  
air bag is OFF. See “Front passenger air  
bag and status light” later in this sec-  
tion for details.  
● The three-point seat belt in your vehicle  
is equipped with an Automatic Locking  
Retractor (ALR) which must be used  
when installing a child restraint.  
WRS0699  
WRS0256  
Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1  
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION  
● Failure to use the ALR mode will result  
in the child restraint not being properly  
secured. The restraint could tip over or  
otherwise be unsecured and cause in-  
jury to the child in a sudden stop or  
collision.  
Front-facing  
USING THE SEAT BELTS  
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child  
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear  
seats or in the front passenger seat:  
WARNING  
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-facing  
child restraint in the front passenger  
seat. Front air bags inflate with great  
force. A rear-facing child restraint could  
be struck by the front air bag in a crash  
and could seriously injure or kill your  
child.  
1. If you must install a child restraint in  
the front seat, it should be placed in a  
front-facing direction only. Move the  
seat to the rearmost position. Child  
restraints for infants must be used in  
the rear-facing direction and therefore  
must not be used in the front seat.  
● A child restraint with a top tether strap  
should not be used in the front passen-  
ger seat.  
The instructions in this section apply to child  
restraint installation using the vehicle seat belts in  
the rear seat or the front passenger seat.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-  
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-  
er’s instructions.  
The back of the child restraint should be secured  
against the vehicle seatback.  
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint  
to obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Head  
restraint adjustment” in this section.  
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a  
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head re-  
straint when the child restraint is removed.  
If the seating position does not have an adjust-  
able head restraint and it is interfering with the  
proper child restraint fit, try another seating posi-  
tion or a different child restraint.  
WRS0680  
LRS0667  
Front-facing – step 3  
Front-facing – step 4  
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child  
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you  
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to  
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-  
structions for belt routing.  
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully  
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor  
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
when the seat belt is fully retracted.  
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LRS0668  
WRS0681  
WRS0698  
Front-facing – step 7  
Front-facing – step 5  
Front-facing – step 6  
7. If the child restraint is equipped with a top  
tether strap, route the top tether strap and  
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor  
point (rear seat installation only). See “Top  
tether strap child restraint” in this section.  
Do not install child restraints that require the  
use of a top tether strap to seating positions  
that do not have a top tether anchor.  
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the  
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.  
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat  
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in  
the center of the child restraint with your  
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion  
and seatback while pulling up on the seat  
belt.  
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the seat near the seat  
belt path. The child restraint should not  
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to  
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the  
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as  
necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
9. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode  
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the  
retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt  
webbing out of the retractor, the retractor is  
in the ALR mode.  
10. Check to make sure the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3  
through 9.  
WRS0475  
WRS0256  
Rear-facing – step 1  
Front-facing – step 11  
11. If the child restraint is installed in the front  
passenger seat, push the ignition switch to  
the ON position. The front passenger air bag  
Rear-facing  
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child  
restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear  
seats:  
status light  
should illuminate. If this  
light is not illuminated see ЉFront passenger  
air bag and status lightЉ in this section.  
Move the child restraint to another  
seating position. Have the system  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
1. Child restraints for infants must be  
used in the rear-facing direction and  
therefore must not be used in the front  
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.  
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s  
instructions.  
After the child restraint is removed and the seat  
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-  
straint mode) is canceled.  
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0761  
LRS0669  
LRS0670  
Rear-facing – step 2  
Rear-facing – step 3  
Rear-facing – step 4  
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child  
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you  
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to  
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-  
structions for belt routing.  
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully  
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor  
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)  
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the  
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode  
when the seat belt is fully retracted.  
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the  
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Check that the retractor is in the ALR mode  
by trying to pull more seat belt out of the  
retractor. If you cannot pull any more seat  
belt webbing out of the retractor, the retrac-  
tor is in the ALR mode.  
8. Check to make sure that the child restraint is  
properly secured prior to each use. If the  
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3  
through 7.  
After the child restraint is removed and the seat  
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint  
mode) is canceled.  
WRS0762  
WRS0763  
Rear-facing – step 5  
Rear-facing – step 6  
5. Remove any additional slack from the child  
restraint; press downward and rearward  
firmly in the center of the child restraint to  
compress the vehicle seat cushion and seat-  
back while pulling up on the seat belt.  
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-  
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side  
to side while holding the seat near the seat  
belt path. The child restraint should not  
move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to  
side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if  
the belt holds the restraint in place. If the  
restraint is not secure, tighten the belt as  
necessary, or put the restraint in another  
seat and test it again. You may need to try a  
different child restraint. Not all child re-  
straints fit in all types of vehicles.  
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BOOSTER SEATS  
● Infants and small children should never  
be carried on your lap. It is not possible  
for even the strongest adult to resist the  
forces of a severe accident. The child  
could be crushed between the adult and  
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the  
same seat belt around both your child  
and yourself.  
● Do not use towels, books, pillows or  
other items in place of a booster seat.  
Items such as these may move during  
normal driving or a collision and result  
in serious injury or death. Booster seats  
are designed to be used with  
a
lap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-  
signed to properly route the lap and  
shoulder portions of the seat belt over  
the strongest portions of a child’s body  
to provide the maximum protection dur-  
ing a collision.  
● NISSAN recommends that the booster  
seat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-  
cording to accident statistics, children  
are safer when properly restrained in  
the rear seat than in the front seat. If  
you must install a booster seat in the  
front seat, see “Booster seat installa-  
tion” in this section.  
● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-  
turer’s instructions for installation and  
use. When purchasing a booster seat,  
be sure to select one which will fit your  
child and vehicle. It may not be possible  
to properly install some types of  
booster seats in your vehicle.  
ARS1098  
PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER  
SEATS  
● A booster seat must only be installed in  
a
seating position that has  
a
a
a
WARNING  
lap/shoulder belt. Failure to use  
three-point type seat belt with  
● If the booster seat and seat belt is not  
used properly, the risk of a child being  
injured in a collision or a sudden stop  
greatly increases.  
● Infants and small children should al-  
ways be placed in an appropriate child  
restraint while riding in the vehicle.  
booster seat can result in a serious in-  
jury in sudden stop or collision.  
Failure to use  
a
child restraint or  
● Improper use or improper installation  
of a booster seat can increase the risk  
or severity of injury for both the child  
and other occupants of the vehicle and  
can lead to serious injury or death in an  
accident.  
booster seat can result in serious injury  
or death.  
● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-  
tioned to fit the booster seat, but as  
upright as possible.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● After placing the child in the booster  
seat and fastening the seat belt, make  
sure the shoulder portion of the belt is  
away from the child’s face and neck and  
the lap portion of the belt does not  
cross the abdomen.  
● Do not put the shoulder belt behind the  
child or under the child’s arm. If you  
must install a booster seat in the front  
seat, see “Booster seat installation”  
later in this section.  
● When your booster seat is not in use,  
keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-  
vent it from being thrown around in  
case of a sudden stop or accident.  
LRS0455  
WRS0813  
●
Make sure the child’s head will be properly  
supported by the booster seat or vehicle  
seat. The seatback must be at or above the  
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a  
1
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by  
several manufacturers. When selecting any  
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:  
CAUTION  
Remember that a booster seat left in a  
closed vehicle can become very hot.  
Check the seating surface and buckles  
before placing your child in the booster  
seat.  
●
Choose only a booster seat with a label  
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian  
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
low back booster seat  
is chosen, the  
᭺
vehicle seatback must be at or above the  
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is  
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a  
2
high back booster seat  
should be used.  
●
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be  
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat  
and seat belt system.  
᭺
●
If the booster seat is compatible with your  
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat  
and check the various adjustments to be  
sure the booster seat is compatible with your  
child. Always follow all recommended pro-  
cedures.  
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION  
WARNING  
NISSAN recommends that booster seats  
be installed in the rear seat. However, if  
you must install a booster seat in the front  
passenger seat, move the passenger’s  
seat to the rearmost position.  
CAUTION  
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-  
matic Locking Retractor mode when using  
a booster seat with the seat belts.  
WRS0811  
WRS0699  
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the  
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:  
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or  
territories require that infants and small  
children be restrained in an approved child  
restraint at all times while the vehicle is  
being operated.  
1. If you must install a booster seat in the  
front seat, move the seat to the rear-  
most position.  
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only  
place it in a front-facing direction. Always  
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-  
structions.  
The instructions in this section apply to booster  
seat installation in the rear seats or the front  
passenger seat.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low  
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to  
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-  
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.  
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt  
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.  
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned  
across the top, middle portion of the child’s  
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat  
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the  
seat belt routing.  
LRS0451  
WRS0812  
Rear center position  
Rear outboard position  
3. The booster seat should be positioned on  
the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-  
sary, adjust or remove the head restraint to  
obtain the correct booster seat fit. See  
“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in this  
section.  
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a  
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head  
restraint when the booster seat is removed.  
If the seating position does not have an  
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering  
with the proper booster seat fit, try another  
seating position or a different booster seat.  
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM  
PRECAUTIONS ON  
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT  
SYSTEM  
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-  
tion contains important information concerning  
the following systems:  
●
Driver and passenger supplemental front-  
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag  
System)  
●
●
●
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag  
LRS0454  
WRS0475  
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-  
mental air bag  
Front passenger position  
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front  
passenger seat, push the ignition switch to  
the ON position. The front passenger air bag  
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-  
tions for properly fastening a seat belt  
shown in “Three-point seat belt with retrac-  
tor” earlier in this section.  
Seat belt with pretensioner  
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:  
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help  
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of  
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal  
collisions.  
status light  
may or may not illuminate,  
depending on the size of the child and the  
type of booster seat being used. See “Front  
passenger air bag and status light” later in  
this section.  
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag system: This system can help  
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic  
area of the driver and front passenger in certain  
side-impact collisions. The side air bags are de-  
signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is  
impacted.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-  
mental air bag system: This system can help  
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-  
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions  
in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air  
bags are designed to inflate on the side where  
the vehicle is impacted.  
These supplemental restraint systems are de-  
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-  
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts  
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts  
should always be correctly worn and the occu-  
pant seated a suitable distance away from the  
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-  
ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for  
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)  
WRS0031  
● The seat belts and the front air bags are  
most effective when you are sitting well  
back and upright in the seat. The front  
air bags inflate with great force. Even  
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-  
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning  
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-  
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of  
injury or death in a crash. You may also  
receive serious or fatal injuries from the  
front air bag if you are up against it  
when it inflates. Always sit back against  
the seatback and as far away as practi-  
cal from the steering wheel or instru-  
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.  
WARNING  
The supplemental air bags operate only  
when the ignition switch is placed in the  
ON position.  
● The front air bags ordinarily will not  
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear  
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-  
tal collision. Always wear your seat  
belts to help reduce the risk or severity  
of injury in various kinds of accidents.  
After placing the ignition switch in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
● The front passenger air bag will not  
inflate if the passenger air bag status  
light is lit or if the front passenger seat  
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air  
bag and status light” later in this  
section.  
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● The driver and front passenger seat belt  
buckles are equipped with sensors that  
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The  
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the  
severity of a collision and seat belt us-  
age then inflates the air bags. Failure to  
properly wear seat belts can increase  
the risk or severity of injury in an  
accident.  
● The front passenger seat is equipped  
with an occupant classification sensor  
(pattern sensor) that turns the front  
passenger air bag OFF under some  
conditions. This sensor is only used in  
this seat. Failure to be properly seated  
and wearing the seat belt can increase  
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-  
dent. See “Front passenger air bag and  
status light” later in this section.  
ARS1133  
● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-  
ing wheel. Placing them inside the  
steering wheel rim could increase the  
risk that they are injured when the front  
air bag inflates.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ARS1041  
ARS1042  
ARS1043  
WARNING  
● Never let children ride unrestrained or  
extend their hands or face out of the  
window. Do not attempt to hold them in  
your lap or arms. Some examples of  
dangerous riding positions are shown  
in the illustrations.  
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ARS1044  
ARS1045  
ARS1046  
WARNING  
● Children may be severely injured or  
killed when the front air bags, side air  
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they  
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens  
and children should be properly re-  
strained in the rear seat, if possible.  
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air  
Bag System, never install a rear-facing  
child restraint in the front seat. An in-  
flating front air bag could seriously in-  
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-  
straints” earlier in this section for  
details.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING  
● The seat belts, the side air bags and  
curtain air bags are most effective when  
you are sitting well back and upright in  
the seat with both feet on the floor. The  
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate  
with great force. Do not allow anyone to  
place their hand, leg or face near the  
side air bag on the side of the seatback  
of the front seat or near the side roof  
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the  
front seats or rear outboard seats to  
extend their hand out of the window or  
lean against the door. Some examples  
of dangerous riding positions are  
shown in the previous illustrations.  
SSS0101  
WRS0032  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain  
side-impact supplemental air bags:  
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not  
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.  
If the side air bag inflates, you may be  
seriously injured. Be especially careful  
with children, who should always be  
properly restrained. Some examples of  
dangerous riding positions are shown  
in the illustrations.  
● The side air bags and curtain air bags  
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of  
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or  
lower severity side collision. Always  
wear your seat belts to help reduce the  
risk or severity of injury in various kinds  
of accidents.  
● Do not use seat covers on the front  
seatbacks. They may interfere with side  
air bag inflation.  
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SSS0159  
SSS0162  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WRS0845  
Coupe  
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag inflators  
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bags  
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact  
supplemental air bag modules  
4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)  
5. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-  
ules  
6. Crash zone sensor  
7. Seat belt buckle switches on driver’s  
and passenger’s side  
8. Occupant classification sensor (pattern  
sensor)  
9. Occupant classification system control  
unit  
10. Seat belt with pretensioner  
11. Side satellite sensor  
WRS0844  
Sedan  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the front passenger, the occupant classification  
sensor is also monitored. Based on information  
from the sensors, only one front air bag may  
inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity  
and whether the front occupants are belted or  
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air  
bag may be automatically turned OFF under  
some conditions, depending on the information  
provided by the occupant classification sensor. If  
the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger  
air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is  
unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but  
the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air  
bag and status light” later in this section for  
further details. One front air bag inflating does not  
indicate improper performance of the system.  
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,  
help to cushion the impact force on the face and  
chest of the front occupants. They can help save  
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an  
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions  
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide  
restraint to the lower body.  
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System  
(front seats)  
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-  
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front  
passenger seats. This system is designed to  
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-  
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,  
all of the information, cautions and warn-  
ings in this manual still apply and must be  
followed.  
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts  
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-  
senger seated upright as far as practical away  
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The  
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help  
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the  
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the  
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is  
against, the front air bag module during inflation.  
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is  
located in the center of the steering wheel. The  
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is  
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.  
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher  
severity frontal collisions, although they may in-  
flate if the forces in another type of collision are  
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.  
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.  
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an  
indication of proper front air bag system opera-  
tion.  
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.  
If you have any questions about your air bag  
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN  
dealer. If you are considering modification of your  
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact  
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the  
front of this Owner’s Manual.  
The front air bags operate only when the  
ignition switch is in the ON position.  
After placing the ignition switch in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise  
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.  
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a  
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may  
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history  
of a breathing condition should get fresh air  
promptly.  
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual  
stage air bag inflators. It also monitors informa-  
tion from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag  
Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and  
the occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-  
sor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of  
a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For  
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status light  
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce  
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag  
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such  
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-  
matically turned OFF.  
The front passenger air bag status light  
located on the instrument panel above the radio  
controls. The light operates as follows:  
is  
●
●
Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The  
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF  
and will not inflate in a crash.  
is  
The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-  
sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is  
designed to detect an occupant and objects on  
the seat. For example, if a child is in the front  
passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is  
designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in  
accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child  
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is  
on the seat, the occupant classification sensor  
can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.  
Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,  
child or child restraint as outlined in this  
section: The  
illuminates to indicate  
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and  
will not inflate in a crash.  
WRS0475  
●
Occupied passenger seat and the passen-  
ger meets the conditions outlined in this  
Front passenger air bag and status light  
section: The light  
that the front passenger air bag is opera-  
tional.  
is OFF to indicate  
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are  
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-  
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-  
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For  
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the  
occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for  
example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an  
edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of  
position), this could cause the sensor to turn the  
air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and  
wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-  
tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental  
air bag.  
WARNING  
The front passenger air bag is designed to  
automatically turn OFF under some con-  
ditions. Read this section carefully to  
learn how it operates. Proper use of the  
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-  
essary for most effective protection. Fail-  
ure to follow all instructions in this  
manual concerning the use of seats, seat  
belts and child restraints can increase the  
risk or severity of injury in an accident.  
Front passenger air bag  
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-  
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated  
under some conditions as described below in  
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front  
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a  
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your  
vehicle are not part of this system.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-  
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.  
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child  
restraints and booster seats be properly installed  
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant  
classification sensor is designed to operate as  
described above to turn the front passenger air  
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required  
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure  
child restraints and to use the ALR mode (child  
restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or  
move in an accident or sudden stop. This can  
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a  
crash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-  
straints” earlier in this section for proper use and  
installation.  
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-  
senger seat is unoccupied.  
The air bag system and passenger air bag status  
light will take a few seconds to register a change  
in the passenger seat status. However, if the seat  
becomes unoccupied, the air bag status light will  
remain off.  
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-  
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating  
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the  
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat  
properly.  
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air  
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning  
light  
, located in the meter and gauges area  
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,  
the passenger air bag status light may or may not  
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child  
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air  
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that  
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be  
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being  
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is  
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly  
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air  
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the  
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.  
in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.  
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
Other supplemental front-impact air bag  
precautions  
WARNING  
● Do not place any objects on the steer-  
ing wheel pad or on the instrument  
panel. Also, do not place any objects  
between any occupant and the steering  
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-  
jects may become dangerous projec-  
tiles and cause injury if the front air  
bags inflate.  
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the  
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a  
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the  
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of  
the object being detected by the occupant clas-  
sification sensor. Other conditions could also  
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is  
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the  
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.  
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants  
are seated and restrained properly.  
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-  
minate even though you believe that the child  
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are  
properly positioned, the system may be sensing  
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is  
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the  
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,  
until you have confirmed with your dealer that  
your air bag is working properly, reposition the  
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.  
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can  
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-  
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.  
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Do not place objects with sharp edges  
on the seat. Also, do not place heavy  
objects on the seat that will leave per-  
manent impressions in the seat. Such  
objects can damage the seat or occu-  
pant classification sensor (pattern sen-  
sor). This can affect the operation of the  
air bag system and result in serious  
personal injury.  
● Tampering with the front air bag system  
may result in serious personal injury.  
Tampering includes changes to the  
steering wheel and the instrument  
panel assembly by placing material  
over the steering wheel pad and above  
the instrument panel or by installing  
additional trim material around the air  
bag system.  
● Work on and around the front air bag  
system should be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-  
ment should also be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint  
System (SRS) wiring should not be  
modified or disconnected. Unautho-  
rized electrical test equipment and  
probing devices should not be used on  
the air bag system.  
● Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot  
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can  
damage the seat or occupant classifica-  
tion sensor. This can also affect the  
operation of the air bag system and  
result in serious personal injury.  
● Modifying or tampering with the front  
passenger seat may result in serious  
personal injury. For example, do not  
change the front seats by placing mate-  
rial on the seat cushion or by installing  
additional trim material, such as seat  
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-  
cally designed to assure proper air bag  
operation. Additionally, do not stow any  
objects under the front passenger seat  
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such  
objects may interfere with the proper  
operation of the occupant classifica-  
tion sensor.  
● A cracked windshield should be re-  
placed immediately by a qualified re-  
pair facility. A cracked windshield could  
affect the function of the supplemental  
air bag system.  
● Immediately after inflation, several  
front air bag system components will be  
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-  
verely burn yourself.  
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are  
yellow and orange for easy identification.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the front air bag system  
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections  
in this Owner’s Manual.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the supplemental air bag system. This is  
to prevent accidental inflation of the  
supplemental air bag or damage to the  
supplemental air bag system.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the seat belt system. This may affect the  
front air bag system. Tampering with  
the seat belt system may result in seri-  
ous personal injury.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are  
similar to those of a higher severity side impact.  
They are designed to inflate on the side where the  
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-  
tain side collisions.  
practical from the door finishers and side roof  
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate  
quickly in order to help protect the front occu-  
pants. Because of this, the force of the side air  
bag and curtain air bag inflating can increase the  
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is  
against, these air bag modules during inflation.  
The side air bags and curtain air bag will deflate  
quickly after the collision is over.  
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an  
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air  
bag operation.  
When the side air bags and curtain air bags  
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed  
by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful  
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken  
not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and  
choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-  
dition should get fresh air promptly.  
The side air bags and curtain air bags op-  
erate only when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position.  
After placing the ignition switch in the ON  
position, the supplemental air bag warning  
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag  
warning light will turn off after about 7  
seconds if the system is operational.  
WRS0816  
Front seat-mounted side-impact  
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,  
help to cushion the impact force on the chest and  
pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air  
bags help to cushion the impact force to the head  
of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-  
ing positions. They can help save lives and re-  
duce serious injuries. However, an inflating side  
air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions  
or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air  
bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.  
supplemental air bag and roof-  
mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag systems  
WARNING  
The side air bags are located in the outside of the  
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags  
are located in the side roof rails. These systems  
are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help  
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-  
pants. However, all of the information, cau-  
tions and warnings in this manual still ap-  
ply and must be followed. The side air bags  
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in  
higher severity side collisions, although they may  
● Do not place any objects near the seat-  
back of the front seats. Also, do not  
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,  
etc.) between the front door finisher  
and the front seat. Such objects may  
become dangerous projectiles and  
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.  
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the  
driver and passenger seated upright as far as  
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat  
passengers should be seated as far away as  
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Right after inflation, several side air bag  
and curtain air bag system components  
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may  
severely burn yourself.  
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-  
ing harnesses* should not be modified  
or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-  
cal test equipment and probing devices  
should not be used on the side air bag  
or curtain air bag system.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-  
vent damage to or accidental activation  
of the pretensioners. Tampering with  
the pretensioner system may result in  
serious personal injury.  
● No unauthorized changes should be  
made to any components or wiring of  
the side air bag and curtain air bag  
systems. This is to prevent damage to or  
accidental inflation of the side air bag  
and curtain air bag or damage to the  
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.  
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow  
and orange for easy identification.  
● Work around and on the pretensioner  
system should be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-  
ment should also be done by a NISSAN  
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test  
equipment and probing devices should  
not be used on the pretensioner system.  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the side air bag and  
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to  
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.  
● Do not make unauthorized changes to  
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-  
pension system or side panel. This  
could affect proper operation of the  
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.  
Seat belts with pretensioners (Front  
seats)  
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner  
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN  
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures  
could cause personal injury.  
● Tampering with the side air bag system  
may result in serious personal injury.  
For example, do not change the front  
seats by placing material near the seat-  
backs or by installing additional trim  
material, such as seat covers, around  
the side air bag.  
WARNING  
● The pretensioners cannot be reused af-  
ter activation. They must be replaced  
together with the retractor and buckle  
as a unit.  
The pretensioner system activates in conjunction  
with the front air bag system. Working with the  
seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt  
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain  
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat  
occupants.  
● If the vehicle becomes involved in a  
frontal collision but a pretensioner is  
not activated, be sure to have the pre-  
tensioner system checked and, if nec-  
essary, replaced by your NISSAN  
dealer.  
● Work around and on the side air bag  
and curtain air bag system should be  
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation  
of electrical equipment should also be  
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt  
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way  
as conventional seat belts.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-  
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This  
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.  
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may  
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history  
of a breathing condition should get fresh air  
promptly.  
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow  
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to  
reduce forces against the chest.  
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-  
tem, the supplemental air bag warning  
light  
will not come on, will flash intermit-  
WRS0169  
LRS0100  
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on  
after the ignition switch has been placed in the  
ON or START position. In this case, the preten-  
sioner system may not function properly. They  
must be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle  
to the nearest NISSAN dealer.  
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located  
on the sun visors)  
2. SRS Air Bag Warning Label (located on  
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG  
WARNING LIGHT  
The supplemental air bag warning light,  
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-  
the door pillar)  
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG  
WARNING LABELS  
When selling your vehicle, we request that you  
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system  
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections  
in this Owner’s Manual.  
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact  
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-  
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact  
supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner  
systems. The monitored circuits include the Air  
bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-  
ellite sensors, occupant classification system,  
front air bag modules, side air bag modules,  
curtain air bag modules, pretensioners and all  
related wiring.  
Warning labels about the supplemental front-  
impact air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact  
supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain  
side-impact supplemental air bag systems are  
placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.  
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When the ignition is placed in the ON position,  
the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates  
for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This  
means the system is operational.  
Repair and replacement procedure  
● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain  
air bag systems and the pretensioner  
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags  
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a  
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is  
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light  
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.  
Repair and replacement of these supplemental  
air bag systems should be done only by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
system should be inspected by  
a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to  
the front end or side portion of the  
vehicle.  
If any of the following conditions occur, the front  
air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag and  
pretensioner systems need servicing:  
● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-  
tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the  
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Cor-  
rect supplemental air bag and preten-  
sioner system disposal procedures are  
set forth in the appropriate NISSAN  
Service Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-  
cedures could cause personal injury.  
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-  
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.  
When maintenance work is required on the ve-  
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air  
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be  
pointed out to the person performing the mainte-  
nance. The ignition should always be in the LOCK  
position when working under the hood or inside  
the vehicle.  
The supplemental air bag warning light  
flashes intermittently.  
The supplemental air bag warning light does  
not come on at all.  
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air  
bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems  
may not operate properly. They must be checked  
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest  
NISSAN dealer.  
WARNING  
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or  
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag  
module will not function again and  
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of  
the front air bags inflate, the activated  
pretensioners must also be replaced.  
The air bag module and pretensioners  
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.  
The air bag module and pretensioners  
cannot be repaired.  
WARNING  
If the supplemental air bag warning light  
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,  
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-  
sioner systems will not operate in an ac-  
cident. To help avoid injury to yourself or  
others, have your vehicle checked by a  
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.  
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 Instruments and controls  
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2  
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . .2-32  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6  
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . .2-10  
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14  
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16  
Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17  
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . .2-17  
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27  
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27  
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)  
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Traction Control System (TCS) off switch  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Map pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Storage pouch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
Sunglasses holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40  
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Storage box (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28  
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42  
Grocery hooks (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43  
Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43  
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46  
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46  
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Console light (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
HomeLinkா universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . .2-51  
Programming HomeLinkா. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51  
Programming HomeLinkா for Canadian  
customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52  
Operating the HomeLinkா universal  
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Clearing the programmed information. . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Rolling code programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53  
Reprogramming a single HomeLinkா button . . . . . .2-54  
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTRUMENT PANEL  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Driver supplemental air bag/horn  
(P. 1-43, P. 2-34)  
Cruise control main/set switch  
(P. 5-19)  
Windshield wiper/washer switch  
(P. 2-27)  
8.  
9.  
Ignition switch (P. 5-7)  
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-33)  
10. Front passenger air bag status light  
(P. 1-53)  
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag  
(P. 1-43)  
12. Glove box (P. 2-41)  
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-2)  
14. Heater and air conditioner (manual or  
automatic) (P. 4-11, P. 4-18)  
15. Shift selector (P. 5-11)  
16. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/  
Storage (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-21, P.2-42)  
WIC1258  
17. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls  
1.  
2.  
Vents (P. 4-10)  
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn  
signal switch (P. 2-29)  
3.  
4.  
Steering wheel switch for audio control  
(if so equipped)/Bluetoothா hands-free  
phone system (if so equipped)  
(P. 4-44, P. 4-46, P. 4-61)  
(P. 3-27)  
18. Vehicle information display controls  
(P. 2-17)  
19. Hood release (P. 3-23)  
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)  
2-2 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
METERS AND GAUGES  
20. Traction Control System (TCS) OFF  
switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-25)  
Trunk opener (P. 3-23)  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF  
switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)  
Intelligent Key port (P. 5-7)  
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual.  
See the page number indicated in paren-  
theses for operating details.  
WIC1259  
1. Tachometer  
2. Speedometer  
7. Vehicle information display  
8. Instrument brightness control  
3. Fuel gauge  
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge  
5. Odometer/twin trip odometer  
6. Twin trip odometer change button  
Instruments and controls 2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The odometer records the total distance the ve-  
hicle has been driven.  
The twin trip odometer records the distance of  
individual trips.  
WIC1418  
WIC1261  
Changing the display:  
1. Speedometer  
2. Change button  
3. Odometer/twin trip odometer  
Pushing the change button changes the display  
as follows:  
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER  
Trip  
→ Trip  
→ Trip  
Speedometer  
Resetting the trip odometer:  
1
The speedometer  
indicates vehicle speed in  
᭺
Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-  
ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer  
to zero.  
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour  
(km/h).  
Odometer/Twin trip odometer  
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed  
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position.  
2-4 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-  
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal  
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease  
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-  
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as  
safely possible. If the engine is over-  
heated, continued operation of the ve-  
hicle may seriously damage the engine.  
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In  
case of emergency”section for immediate  
action required.  
LIC1058  
LIC1059  
TACHOMETER  
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE  
GAUGE  
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-  
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into  
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-  
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the  
1
the red zone  
.
᭺
1
normal range  
when the gauge needle points  
᭺
CAUTION  
within the zone shown in the illustration.  
When engine speed approaches the red  
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-  
gine speed. Operating the engine in the  
red zone may cause serious engine  
damage.  
The engine coolant temperature varies with the  
outside air temperature and driving conditions.  
Instruments and controls 2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)  
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-  
dicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.  
The  
indicates that the fuel-filler door is  
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.  
With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-  
CAUTION  
tion, press the  
button as described in the  
chart below to activate various features of the  
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.  
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,  
the  
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as  
possible. After few driving trips,  
the light should turn off. If the  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
Push and hold  
Feature:  
(Push button again for about 1 sec-  
the  
a
ond to change settings)  
button for about:  
1 second  
Compass display toggles on/off  
light remains on after a few driving  
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
Compass zone can be changed to  
correct false compass readings  
5 seconds  
9 seconds  
LIC1060  
Compass enters calibration mode  
● For additional information, see “Mal-  
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in  
this section.  
FUEL GAUGE  
For information about the automatic anti-glare  
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview  
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-  
ments” section.  
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level  
in the tank.  
The gauge may move slightly during braking,  
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.  
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the  
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.  
The low fuel warning light comes on when the  
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.  
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-  
ters E (Empty).  
2-6 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You can also calibrate the compass by driving  
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-  
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three  
complete circles.  
Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop  
button and the display will  
show compass direction within a few seconds.  
pressing the  
NOTE:  
COMPASS DISPLAY  
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.  
Push the  
button when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position. The direction will be  
displayed.  
Zone variation change procedure  
The difference between magnetic north and geo-  
graphical north is known as variance. In some  
areas, this difference can sometimes be great  
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow  
these instructions to set the variance for your  
particular location if this happens:  
LIC0583  
Push the  
button for about 1 second when  
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to  
on or off. The  
display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s  
heading.  
1
toggle the compass display  
᭺
1. Establish your location on the zone map.  
Refer to the illustration. Record your zone  
number.  
N: North  
E: East  
S: South  
W: West  
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
3. Push the  
button in for 5 seconds until  
the current zone entry number is displayed.  
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by  
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at  
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).  
4. Press the  
button repeatedly until the  
desired zone entry number is displayed.  
Instruments and controls 2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
If a magnet is located near the com-  
pass or the vehicle is driven where the  
terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the  
compass display may not indicate the  
correct direction.  
In places where the terrestrial magne-  
tism is disturbed, the correction of the  
direction starts automatically.  
Inaccurate compass direction:  
The compass display is equipped with automatic  
correction function. If the correct direction is not  
shown, follow this procedure.  
1. With the display turned on, press and hold  
the  
switch for about 9 seconds. The  
display will read “C.”  
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle  
in three complete circles at a maximum  
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).  
3. After completing the circles the display  
should return to normal.  
●
If the compass deviates from the correct  
indication soon after repeated adjustment,  
have the compass checked at an authorized  
NISSAN dealer.  
WIC0355  
2-8 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
The compass may not indicate the correct  
compass point in tunnels or while driving up  
or down a steep hill. (The compass returns  
to the correct compass point when the ve-  
hicle moves to an area where the geomag-  
netism is stabilized.)  
CAUTION  
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,  
which are attached to the vehicle by  
means of a magnet. They affect the op-  
eration of the compass.  
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper  
towel or similar material dampened  
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass  
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may  
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the  
mirror housing.  
Instruments and controls 2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND  
AUDIBLE REMINDERS  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ warning light  
Security indicator light  
or  
or  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)  
warning light  
Seat belt warning light and chime  
Supplemental air bag warning light  
Slip indicator light (if so equipped)  
Brake warning light  
Charge warning light  
Traction Control System off indicator light (if so  
equipped)  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
check warning light (if so equipped)  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) po-  
sition indicator light (if so equipped)  
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights  
Engine oil pressure warning light  
Front passenger air bag status light  
Vehicle Dynamic Control off indicator light (if  
so equipped)  
Low tire pressure warning light  
Master warning light  
High beam indicator light (Blue)  
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)  
The following lights come on briefly and then go  
off:  
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate  
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the  
electrical system. Have the system repaired  
promptly.  
CHECKING BULBS  
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake  
and place the ignition switch in the ON position  
without starting the engine. The following lights  
will come on:  
or  
,
,
,
,
,
,
or  
,
,
,
2-10 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Low brake fluid warning light  
WARNING LIGHTS  
or Anti-lock Braking  
● If the brake fluid level is below the  
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake  
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the  
brake system has been checked at a  
NISSAN dealer.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.  
If the light comes on while the engine is running  
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-  
hicle and perform the following:  
System (ABS)  
warning light  
Charge warning light  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)  
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This  
indicates the ABS is operational.  
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid  
as necessary. See “Brake fluid”in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
If this light comes on while the engine is running,  
it may indicate the charging system is not func-  
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check  
the drive belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing,  
or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN dealer  
immediately.  
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the  
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate  
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the  
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the  
warning system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-  
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates  
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See  
ЉBrake systemЉ in the ЉStarting and drivingЉ sec-  
tion.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Do not continue driving if the drive belt is  
loose, broken or missing.  
● Your brake system may not be working  
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-  
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it  
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest  
service station for repairs. Otherwise,  
have your vehicle towed because driv-  
ing it could be dangerous.  
Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) check  
warning light (if so equipped)  
or  
Brake warning light  
This light functions for both the parking brake and  
the foot brake systems.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.  
If the light comes on at any other time, it may  
indicate the CVT system is not functioning prop-  
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-  
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid  
level may increase your stopping dis-  
tance and braking will require greater  
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.  
Parking brake indicator  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, the light comes on when the parking  
brake is applied.  
Instruments and controls 2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low  
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not  
functioning properly.  
TPMS malfunction:  
Engine oil pressure warning  
light  
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low  
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-  
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on  
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the  
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,  
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine  
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other  
authorized repair shop.  
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second  
and turns off.  
Low tire pressure warning:  
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and  
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.  
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire  
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.  
The engine oil pressure warning light is not  
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the  
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in  
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of  
this manual.  
When the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the  
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-  
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the  
Tire and Loading Information label located  
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire  
pressure warning light does not automati-  
cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-  
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-  
ommended pressure, the vehicle must be  
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)  
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low  
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-  
sure gauge to check the tire pressure.  
WARNING  
● If the light does not illuminate with the  
ignition switch placed in the ON posi-  
tion, have the vehicle checked by a  
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.  
CAUTION  
Running the engine with the engine oil  
pressure warning light on could cause se-  
rious damage to the engine almost imme-  
diately. Such damage is not covered by  
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it  
is safe to do so.  
Low tire pressure warning light  
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire  
pressure of all tires except the spare.  
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and  
driving”section and in the “In case of emergency”  
section.  
2-12 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™  
warning light  
● If the light illuminates while driving,  
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or  
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,  
pull off the road to a safe location and  
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.  
Driving with under-inflated tires may  
permanently damage the tires and in-  
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-  
rious vehicle damage could occur and  
may lead to an accident and could re-  
sult in serious personal injury. Check  
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust  
the tire pressure to the recommended  
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire  
and Loading Information label located  
in the driver’s door opening to turn the  
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If  
the light still illuminates while driving  
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire  
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-  
place it with a spare tire as soon as  
possible.  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced tire pressure will not be in-  
dicated, the TPMS will not function and  
the low tire pressure warning light will  
flash for approximately 1 minute. The  
light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-  
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
The Intelligent Key warning light warns of a mal-  
function with the electrical steering lock system  
or the Intelligent Key system.  
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds  
and then turns off.  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
If the light comes on while the engine is stopped,  
it may not be possible to free the steering lock or  
to start the engine. If the light comes on while the  
engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. How-  
ever, in these cases, contact a NISSAN dealer for  
repair as soon as possible.  
CAUTION  
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the  
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to  
check the tire pressure regularly.  
See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-  
driving checks and adjustments” section.  
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds  
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the  
TPMS may not operate correctly.  
Seat belt warning light and  
chime  
● Be sure to install the specified size of  
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.  
The light and chime remind you to fasten your  
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START  
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s  
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime  
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s  
seat belt is securely fastened.  
Master warning light  
This light comes on when various vehicle infor-  
mation display warnings appear.  
Instruments and controls 2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if  
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened  
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For  
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in  
the ON position, the system does not activate the  
warning light for the front passenger.  
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental  
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-  
tensioners may not function properly. For addi-  
tional details, see “Supplemental restraint sys-  
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system” section of this  
manual.  
tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the  
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.  
Front passenger air bag status  
light  
The front passenger air bag status light (  
)
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat  
belts and supplemental restraint system” section  
for precautions on seat belt usage.  
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be  
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat  
is being used.  
WARNING  
If the supplemental air bag warning light  
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,  
side air bag, curtain air bag systems (if so  
equipped) and/or pretensioner systems  
will not operate in an accident. To help  
avoid injury to yourself or others, have  
your vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer  
as soon as possible.  
Supplemental air bag warning  
light  
For front passenger air bag status light operation,  
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in  
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental  
restraint system” section of this manual.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or  
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-  
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then  
turns off. This means the system is operational.  
High beam indicator light  
(blue)  
If any of the following conditions occur, the front  
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-  
sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle  
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:  
INDICATOR LIGHTS  
This blue light comes on when the headlight high  
beams are on and goes out when the low beams  
are selected.  
For additional information on warnings and indi-  
cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in  
this section.  
The high beam indicator light also comes on  
when the passing signal is activated.  
●
●
●
The supplemental air bag warning light re-  
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.  
Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) position  
indicator light (if so equipped)  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
(MIL)  
The supplemental air bag warning light  
flashes intermittently.  
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks  
while the engine is running, it may indicate a  
potential emission control malfunction.  
The supplemental air bag warning light does  
not come on at all.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, this indicator light shows the shift selec-  
2-14 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come  
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,  
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make  
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed  
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons  
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.  
●
Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An  
emission control system malfunction has  
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If  
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten  
or install the cap and continue to drive the  
CAUTION  
Continued vehicle operation without hav-  
ing the emission control system checked  
and repaired as necessary could lead to  
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,  
and possible damage to the emission con-  
trol system.  
vehicle. The  
light should turn off after  
a few driving trips. If the  
light does not  
After a few driving trips, the  
light should  
turn off after a few driving trips, have the  
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You  
do not need to have your vehicle towed to  
the dealer.  
turn off if no other potential emission control  
system malfunction exists.  
Security indicator light  
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20  
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when  
the engine is not running, it indicates that the  
vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-  
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-  
ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test”in the  
“Technical and consumer information” section of  
this manual.  
This light blinks when the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.  
●
Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An  
engine misfire has been detected which may  
damage the emission control system. To re-  
duce or avoid emission control system dam-  
age:  
The blinking security indicator light indicates that  
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are  
operational.  
For additional information, see “Security sys-  
tems” later in this section.  
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH  
(72 km/h).  
Operation  
Slip indicator light (if so  
equipped)  
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.  
– avoid steep uphill grades.  
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in  
one of two ways:  
This indicator light will blink when the traction  
control system (if so equipped) or vehicle dy-  
namic control system is limiting wheel spin. Slip-  
pery road conditions may exist if the slip indicator  
blinks on. If this happens, adjust your driving  
accordingly.  
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo  
being hauled or towed.  
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking  
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected  
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have  
your vehicle towed to the dealer.  
Instruments and controls 2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The slip indicator light also comes on when you  
place the ignition switch in the ON position. The  
light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the  
system is operational. If the light does not come  
on or does not go off, have the Traction Control  
System checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
the system working when starting the vehicle or  
accelerating, but this is normal.  
Turn signal/hazard indicator  
lights  
AUDIBLE REMINDERS  
Brake pad wear warning  
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal  
switch is activated.  
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned  
on.  
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.  
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it  
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the  
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake  
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as  
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.  
Traction Control System off  
indicator light (if so equipped)  
Vehicle Dynamic Control OFF  
indicator light (if so equipped)  
This indicator light comes on when the traction  
control off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-  
cates the Traction Control System is not operat-  
ing.  
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle  
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.  
This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has  
been turned off.  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer  
Push the traction control off switch again or re-  
start the engine and the system will operate nor-  
mally. See “Traction Control System (TCS)”in the  
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.  
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the  
Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when  
locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be  
sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent  
Key. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-  
driving checks and adjustments” section.  
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch  
again or restart the engine and the system will  
operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control  
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
The traction control light also comes on when you  
place the ignition switch in the ON position. The  
light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the  
Traction Control System (TCS) is operational. If  
the light stays on or comes on along with the SLIP  
indicator light while you are driving, have the  
Traction Control System checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Key reminder chime  
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on  
when you place the ignition switch in the ON  
position. The light will turn off after about 2 sec-  
onds if the system is operational. If the light stays  
on or comes on along with the SLIP indicator light  
while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dynamic  
Control system checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened  
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or  
OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK  
position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli-  
gent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch is  
placed in the LOCK position, and take the Intel-  
ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.  
While the Traction Control System is operating,  
you might feel slight vibration or hear the system  
working when starting the vehicle or accelerat-  
ing, but this is normal.  
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is  
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear  
2-16 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY  
Light reminder chime  
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-  
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is  
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.  
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-  
ing the vehicle.  
WIC1102  
LIC1103  
1
The vehicle information display  
is located on  
᭺
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE  
INFORMATION DISPLAY  
the bottom of the speedometer. It displays such  
items as:  
Press the  
button, located on the instru-  
●
●
●
●
cruise control system information  
Intelligent Key operation information  
some indicators and warnings  
other information  
ment panel just behind the steering wheel, to  
display the following modes:  
MPG → MPG/MPH → Time/Miles → Range →  
Exterior Temperature → Setting → Warning  
For details about the Intelligent Key, see  
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving  
checks and adjustments” section.  
Instruments and controls 2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC1093  
LIC1097  
WIC1266  
Fuel Economy mode  
Average speed mode  
Time/Miles (km) mode  
The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis-  
play the instant fuel economy since the last reset.  
The average speed mode can be selected to  
display the average miles per gallon and miles per  
hour since the last reset.  
The time/miles (km) mode can be selected to  
show the time and distance driven since the last  
reset.  
2-18 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIC1095  
LIC1096  
LIC1043  
Range mode  
Exterior Temperature mode  
Setting mode  
The range mode can be selected to give you an  
estimation of the distance that can be driven  
before refueling. The range is constantly calcu-  
lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank  
and the actual fuel consumption.  
The exterior temperature mode can be selected  
to provide you with the temperature outside of  
your vehicle.  
The setting mode allows you to set reminders or  
preferences for alerts, maintenance intervals or  
language displays.  
In the setting mode screen press  
to:  
to move  
●
●
●
Alert  
Maintenance  
Display  
and press  
to select the menu.  
Instruments and controls 2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIC1044  
LIC1046  
LIC1045  
Alert mode  
Reset mode  
Maintenance mode  
The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying  
you of time to rest or icy conditions.  
The reset mode can be selected in any screen  
that allows for preferences to be programmed.  
Once the screen is selected, you have the option  
to reset the selected distances or time to a new  
setting.  
The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts  
for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the  
following:  
The time to rest alert lets you know when you  
have been traveling for a long time and may need  
a break.  
●
●
●
●
engine oil  
oil filter  
tires  
The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi-  
tions may exist.  
other  
Set a desired interval by pushing  
to high-  
light the maintenance field and pressing  
.
The reset mode will open up and allow you to  
enter the desired distance.  
2-20 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LIC1047  
LIC1098  
Display mode  
Warning mode  
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when  
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and  
The warning mode can be selected to view any  
warnings that may be present. Once the screen is  
selected you have the option of skipping the  
warning or viewing it in detail.  
pressing  
.
Language: English or French  
Warnings can be present for issues such as an  
open door or low fuel. For more information about  
potential warnings see “Vehicle Information Dis-  
play indicator lights and warnings” later in this  
section.  
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG  
Metric — km, °C, L/100 km  
You can select the language and unit using  
the  
button and pressing  
.
The settings are automatically saved when you  
exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or  
any other mode button.  
Instruments and controls 2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WIC1275  
4. Low windshield washer fluid warning  
5. No key warning  
8. Cruise main switch indicator  
9. Cruise set switch indicator  
Vehicle information display warnings  
and indicators  
1. Door and trunk open warning  
2. Push warning (CVT models)  
3. Low fuel warning  
6. Parking brake warning  
10. Engine start operation indicator (CVT mod-  
els)  
7. Shift P warning (CVT models)  
2-22 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Engine start operation indicator (MT mod-  
els)  
serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel  
gauge needle reaches E (Empty).  
2. When the door is closed with the Intelligent  
Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition  
switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.  
A chime will also sound.  
12. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indicator  
13. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator  
Low windshield washer fluid warning  
This warning illuminates when the windshield  
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield  
washer fluid as necessary. See “Window washer  
fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section of this manual.  
Parking brake warning  
14. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge  
indicator  
This warning illuminates when the parking brake  
is set and the vehicle is driven.  
15. Steering lock release malfunction indicator  
SHIFT P warning (CVT models)  
Door and trunk open warning  
No key warning  
This warning illuminates when the ignition switch  
is pushed to stop the engine with the shift selec-  
tor in any position except in the P (Park) position.  
This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk  
has been opened when the engine is running.  
This warning illuminates following two condi-  
tions:  
Push warning (CVT models)  
If this warning illuminates, the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF position. Move the shift selec-  
tor to the P (Park) position or place the ignition  
switch in the ON position.  
1. When the ignition switch is pushed and the  
Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the  
system. If this warning illuminates, you can-  
not start the engine.  
After the Shift P warning illuminates, the Push  
warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is  
placed in the ACC position when the shift selec-  
tor is moved to the P (Park) position.  
An inside warning chime will also sound.  
Check for the following causes and perform  
the assigned remedies:  
See “Shift P warning (CVT models)” in this sec-  
tion for additional information.  
If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)  
position, the Push warning will appear. Refer to  
“Push warning (CVT models)” in this section.  
– The battery of the Intelligent Key carried  
with you is discharged completely. Re-  
place the battery with a new one.  
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition  
switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK  
position.  
For additional information about Intelligent Key,  
see “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-  
driving checks and adjustments” section.  
– The Intelligent Key carried with you is not  
registered to the system. Use the regis-  
tered Intelligent Key.  
Low fuel warning  
Cruise main switch indicator  
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the  
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is  
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge  
reaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-  
This indicator illuminates when the cruise control  
main switch is pushed. The indicator turns off  
when the main switch is pushed again. When the  
– You do not have an Intelligent Key with  
you. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.  
Instruments and controls 2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
cruise main switch indicator illuminates, the  
cruise control system is operational.  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indica-  
tor  
Steering lock release malfunction indica-  
tor  
This indicator illuminates when the steering  
wheel cannot be released from the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
Cruise set switch indicator  
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key  
needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.  
(For example, the Intelligent Key battery is dis-  
charged.)  
This indicator illuminates while the vehicle speed  
is controlled by the cruise control system. If the  
indicator blinks while the engine is running, it may  
indicate the cruise control system is not function-  
ing properly. Have the system checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
If this indicator illuminates, push the ignition  
switch while lightly turning the steering wheel  
right and left.  
If this indicator illuminates, insert the Intelligent  
Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct  
direction. See “Push-button ignition switch” in  
the “Starting and driving” section.  
Engine start operation indicator (CVT mod-  
els)  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator  
This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch  
is placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position  
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position.  
This indicator illuminates when the driver’s door  
is opened with the ignition switch placed in the  
OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the  
Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime also  
sounds.  
This indicator means that the engine will start by  
pushing the push-button ignition switch with the  
brake pedal depressed.  
If this indicator illuminates, remove the Intelligent  
Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with  
you when leaving the vehicle.  
Engine start operation indicator (MT mod-  
els)  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge  
indicator  
This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch  
is placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position  
with the shift selector in neutral and the parking  
brake on.  
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key  
battery is running out of power.  
This indicator means that the engine will start by  
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch and  
the brake pedal depressed.  
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery  
with a new one. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™”in  
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.  
2-24 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SECURITY SYSTEMS  
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-  
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a  
brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in  
the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when  
unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and  
park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.  
cally shifts into the armed phase. The  
security light begins to flash once every 3  
seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm  
time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by  
the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is  
placed in the ACC or ON position, the sys-  
tem will not arm.  
Many devices offering additional protection, such  
as component locks, identification markers, and  
tracking systems, are available at auto supply  
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer  
may also offer such equipment. Check with your  
insurance company to see if you may be eligible  
for discounts for various theft protection features.  
●
Even when the driver and/or passen-  
gers are in the vehicle, the system will  
activate with all the doors, hood and  
trunk lid locked with the ignition  
switch placed in the LOCK position.  
When placing the ignition switch in the  
ACC or ON position, the system will be  
released.  
LIC0301  
How to arm the vehicle security  
system  
Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-  
tems:  
Vehicle security system activation  
1. Close all windows. (The system can be  
●
●
Vehicle security system  
The vehicle security system will give the following  
alarm:  
armed even if the windows are open.)  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System  
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.  
●
The headlights blink and the horn sounds  
intermittently.  
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM  
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all  
doors. The doors can be locked with the  
Intelligent Key, door handle request switch,  
power door lock switch or mechanical key.  
The vehicle security system provides visual and  
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors  
or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,  
however, a motion detection type system that  
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a  
vibration occurs.  
●
The alarm automatically turns off after ap-  
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm  
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with  
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking  
the driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, or  
4. Confirm that the security indicator light  
comes on. The security light stays on for  
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-  
tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-  
onds the vehicle security system automati-  
by pressing the  
gent Key.  
button on the Intelli-  
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot  
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or  
Instruments and controls 2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The alarm is activated by:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-  
terference, and (2) this device must accept  
any interference received, including inter-  
ference that may cause undesired opera-  
tion of the device.  
●
opening the door or trunk lid without using  
the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is  
unlocked by releasing the door inside lock  
switch).  
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-  
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-  
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD  
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-  
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.  
How to stop an activated alarm  
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s  
door or the trunk lid with the key, pressing  
the  
button on the Intelligent Key, or press-  
ing the request switch on the driver’s or passen-  
ger’s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the  
door handle.  
LIC0474  
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER  
SYSTEM  
Security indicator light  
The security indicator light blinks whenever the  
ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC  
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-  
hicle Immobilizer System is operational.  
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not  
allow the engine to start without the use of a  
registered key.  
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.  
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-  
functioning, the light will remain on while the  
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.  
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC  
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-  
tem  
If the light still remains on and/or the en-  
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-  
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all  
registered keys that you have when visiting  
your NISSAN dealer for service.  
This device complies with part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-  
ing two conditions;  
2-26 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER  
SWITCH  
2
Low — continuous low speed operation  
᭺
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with  
water to the manufacturer’s recom-  
mended levels before pouring the fluid  
into the window washer reservoir tank.  
Do not use the window washer reservoir  
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-  
trate and water.  
3
High — continuous high speed operation  
᭺
4
Push the lever up  
tion of the wiper.  
to have one sweep opera-  
᭺
5
Pull the lever toward you  
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.  
to operate the  
᭺
WARNING  
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-  
tion may freeze on the windshield and  
obscure your vision which may lead to an  
accident. Warm the windshield with the  
defroster before you wash the windshield.  
LIC1061  
SWITCH OPERATION  
CAUTION  
The windshield wiper and washer switch oper-  
ates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position.  
● Do not operate the washer continu-  
ously for more than 30 seconds.  
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-  
voir tank is empty.  
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the  
following speed:  
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir  
tank with washer fluid concentrates at  
full strength. Some methyl alcohol  
based washer fluid concentrates may  
permanently stain the grille if spilled  
while filling the window washer reser-  
voir tank.  
1
Intermittent — intermittent operation can be  
᭺
A
adjusted by turning the switch toward  
᭺
B
(Slower) or  
(Faster). Also, for vehicles  
᭺
equipped with speed dependent wipers, the  
intermittent operation speed varies in accor-  
dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,  
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-  
tent operation speed will be faster.)  
Instruments and controls 2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE  
MIRROR (if so equipped)  
DEFROSTER SWITCH  
LIC1218  
WIC1475  
WIC1460  
Type A  
Type B  
Type C  
To defrost the rear window glass and outside  
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and  
push the rear window defroster switch on. The  
rear window defroster indicator light on the  
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn  
the defroster off.  
NOTE:  
The top and bottom few rows of wires on  
the rear window are not part of the rear  
window defroster system. These wires  
make up the antenna for the audio system.  
The rear window defroster automatically turns off  
after approximately 15 minutes.  
CAUTION  
When cleaning the inner side of the rear  
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-  
age the rear window defroster.  
2-28 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL  
SWITCH  
●
The life of xenon headlights will be  
shortened by frequent on-off opera-  
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn  
off the headlights for short intervals  
(for example, when the vehicle stops at  
a traffic signal). Even when the daytime  
running lights are active (Canada only),  
the xenon headlights do not turn on.  
This way the life of the xenon head-  
lights is not reduced.  
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so  
equipped)  
WARNING  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
Ꮨ
● When xenon headlights are on, they  
produce a high voltage. To prevent an  
electric shock, never attempt to modify  
or disassemble. Always have your xe-  
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN  
dealer.  
●
If the xenon headlight bulb is close to  
burning out, the brightness will drasti-  
cally decrease, the light will start blink-  
ing, or the color of the light will be-  
come reddish. If one or more of the  
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN  
dealer.  
● Xenon headlights provide considerably  
more light than conventional head-  
lights. If they are not correctly aimed,  
they might temporarily blind an oncom-  
ing driver or the driver ahead of you and  
cause a serious accident. If headlights  
are not aimed correctly, immediately  
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer  
and have the headlights adjusted  
correctly.  
LIC1085  
Type A  
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH  
Lighting  
1
When turning the switch to the  
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and  
instrument panel lights come on.  
posi-  
᭺
2
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its  
brightness or color varies slightly. However, the  
color and brightness will soon stabilize.  
When turning the switch to the  
tion, the headlights come on and all the other  
lights remain on.  
posi-  
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC1064  
LIC1063  
LIC1086  
Type B  
Type C  
Autolight system (if so equipped)  
CAUTION  
The autolight system allows the headlights to be  
set so they turn on and off automatically. The  
autolight system can:  
Use the headlights with the engine run-  
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle  
battery.  
●
Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,  
license plate and instrument panel lights au-  
tomatically when it is dark.  
●
●
Turn off all the lights when it is light.  
Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after  
you place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position and all doors are closed.  
2-30 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To turn on the autolight system:  
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-  
1
tion  
.
᭺
2. Push the push-button ignition switch to the  
ON position.  
3. The autolight system automatically turns the  
headlights on and off.  
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
position and a door is opened and left open, the  
headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another  
door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5  
minute timer is reset.  
LIC1068  
LIC1087  
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to  
Be sure you do not put anything on top of  
the autolight sensor located on the top side  
of the instrument panel. The autolight sen-  
sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,  
the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark  
out and the headlights will illuminate. If  
this occurs while parked with the engine  
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON  
position, your vehicle’s battery could be-  
come discharged.  
Headlight beam select  
the OFF,  
, or  
position.  
1
To select the high beam function, push the  
lever forward. The high beam lights come on  
᭺
and the  
light illuminates.  
2
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.  
᭺
3
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the  
headlight high beams on and off.  
᭺
Battery saver system  
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position  
while the headlight switch is in the  
or  
position, the headlights will turn off after  
5 minutes.  
Instruments and controls 2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Even though the battery saver feature au-  
tomatically turns off the headlights after a  
period of time, you should turn the head-  
light switch to the OFF position when the  
engine is not running to avoid discharging  
the vehicle battery.  
When the daytime running light system is  
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not  
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your  
headlights. Failure to do so could cause  
an accident injuring yourself and others.  
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM  
(Canada only)  
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-  
duced intensity when the engine is started with  
the parking brake released. The daytime running  
lights operate with the headlight switch in the  
LIC1066  
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS  
CONTROL  
OFF position or in the  
position. Turn the  
headlight switch to the  
position for full  
illumination when driving at night.  
The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-  
tion switch is placed in the ON position.  
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is  
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-  
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when  
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-  
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch  
is placed in the OFF position.  
The instrument brightness control operates when  
the headlight control switch is in the  
AUTO,  
or  
position.  
Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright-  
ness of the instrument panel lights when driving  
at night.  
2-32 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER  
SWITCH  
LIC1088  
LIC1089  
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)  
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch  
LIC0394  
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when  
you must stop or park under emergency condi-  
tions. All turn signal lights flash.  
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH  
Turn signal  
to the  
switch to the  
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch  
in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-  
lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to  
position, then turn the fog light  
position.  
1
Move the lever up or down to signal the  
turning direction. When the turn is com-  
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.  
᭺
WARNING  
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to  
move the vehicle well off the road.  
Lane change signal  
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers  
while moving on the highway unless  
unusual circumstances force you to  
drive so slowly that your vehicle might  
become a hazard to other traffic.  
the  
position.  
2
To signal a lane change, move the lever up or  
down to the point where the indicator light  
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.  
᭺
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch  
to the OFF position.  
The headlights must be on and the low beams  
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog  
lights automatically turn off when the high beam  
headlights are selected.  
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-  
ard warning flasher lights are on.  
Instruments and controls 2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HORN  
HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)  
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch  
placed in any position.  
Some state laws may prohibit the use of  
the hazard warning flasher switch while  
driving.  
LIC1069  
WIC1483  
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of  
the steering wheel.  
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters (if  
so equipped). The switches are located on the  
center console.  
WARNING  
1. Start the engine.  
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so  
could affect proper operation of the  
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-  
pering with the supplemental front air bag  
system may result in serious personal  
injury.  
2. Push the low or high position of the switch, as  
desired, depending on the temperature. The  
indicator light in the switch will illuminate.  
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,  
automatically turning the heater on and off.  
The indicator light will remain on as long as  
the switch is on.  
3. When the seat is warmed or before you  
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch  
off.  
2-34 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)  
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)  
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)  
OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)  
CAUTION  
● Do not use the seat heater for extended  
periods or when no one is using the  
seat.  
● Do not put anything on the seat which  
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-  
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat  
may become overheated.  
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on  
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar  
object. This may result in damage to the  
heater.  
LIC0451  
WIC0534  
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat  
should be removed immediately with a  
dry cloth.  
The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con-  
trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.  
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle  
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-  
ing conditions.  
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC  
system reduces the engine output to reduce  
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced  
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If  
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck  
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.  
● When cleaning the seat, never use  
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-  
lar materials.  
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCS  
reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.  
The engine speed will be reduced even if the  
accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum  
engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,  
turn the TCS off.  
● If any abnormalities are found or the  
heated seat does not operate, turn the  
switch off and have the system checked  
by your NISSAN dealer.  
To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.  
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF  
● The battery could run down if the seat  
heater is operated while the engine is  
not running.  
The  
indicator will come on.  
switch. The  
indicator will come on.  
Push the TCS OFF switch again or restart the  
engine to turn ON the system. See “Traction  
Control System (TCS) (if so equipped)” in the  
“Starting and driving” section.  
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the  
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and  
driving” section.  
Instruments and controls 2-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
POWER OUTLET  
● Use power outlets with the engine run-  
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle  
battery.  
● Avoid using power outlets when the air  
conditioner, headlights or rear window  
defroster is on.  
● Before inserting or disconnecting a  
plug, be sure the electrical accessory  
being used is turned OFF.  
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If  
good contact is not made, the plug may  
overheat or the internal temperature  
fuse may open.  
LIC1070  
LIC1071  
Instrument panel Type A (if so equipped)  
Instrument panel Type B (if so equipped)  
● When not in use, be sure to close the  
cap. Do not allow water to contact the  
outlet.  
The power outlets are for powering electrical  
accessories such as cellular telephones. They  
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The  
console outlet is powered directly by the vehi-  
cle’s battery.  
CAUTION  
● The outlet and plug may be hot during  
or immediately after use.  
● Only certain power outlets are designed  
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do  
not use any other power outlet for an  
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN  
dealer for additional information.  
● Do not use with accessories that ex-  
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.  
Do not use double adapters or more  
than one electrical accessory.  
2-36 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
STORAGE  
WIC1262  
WIC1263  
LIC0016  
Console box  
MAP POCKETS  
SEATBACK POCKETS (if so  
equipped)  
Open the lower half of the console box to access  
the power outlet. Refer to “Console box” in this  
section.  
The seatback pockets are located on the back of  
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets  
can be used to store maps.  
Instruments and controls 2-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
● Do not use for anything other than  
sunglasses.  
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-  
glasses holder while parking in direct  
sunlight. The heat may damage the  
sunglasses.  
LIC1242  
LIC1074  
STORAGE POUCH (if so equipped)  
SUNGLASSES HOLDER  
A storage pouch is located on the front of the  
driver’s and passenger’s seats.  
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.  
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objects  
or objects that cannot fully fit inside the  
pouch because they might increase the  
likelihood of an injury in a crash.  
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while  
driving to prevent an accident.  
2-38 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC1075  
LIC1105  
WRS0167  
Front - Type A  
Front - Type B  
Rear (sedan)  
Instruments and controls 2-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when  
the cup holder is being used to prevent  
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it  
can scald you or your passenger.  
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.  
Hard objects can injure you in an  
accident.  
LIC1219  
WIC1216  
Rear (coupe)  
Soft bottle holder  
Soft bottle holder  
CUP HOLDERS  
To open the front cup holders, push the cup  
holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and  
push down until it clicks in place.  
CAUTION  
● Do not use bottle holder for any other  
objects that could be thrown about in  
the vehicle and possibly injure people  
during sudden braking or an accident.  
The plastic insert (if so equipped) may be re-  
moved to accommodate a larger cup size or for  
cleaning.  
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid  
The rear center cup holders are located in the  
rear fold-down armrest (sedan) or in the rear arm  
rest (coupe).  
containers.  
2-40 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WIC1076  
WIC1120  
WIC1121  
GLOVE BOX  
CONSOLE BOX  
Upper half  
Lower half  
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the  
master key when locking  
glove box.  
Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the  
lower half of the console box. A power outlet is  
located inside the console box. The mat (if so  
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.  
1
2
or unlocking  
the  
᭺
᭺
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the  
upper half of the console box. The mat (if so  
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.  
WARNING  
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to  
help prevent injury in an accident or a  
sudden stop.  
The upper half of the console box may be used for  
storage of cellular phones. An access hole is  
provided at the front of the upper half of the  
console box for phone cord routing to the power  
outlet.  
Instruments and controls 2-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC1090  
LIC1078  
LIC1477  
Type A  
Type B  
STORAGE BOX (if so equipped)  
COVERED STORAGE BOX  
Push the center of the lid to open.  
2-42 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIC0748  
WIC1264  
LIC0802  
To install the cargo net, attach the net to the  
retainers.  
GROCERY HOOKS (if so equipped)  
CARGO NET (if so equipped)  
The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and  
can be used to hang a standard size plastic  
grocery bag.  
WARNING  
To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the  
cargo net retainers.  
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or  
straps to help prevent it from sliding or  
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-  
secured cargo could cause personal  
injury.  
CAUTION  
Do not apply a total load of more than 20  
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.  
The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo  
area from moving around while the vehicle is in  
motion.  
Instruments and controls 2-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDOWS  
POWER WINDOWS  
Driver’s side power window switch  
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with  
switches to open or close all of the windows.  
WARNING  
● Make sure that all passengers have  
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while  
it is in motion and before closing the  
windows. Use the window lock switch  
to prevent unexpected use of the power  
windows.  
To open a window, push the switch to the first  
detent and continue to hold down until the de-  
sired window position is reached. To close a  
window, pull the switch to the first detent and  
continue to hold down until the desired window  
position is reached.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls and become  
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-  
dren could become involved in serious  
accidents.  
WIC1124  
1. Window lock button  
2. Power door lock switch  
3. Front passenger side (automatic switch,  
The power windows operate when the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position, or for about  
45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in  
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s  
door is opened during this period of about 45  
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.  
if so equipped)  
4. Right rear passenger side (sedan only)  
5. Left rear passenger side (sedan only)  
6. Driver side automatic switch  
2-44 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WIC1265  
LIC0718  
LIC0410  
Front passenger’s power window  
Rear power window switch (sedan  
Automatic operation  
switch  
only)  
To fully open a window equipped with automatic  
operation, press the window switch down (only  
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and  
release it; it need not be held. The window auto-  
matically opens all the way. To stop the window,  
lift the switch up while the window is opening.  
The passenger’s window switch operates only  
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open  
the window, push the switch to the first detent  
and continue to hold it down until the desired  
1
The rear power window switches open or close  
only the corresponding windows. To open the  
1
window, push the switch and hold it down . To  
᭺
2
close the window, pull the switch up  
.
᭺
window position is reached  
window, pull the switch to the first detent and  
. To close the  
᭺
Locking passengers’ windows  
To fully close a window equipped with automatic  
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent  
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the  
window, press the switch down while the window  
is closing.  
continue to hold it up until the desired window  
When the window lock button is depressed, only  
the driver’s side window can be opened or  
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock  
function.  
2
position is reached  
.
᭺
Instruments and controls 2-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MOONROOF (if so equipped)  
Auto-reverse function  
When power window switch does not  
operate  
If the control unit detects something caught in the  
window as it is closing, the window will be imme-  
diately lowered.  
If the power window automatic function (closing  
only) does not operate properly, perform the fol-  
lowing procedure to initialize the power window  
system:  
The auto-reverse function can be activated when  
the window is closed by automatic operation  
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position or for 45 seconds after the ignition  
switch is placed in the OFF position.  
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
2. Open the window more than halfway by  
operating the power window switch.  
Depending on the environment or driving  
conditions, the auto-reverse function may  
be activated if an impact or load similar to  
something being caught in the window oc-  
curs.  
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to  
close the window, and then hold the switch  
more than 3 seconds after the window is  
closed.  
LIC1351  
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF  
4. Release the power window switch. Operate  
the window by the automatic function to  
confirm the initialization is complete. The  
power window automatically opens or  
closes depending on if the automatic down  
or up function is selected.  
WARNING  
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition  
switch is placed in the ON position. The auto-  
matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec-  
onds, even if the ignition switch is placed in the  
ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the  
front passenger’s door is opened during this  
period of about 45 seconds, power to the moon-  
roof is canceled.  
There are some small distances immedi-  
ately before the closed position which  
cannot be detected. Make sure that all  
passengers have their hands, etc., inside  
the vehicle before closing the window.  
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other  
windows.  
If the power window function does not operate  
properly after performing the above procedure,  
see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.  
Sliding the moonroof  
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch  
1
toward  
.
᭺
2-46 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To fully close the moonroof, push the switch  
2
the  
position again. After a delay of  
᭺
CAUTION  
2
toward  
.
four seconds, the moonroof will make a small  
movement and backup.  
᭺
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand  
from the moonroof before opening.  
To open or close the moonroof part way, push the  
switch in any direction while the moonroof is  
sliding to stop it in the desired position.  
3. Release the switch.  
● Do not place heavy objects on the  
moonroof or surrounding area.  
4. Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch,  
push and continuously hold the switch  
Tilting the moonroof  
Resetting the moonroof switch  
2
toward  
. The moonroof will move  
᭺
Close the moonroof by pushing the switch  
from the tilt position to the open position and  
back to the close position.  
The moonroof switch may not operate properly  
and need to be reset if any of the following  
conditions have occurred:  
2
toward  
. Release the switch, then push  
᭺
2
the switch toward  
moonroof up.  
again to tilt the  
᭺
NOTE:  
●
●
the moonroof has been manually moved,  
If the switch is released at any time during  
Step 4, the procedure must be restarted.  
To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch  
the moonroof motor has been removed and  
reinstalled after the moonroof has been re-  
positioned or adjusted,  
1
toward  
.
᭺
5. Release the switch. Do not place the ignition  
switch in the OFF position for at least 2  
seconds. The moonroof is now reset.  
WARNING  
●
●
the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted  
or changed, or  
● In an accident you could be thrown from  
the vehicle through an open moonroof.  
Always use seat belts and child  
restraints.  
If the moonroof still does not operate properly,  
have the moonroof system checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
the electrical supply interrupted and/or  
some malfunction has been detected.  
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or  
extend any portion of their body out of  
the moonroof opening while the vehicle  
is in motion or while the moonroof is  
closing.  
Auto-reverse function (when closing or  
tilting down the moonroof)  
Use the following reset procedure to return the  
moonroof operation to normal.  
The auto-reverse function can be activated when  
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-  
matic operation when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-  
onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
position.  
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
2. Push and hold the moonroof switch  
2
toward  
. Once the moonroof has  
᭺
reached the full tilt position, release the  
switch. Push and hold the switch toward  
Instruments and controls 2-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INTERIOR LIGHT  
Depending on the environment or driving  
conditions, the auto-reverse function may  
be activated if an impact or load similar to  
something being caught in the moonroof  
occurs.  
WARNING  
● In an accident you could be thrown from  
the vehicle through an open moonroof.  
Always use seat belts and child  
restraints.  
WARNING  
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or  
extend any portion of their body out of  
the moonroof opening while the vehicle  
is in motion or while the moonroof is  
closing.  
There are some small distances immedi-  
ately before the closed position which  
cannot be detected. Make sure that all  
passengers have their hands, etc., inside  
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.  
CAUTION  
When closing:  
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand  
LIC1081  
If the control unit detects something caught in the  
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof  
will immediately open backward.  
from the moonroof before opening.  
Type A  
● Do not place heavy objects on the  
moonroof or surrounding area.  
The interior light has a three-position switch and  
operates regardless of ignition switch position.  
When tilting down:  
Sunshade  
1
●
When the switch is in the ON position  
,
᭺
If the control unit detects something caught in the  
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-  
mediately tilt up.  
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-  
ward or backward.  
the interior light illuminates, regardless of  
door position. The light will go off after 30  
minutes unless the ignition switch is placed  
in the ACC or ON position.  
If the moonroof does not close  
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-  
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep  
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds  
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close  
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the  
moonroof.  
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the  
moonroof.  
●
When the switch is in the center DOOR  
2
position  
, the front and rear personal  
᭺
lights will illuminate when the driver’s door is  
opened. Lights remain on for a maximum of  
30 seconds after driver’s door is closed.  
2-48 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
The doorstep lights illuminate when the  
driver and passenger doors are opened re-  
gardless of the interior light switch posi-  
tion. These lights will turn off automatically  
after 30 minutes while doors are open to  
prevent the battery from becoming dis-  
charged.  
CAUTION  
Do not use for extended periods of time  
with the engine stopped. This could result  
in a discharged battery.  
WIC1267  
WIC1476  
Type B  
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)  
The lights will go off when the ignition switch is  
placed in the ON position, or the driver’s door is  
closed and locked.  
The console light will turn on whenever the park-  
ing lights or headlights are illuminated.  
The console light brightness can be adjusted  
with the instrument brightness control.  
The lights will also go off after 30 minutes when  
the doors are open.  
3
●
When the switch is in the OFF position  
,
᭺
the interior light does not illuminate, regard-  
less of door position.  
Instruments and controls 2-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAP LIGHTS  
TRUNK LIGHT  
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.  
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.  
The light will go off after about 30 minutes if the  
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is  
placed in the ACC or ON position.  
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-  
rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and  
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.  
LIC1080  
LIC1083  
Front map lights  
Rear map lights (sedan only)  
To turn the map lights on, press the light lens. To  
turn them off, press the lens again.  
To turn the rear map lights on, press the switch.  
To turn them off, press the switch again.  
CAUTION  
Do not use for extended periods of time  
with the engine stopped. This could result  
in a discharged battery.  
2-50 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HOMELINKா UNIVERSAL  
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)  
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver provides a  
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up  
to three individual hand-held transmitters into  
one built-in device.  
WARNING  
● Do not use the HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver with any garage door  
opener that lacks safety stop and re-  
verse features as required by federal  
safety standards. (These standards be-  
came effective for opener models  
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-  
rage door opener which cannot detect  
an object in the path of a closing garage  
door and then automatically stop and  
reverse, does not meet current federal  
safety standards. Using a garage door  
opener without these features in-  
creases the risk of serious injury or  
death.  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver:  
●
Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)  
devices such as garage doors, gates, home  
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-  
curity systems.  
●
Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No  
separate batteries are required. If the vehi-  
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-  
nected, HomeLinkா will retain all program-  
ming.  
WIC0986  
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா  
Once the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
is programmed, retain the original trans-  
mitter for future programming procedures  
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon  
sale of the vehicle, the programmed  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver buttons  
should be erased for security purposes. For  
additional information, refer to “Program-  
ming HomeLinkா” later in this section.  
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer  
● During the programming procedure  
your garage door or security gate will  
open and close (if the transmitter is  
within range). Make sure that people or  
objects are clear of the garage door,  
gate, etc. that you are programming.  
HomeLinkா buttons (to clear the memory)  
1
until the indicator light  
blinks (after 20  
᭺
seconds). Release both buttons.  
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter  
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the  
HomeLinkா surface.  
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned  
off while programming the HomeLinkா  
Universal Transceiver.  
Instruments and controls 2-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
grammed device, press and hold the pro-  
grammed HomeLinkா button — releasing  
when the device begins to activate.  
ton, quickly and firmly press and release the  
HomeLinkா button you’ve just programmed.  
Press and release the HomeLinkா button up  
to 3 times to complete the training.  
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkா blinks  
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,  
HomeLinkா has picked up a “rolling code”  
garage door opener signal. You will need to  
proceed with the next steps to train the  
HomeLinkா to complete the programming  
which may require a ladder and another per-  
son for convenience.  
8. Your HomeLinkா button should now be pro-  
grammed. (To program the remaining  
HomeLinkா buttons for additional door or  
gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)  
NOTE:  
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to  
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-  
gram button located on the garage door  
opener’s motor to activate the “training  
mode”. This button is usually located near  
the antenna wire that hangs down from the  
motor. If the wire originates from under a  
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to  
access the program button.  
“clear”  
HomeLinkா buttons.  
all  
previously  
programmed  
WIC0987  
If you have any questions or are having difficulty  
programming your HomeLinkா buttons, refer to  
the HomeLinkா web site at: www.homelink.com  
or call 1-800-355-3515.  
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and  
hold both the HomeLinkா button you want to  
program and the hand-held transmitter but-  
ton.  
PROGRAMMING HOMELINKா FOR  
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS  
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has  
been completed.  
NOTE:  
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-  
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-  
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to  
HomeLinkா, continue to press and hold the  
HomeLinkா button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-  
gramming HomeLinkா”) while you press and re-  
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every  
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly  
(indicating successful programming).  
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator  
light on the HomeLinkா flashes, changing  
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing  
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.  
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both  
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-  
ing light indicates successful programming.  
To activate the garage door or other pro-  
Once you have pressed and released the  
program button on the garage door open-  
er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you  
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.  
Use the help of a second person for conve-  
nience to assist when performing this step.  
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-  
ing the garage door opener’s program but-  
2-52 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
●
position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3  
inches (26 76 mm) away from the  
●
●
The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-  
gram the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
but does not activate the garage door.  
-
When programming a garage door opener,  
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-  
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-  
sible damage to the garage door opener  
components.  
HomeLinkா surface. Hold the transmitter in  
that position for up to 15 seconds. If  
HomeLinkா is not programmed within that  
time, try holding the transmitter in another  
position – keeping the indicator light in view  
at all times.  
Press and hold the trained HomeLinkா but-  
ton. If the garage door opener has the rolling  
code feature, the HomeLinkா indicator light  
will flash rapidly, then remain on after 2 sec-  
onds.  
OPERATING THE HOMELINKா  
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER  
If you continue to have programming difficulties,  
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs  
Department. The phone numbers are located in  
the Foreword of this manual.  
To program the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
to a garage door opener with the rolling code  
feature, follow these instructions after completing  
the “Programming HomeLinkா” (the aid of a sec-  
ond person may make the following procedures  
quicker and easier).  
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver (once pro-  
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-  
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-  
propriate programmed HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will  
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.  
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED  
INFORMATION  
1. Locate the training button on the garage  
door opener motor unit. Exact location and  
color of the button may vary by garage door  
opener brand. If there is difficulty locating  
the training button, reference the garage  
door opener Owner’s Manual.  
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,  
to clear all programming, press and hold the two  
outside buttons and release when the indicator  
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).  
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-  
DIAGNOSIS  
If the HomeLinkா does not quickly learn the hand-  
held transmitter information:  
ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING  
●
●
replace the hand-held transmitter batteries  
with new batteries.  
2. Press the training button on the garage door  
opener motor unit (which may activate a  
training light).  
Rolling code garage door openers (or other roll-  
ing code devices) which are “code protected”  
and manufactured after 1996, may be deter-  
mined by the following:  
position the hand-held transmitter with its  
battery area facing away from the  
HomeLinkா surface.  
●
Reference the garage door opener Owner’s  
Manual for verification.  
●
press and hold both the HomeLinkா and  
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-  
ruption.  
Instruments and controls 2-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE:  
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter  
button.  
This device complies with FCC rules part 15  
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-  
tion is subject to the following two condi-  
tions:  
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in  
which to initiate step 3.  
4. The HomeLinkா indicator light will flash, first  
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator  
light begins to flash rapidly, release both  
buttons.  
3. Firmly press and release the programmed  
HomeLinkா button a second time to com-  
plete the training process. (Some garage  
door openers may require you to do this  
procedure a third time to complete the train-  
ing.)  
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-  
terference and (2) This device must accept  
any interference that may be received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation.  
The HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver button has  
now been reprogrammed. The new device can  
be activated by pushing the HomeLinkா button  
that was just programmed. This procedure will  
not affect any other programmed HomeLinkா  
buttons.  
This transmitter has been tested and com-  
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
The garage door opener should now recognize  
the HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver and acti-  
vate when the HomeLinkா button is pressed. The  
remaining two buttons may now be programmed  
(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4  
in the “Programming HomeLinkா” procedures  
earlier in this section).  
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN  
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the  
codes of any non-rolling code device that has  
been programmed into HomeLinkா. Consult the  
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-  
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional  
information.  
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313  
FCC I.D. CV2V67690  
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE  
HOMELINKா BUTTON  
To reprogram a HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver  
button, complete the following.  
When your vehicle is recovered, you will  
need to reprogram the HomeLinkா Univer-  
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter  
information.  
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkா but-  
ton. Do not release the button until step 4  
has been completed.  
2. When the indicator light begins to flash  
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the  
hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76  
mm) away from the HomeLinkா surface.  
FCC Notice:  
2-54 Instruments and controls  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2  
How to use the remote keyless entry  
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18  
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22  
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24  
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Tilt/telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Tilt operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Telescopic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror  
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-3  
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Child safety rear door lock (Sedan only). . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ With Door and Trunk  
Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6  
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
How to use the remote keyless entry  
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12  
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Without Door and Trunk  
Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17  
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
KEYS  
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.  
CAUTION  
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-  
tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys  
must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to  
use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle  
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the  
registration process requires erasing all memory  
in the Intelligent Key components when register-  
ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys  
that you have to the NISSAN dealer.  
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which  
contains electrical components, to  
come into contact with water or salt  
water. This could affect the system  
function.  
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply  
against another object.  
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.  
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place  
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose  
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by  
using the key number. NISSAN does not record  
key numbers so it is very important to keep track  
of your key number plate.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an  
extended period in an area where tem-  
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).  
WPD0363  
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a  
key holder that contains a magnet.  
1.  
2.  
Two Intelligent Keys  
Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a magnetic  
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and  
personal computers.  
Keys)  
Key number plate  
A key number is only necessary when you have  
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate  
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer  
can duplicate it.  
3.  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™  
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent  
Key which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelli-  
gent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-  
mobilizer System components.  
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER  
SYSTEM KEYS  
CAUTION  
Always carry the mechanical key installed  
in the Intelligent Key slot.  
You can only drive your vehicle using the master  
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle  
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.  
Valet hand-off  
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give  
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-  
chanical key with you to protect your belongings.  
The master key can be used for all the locks.  
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.  
Additional or replacement keys:  
To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being  
opened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-  
dures below:  
If you still have a key, the key number is not  
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle  
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-  
cate your existing key. This is because the regis-  
tration process will erase the memory of all key  
codes previously registered into the NISSAN Ve-  
hicle Immobilizer System.  
1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF  
position.  
SPA1951  
Mechanical key  
2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-  
gent Key.  
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.  
3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats with  
the mechanical key.  
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which  
contains an electrical transponder, to come into  
contact with salt water. This could affect system  
function.  
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock  
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.  
4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and  
keep the mechanical key with you.  
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into  
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to  
the lock position.  
See “Trunk lid” later in this section, “Storage” in  
the “Instruments and controls” section and  
“Seats” in the “Safety — seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system” section.  
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the  
doors, trunk lid, glove box and rear seatback lock.  
See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” later in this section,  
“Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-  
tion and “Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat  
belts and supplemental restraint system”section.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DOORS  
Opening and closing windows (if so  
equipped)  
WARNING  
● Always have the doors locked while  
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,  
this provides greater safety in the event  
of an accident by helping to prevent  
persons from being thrown from the  
vehicle. This also helps keep children  
and others from unintentionally open-  
ing the doors, and will help keep out  
intruders.  
The driver’s door key operation allows you to  
open and close windows equipped with auto-  
matic operation at the same time.  
●
To open the windows, turn the door key  
toward the rear of the vehicle for longer  
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.  
● Before opening any door, always look  
for and avoid oncoming traffic.  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
LPD0181  
Driver’s side  
LOCKING WITH KEY  
The power door lock system allows you to lock or  
unlock all doors at the same time.  
1
Turning the key toward the front  
locks all doors.  
of the vehicle  
᭺
2
Turning the key one time toward the rear  
of the  
᭺
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,  
(where the key can  
only be removed and inserted) and turning it  
3
returning the key to neutral  
᭺
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks  
4
all doors  
.
᭺
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lockout protection  
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or  
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock  
position with the Intelligent Key in the port and  
any door open, all doors will lock and unlock  
automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the  
vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any  
door open, all doors will unlock automatically and  
a chime will sound after the door is closed.  
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS  
●
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle  
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).  
WPD0291  
WPD0381  
●
All doors unlock automatically when the ig-  
nition switch is placed in the OFF position.  
Inside lock  
Door lock switch  
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK  
KNOB  
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR  
LOCK SWITCH  
The automatic lock and unlock functions  
can be deactivated or activated indepen-  
dently of each other. To deactivate or activate  
the automatic door lock or unlock system, per-  
form the following procedure:  
To lock the door without the key, move the inside  
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door  
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to  
1
lock knob to the lock position , then close the  
᭺
door.  
1
the lock position . When locking the door this  
᭺
1. Close all doors.  
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the  
vehicle.  
To unlock the door without the key, move the  
2
inside lock knob to the unlock position  
.
᭺
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.  
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the  
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s  
2
side) to the unlock position  
.
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ WITH  
DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST  
SWITCHES  
3. Do one of the following within 20 seconds of  
performing Step #2:  
WARNING  
● To change AUTO UNLOCK settings:  
push and hold the power door lock switch  
● Radio waves could adversely affect  
electric medical equipment. Those who  
use a pacemaker should contact the  
electric medical equipment manufac-  
turer for the possible influences before  
use.  
to the  
position (UNLOCK) for more  
than 5 seconds.  
● To change AUTO LOCK settings: push  
and hold the power door lock switch to  
the  
position (LOCK) for more  
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio  
waves when the buttons are pushed.  
The FAA advises the radio waves may  
affect aircraft navigation and communi-  
cation systems. Do not operate the In-  
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make  
sure the buttons are not operated unin-  
tentionally when the unit is stored for a  
flight.  
than 5 seconds.  
4. When activated, the hazard warning lights  
will flash twice. When deactivated, the haz-  
ard warning lights will flash once.  
LIC0716  
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the  
OFF and ON position again between each  
setting change.  
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK  
(Sedan only)  
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors  
from being opened accidentally, especially when  
small children are in the vehicle.  
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks  
using the remote controller function or pushing  
the request switch on the vehicle without taking  
the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating  
environment and/or conditions may affect the  
Intelligent Key operation.  
The child safety lock levers are located on the  
edge of the rear doors.  
1
When the lever is in the unlock position  
, the  
᭺
door can be opened from the outside or the  
inside.  
Be sure to read the following before using the  
Intelligent Key.  
2
When the lever is in the lock position  
,
᭺
the door can be opened only from the out-  
side.  
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
When the vehicle is parked near a parking  
meter.  
locking the steering wheel is impossible even if  
the Intelligent Key is inserted into the Intelligent  
Key port. Pay special attention that the vehicle  
battery is not completely discharged.  
CAUTION  
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with  
you when operating the vehicle.  
In such cases, correct the operating conditions  
before using the Intelligent Key function or use  
the mechanical key.  
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the  
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.  
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered  
and used with one vehicle. For information about  
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent  
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
Although the life of the battery varies depending  
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is  
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-  
charged, replace it with a new one.  
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with  
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-  
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-  
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-  
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following  
operating conditions:  
CAUTION  
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-  
charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-  
gent Key port to start the engine. Replace the  
discharged battery with a new one as soon as  
possible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-  
nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-  
tion.  
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which  
contains electrical components, to  
come into contact with water or salt  
water. This could affect the system  
function.  
●
When operating near a location where  
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as  
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting  
station.  
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving  
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment  
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-  
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-  
tery life may become shorter.  
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply  
against another object.  
●
When in possession of wireless equipment,  
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,  
and CB radio.  
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent  
Key.  
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or  
covered by metallic materials.  
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent  
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-  
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.  
For information regarding replacement of a bat-  
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section.  
When any type of radio wave remote control  
is used nearby.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an  
extended period in an area where tem-  
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).  
Because the steering wheel is locked electrically,  
unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition  
switch in the LOCK position is impossible when  
the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Un-  
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an  
electric appliance such as a personal com-  
puter.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or  
strong radio waves are present near the operat-  
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-  
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent  
Key may not function properly.  
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a  
key holder that contains a magnet.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a magnetic  
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and  
personal computers.  
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)  
1
from each request switch  
.
᭺
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN  
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-  
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the  
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate  
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing  
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,  
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may  
not function.  
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating  
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone  
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the  
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.  
WPD0465  
Coupe shown Sedan similar  
OPERATING RANGE  
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used  
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified  
1
operating range from the request switch  
.
᭺
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left  
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the  
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the  
doors.  
Do not pull the door handle before pushing  
the door handle request switch. The door  
will be unlocked but will not open. Release  
the door handle once and pull it again to  
open the door.  
WPD0432  
WPD0375  
Coupe shown, Sedan similar  
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS  
PRECAUTION  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT  
KEY™OPERATION  
●
Do not push the door handle request switch  
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as  
illustrated. The close distance to the door  
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system  
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-  
gent Key is outside the vehicle.  
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking  
the key out of your pocket or bag.  
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you  
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door  
handle request switch within the range of opera-  
tion.  
●
After locking with the door handle request  
switch, verify the doors are securely locked  
by testing them.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
● After locking the doors using the re-  
quest switch, make sure that the doors  
have been securely locked by operating  
the door handle or the trunk opener  
switch.  
● When locking the doors using the re-  
quest switch, make sure to have the  
Intelligent Key in your possession be-  
fore operating the request switch to  
prevent the Intelligent Key from being  
left in the vehicle.  
● The request switch is operational only  
when the Intelligent Key has been de-  
tected by the Intelligent Key system.  
WPD0433  
WPD0369  
Coupe shown, Sedan similar  
NOTE:  
Locking doors  
●
Doors lock with the door handle request  
switch while the ignition switch is not in the  
LOCK position.  
Lockout protection  
1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK  
position and make sure you carry the Intelli-  
gent Key with you.  
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-  
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection  
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.  
●
Doors do not lock by pushing the door  
handle request switch while any door is  
open. However, doors lock with the me-  
chanical key even if any door is open.  
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors  
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put  
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;  
the lock will automatically unlock and the door  
buzzer sounds.  
2. Close all doors.  
1
3. Push any door handle request switch  
᭺
●
Doors do not lock with the door handle  
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside  
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.  
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside  
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-  
other Intelligent Key.  
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.  
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.  
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and  
the outside buzzer sounds twice.  
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTE:  
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-  
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-  
ating the request switch to lock the door.  
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or  
your other hand.  
CAUTION  
The lockout protection may not function  
under the following conditions:  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on  
top of the instrument panel.  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on  
WPD0432  
WPD0369  
top of the rear parcel shelf.  
Coupe shown, Sedan similar  
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-  
quest switch to unlock the door.  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-  
side the glove box or a storage bin.  
Unlocking doors  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
minute after pushing the request switch.  
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-  
side the door pockets.  
1
2. Push the door handle request switch  
.
᭺
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on or  
under the spare tire area.  
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the  
outside buzzer sounds once.  
●
●
Opening any door.  
Pushing the ignition switch.  
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-  
side or near metallic materials.  
1
4. Push the door handle request switch  
᭺
The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds  
when a door is unlocked and the room light  
switch is in the DOOR position.  
again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.  
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the  
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning  
the door handle to its original position will unlock  
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-  
The interior light can be turned off without waiting  
for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-  
ing operations.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-  
tion.  
When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is  
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,  
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will  
open.  
●
●
Locking the doors with the remote controller.  
Switching the room light switch to the OFF  
position.  
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE  
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION  
The remote keyless entry function can operate all  
door locks using the remote keyless function of  
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function  
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away  
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-  
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.  
The remote keyless entry function will not func-  
tion under the following conditions:  
WPD0406  
Opening the trunk lid  
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is not within the  
operational range.  
A
1. Push the trunk opener request switch  
for  
᭺
more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-  
ligent Key with you.  
When the doors or the trunk are open or not  
closed securely.  
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4  
times.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-  
charged.  
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.  
CAUTION  
Lockout protection  
When locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in  
the vehicle.  
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-  
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is  
equipped with the Intelligent Key.  
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
After locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been  
securely locked by operating the door  
handles.  
WPD0359  
WPD0360  
Locking doors  
Unlocking doors  
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
1. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
2. Close all doors.  
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.  
3. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
3. Press the button again within 5 sec-  
onds to unlock all doors.  
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and  
the horn beeps once.  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
minute after pressing the  
button:  
5. All doors will be locked.  
●
●
Opening any doors.  
Pushing the ignition switch.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when  
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in  
the DOOR position.  
The light can be turned off without waiting for 15  
seconds by performing one of the following op-  
erations:  
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-  
tion.  
●
●
Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.  
Switching the room light switch to the OFF  
position.  
Opening windows (if so equipped)  
WPD0364  
WPD0361  
The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows  
equipped with automatic operation simulta-  
neously.  
Releasing the trunk lid  
Using the panic alarm  
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,  
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention  
by pressing and holding the  
Press the  
button for longer than 0.5 sec-  
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release  
button will not operate when the ignition switch is  
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel  
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel  
switch” later in this section.  
●
To open the windows, press the  
but-  
button on the  
ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3  
seconds after all doors are unlocked.  
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.  
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25  
seconds.  
The door windows will open while pressing  
the button on the Intelligent Key.  
The door windows cannot be closed by  
using the Intelligent Key.  
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The panic alarm stops when:  
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the  
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn  
beep feature has been reactivated.  
●
●
●
It has run for 25 seconds, or  
Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.  
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-  
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.  
Pushing the request switch on the driver or  
passenger door with the Intelligent Key in  
range of the door handle.  
WARNING SIGNALS  
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-  
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent  
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being  
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and  
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in  
the instrument panel.  
WPD0362  
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is  
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the  
Intelligent Key.  
Silencing the horn beep feature  
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-  
vated using the Intelligent Key.  
See the troubleshooting guide that follows and  
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments  
and controls” section of this manual.  
To deactivate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds.  
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to  
confirm that the horn beep feature has been  
deactivated.  
To activate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds  
once more.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are  
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent  
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle  
system may respond differently than expected.  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Remedy  
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-  
play and the inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
Shift the shift selector to the P (Park)  
position.  
When pushing the ignition switch to stop  
the engine  
The shift selector is not in the P (Park)  
position.  
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC  
position.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position.  
When opening the driver’s door to get out  
of the vehicle  
The inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key  
port.  
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-  
gent Key port.  
The NO KEY warning appears on the  
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times  
and the inside warning chime sounds for  
approximately 3 seconds.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC or position.  
ON position.  
When closing the door after getting out of  
the vehicle  
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-  
play and the outside chime sounds  
continuously.  
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
position and the shift selector is not in the P tion and place the ignition switch in the  
(Park) position.  
OFF position.  
The shift “P” warning light appears on the  
display and the outside chime sounds  
continuously.  
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park)  
position and the shift selector is not in the P position.  
(Park) position.  
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
Close the door securely.  
knob turned to LOCK  
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.  
trunk.  
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or  
trunk.  
When pushing the door handle request  
switch to lock the door  
The outside chime sounds for approximately  
2 seconds.  
A door is not closed securely.  
The door handle request switch is pushed  
before the door is closed.  
Push the door handle request switch after  
the door is closed.  
The outside chime sounds for approximately  
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
When closing the trunk lid  
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.  
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™  
WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNK  
REQUEST SWITCHES  
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with  
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-  
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-  
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-  
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following  
operating conditions:  
Although the life of the battery varies depending  
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is  
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-  
charged, replace it with a new one.  
WARNING  
●
Radio waves could adversely affect elec-  
tric medical equipment. Those who use a  
pacemaker should contact the electric  
medical equipment manufacturer for the  
possible influences before use.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-  
charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-  
gent Key port to start the engine. Replace the  
discharged battery with a new one as soon as  
possible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-  
nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-  
tion.  
●
When operating near a location where  
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as  
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting  
station.  
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio  
waves when the buttons are pushed.  
The FAA advises the radio waves may  
affect aircraft navigation and communi-  
cation systems. Do not operate the In-  
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make  
sure the buttons are not operated unin-  
tentionally when the unit is stored for a  
flight.  
●
When in possession of wireless equipment,  
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,  
and CB radio.  
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving  
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment  
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-  
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-  
tery life may become shorter.  
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or  
covered by metallic materials.  
When any type of radio wave remote control  
is used nearby.  
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks  
using the remote controller function. The operat-  
ing environment and/or conditions may affect the  
Intelligent Key operation.  
For information regarding replacement of a bat-  
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section.  
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an  
electric appliance such as a personal com-  
puter.  
Be sure to read the following before using the  
Intelligent Key.  
Because the steering wheel is locked electrically,  
unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition  
switch in the LOCK position is impossible when  
the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Un-  
locking the steering wheel is impossible even if  
the Intelligent Key is inserted into the Intelligent  
Key port. Pay special attention that the vehicle  
battery is not completely discharged.  
●
When the vehicle is parked near a parking  
meter.  
CAUTION  
In such cases, correct the operating conditions  
before using the Intelligent Key function or use  
the mechanical key.  
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with  
you when operating the vehicle.  
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the  
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered  
and used with one vehicle. For information about  
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent  
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE  
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near  
equipment that produces a magnetic  
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and  
personal computers.  
The remote keyless entry function can operate all  
door locks using the remote keyless function of  
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function  
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away  
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-  
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.  
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN  
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-  
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the  
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate  
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing  
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which  
contains electrical components, to  
come into contact with water or salt  
water. This could affect the system  
function.  
The remote keyless entry function will not func-  
tion under the following conditions:  
OPERATING RANGE  
●
●
●
When the Intelligent Key is not within the  
operational range.  
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.  
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used  
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified  
operating range.  
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply  
against another object.  
When the doors or the trunk are open or not  
closed securely.  
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent  
Key.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or  
strong radio waves are present near the operat-  
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-  
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent  
Key may not function properly.  
When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-  
charged.  
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent  
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-  
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.  
CAUTION  
When locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in  
the vehicle.  
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an  
extended period in an area where tem-  
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).  
The operating range is within 33 ft (10 m) of the  
vehicle.  
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a  
key holder that contains a magnet.  
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
After locking the doors using the Intelli-  
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been  
securely locked by operating the door  
handles.  
WPD0359  
WPD0360  
Locking doors  
Unlocking doors  
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
1. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
2. Close all doors.  
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.  
3. Press the  
Key.  
button on the Intelligent  
3. Press the button again within 5 sec-  
onds to unlock all doors.  
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and  
the horn beeps once.  
All doors will be locked automatically unless one  
of the following operations is performed within 1  
minute after pressing the  
button:  
5. All doors will be locked.  
●
●
Opening any doors.  
Pushing the ignition switch.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when  
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in  
the DOOR position.  
The light can be turned off without waiting for 15  
seconds by performing one of the following op-  
erations:  
●
Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-  
tion.  
●
●
Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.  
Switching the room light switch to the OFF  
position.  
WPD0364  
WPD0361  
Releasing the trunk lid  
Using the panic alarm  
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,  
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention  
Press the  
button for longer than 0.5 sec-  
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release  
button will not operate when the ignition switch is  
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel  
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel  
switch” later in this section.  
by pressing and holding the  
button on the  
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.  
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25  
seconds.  
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The panic alarm stops when:  
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the  
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn  
beep feature has been reactivated.  
●
●
●
It has run for 25 seconds, or  
Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.  
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-  
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.  
Pushing the request switch on the driver or  
passenger door with the Intelligent Key in  
range of the door handle.  
WARNING SIGNALS  
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-  
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent  
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being  
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and  
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in  
the instrument panel.  
WPD0362  
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is  
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the  
Intelligent Key.  
Silencing the horn beep feature  
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-  
vated using the Intelligent Key.  
See the troubleshooting guide that follows and  
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments  
and controls” section of this manual.  
To deactivate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds.  
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to  
confirm that the horn beep feature has been  
deactivated.  
To activate: Press and hold the  
and  
buttons for at least 2 seconds  
once more.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are  
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent  
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle  
system may respond differently than expected.  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Remedy  
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-  
play and the inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
Shift the shift selector to the P position.  
When pushing the ignition switch to stop  
the engine  
The shift selector is not in the P position.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.  
When opening the driver’s door to get out  
of the vehicle  
The inside warning chime sounds  
continuously.  
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key  
port.  
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-  
gent Key port.  
The NO KEY warning appears on the  
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times  
and the inside warning chime sounds for  
approximately 3 seconds.  
Place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position.  
When closing the door after getting out of  
the vehicle  
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-  
play and the outside chime sounds  
continuously.  
The ignition switch is in the ACC position  
and the shift selector is not in the P (Park)  
position.  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion and place the ignition switch in the  
OFF position.  
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
knob turned to LOCK  
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.  
trunk.  
The outside chime sounds for approximately  
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.  
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.  
When closing the trunk lid  
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.  
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HOOD  
TRUNK LID  
WPD0441  
LPD0394  
1
Pull the hood lock release handle located  
below the driver’s side instrument panel; the  
hood springs up slightly.  
᭺
OPENER OPERATION  
WARNING  
● Make sure the hood is completely  
closed and latched before driving. Fail-  
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly  
open and result in an accident.  
WARNING  
2
Lift the lever at the front of the hood with your  
fingertips and raise the hood.  
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This  
could allow dangerous exhaust gases  
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-  
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”  
section of this manual.  
᭺
3
Remove the support rod from the clamp.  
● If you see steam or smoke coming from  
the engine compartment, to avoid injury  
do not open the hood.  
᭺
4
Insert the support rod into the hole on the  
passenger’s side of the hood.  
᭺
5
When closing the hood, return the hood rod  
to its original position. Lower the hood ap-  
proximately 12 inches (30 cm) above the  
latch and release it. This allows proper en-  
gagement of the hood latch.  
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Closely supervise children when they  
are around cars to prevent them from  
playing and becoming locked in the  
trunk where they could be seriously in-  
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear  
seatback and trunk lid securely latched  
when not in use, and prevent children’s  
access to car keys.  
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch  
down.  
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid  
down securely.  
LPD0395  
LPD0396  
NOTE:  
Cancel switch (if so equipped)  
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE  
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli-  
gent Key. Refer to “NISSAN Intelligent  
Key™” earlier in this section.  
When the switch, located inside the glove box, is  
in the OFF position, the power to the trunk lid will  
be cancelled. The trunk can only be opened with  
the master key or keyfob.  
WARNING  
Closely supervise children when they are  
around cars to prevent them from playing  
and becoming locked in the trunk where  
they could be seriously injured. Keep the  
car locked, with the rear seatback and  
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,  
and prevent children’s access to car keys.  
The trunk lid cannot be opened when:  
●
●
using the trunk lid release switch,  
the trunk open request switch is pressed,  
when the Intelligent Key is in range of the  
vehicle or  
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides  
a means of escape for children and adults in the  
event they become locked inside the trunk.  
●
the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key is  
pressed.  
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FUEL-FILLER DOOR  
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-  
nated release handle until the lock releases and  
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is  
made of a material that glows in the dark after a  
brief exposure to ambient light.  
The handle is located inside the trunk compart-  
ment on the interior of the trunk lid.  
LPD0448  
LPD0397  
Coupe  
OPENER OPERATION  
FUEL-FILLER CAP  
The fuel-filler door release is located on the floor  
to the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-  
filler door, pull up the release. To lock, close the  
fuel-filler door securely.  
The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn the  
cap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turn  
the cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are  
heard.  
For the Coupe model, put the fuel-filler cap on the  
1
cap holder  
while refueling.  
᭺
For the Sedan model, loop the tether strap  
1
around the hook  
while refueling.  
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Use only an original equipment type  
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a  
built-in safety valve needed for proper  
operation of the fuel system and emis-  
sion control system. An incorrect cap  
can result in a serious malfunction and  
possible injury. It could also cause the  
malfunction indicator light to come on.  
CAUTION  
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,  
flush it away with water to avoid paint  
damage.  
● Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the  
fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the  
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tighten  
the fuel-filler cap properly may cause  
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to  
attempt to start your vehicle.  
the  
Malfunction Indicator Light  
● Do not fill a portable fuel container in  
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity  
can cause an explosion of flammable  
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or  
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious  
injury or death when filling portable fuel  
containers:  
(MIL) to illuminate. If the  
light  
illuminates because the fuel-filler cap  
is loose or missing, tighten or install the  
cap and continue to drive the vehicle.  
LPD0449  
Sedan  
The  
light should turn off after a  
WARNING  
few driving trips. If the  
light  
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and  
highly explosive under certain condi-  
tions. You could be burned or seriously  
injured if it is misused or mishandled.  
Always stop the engine and do not  
smoke or allow open flames or sparks  
near the vehicle when refueling.  
– Always place the container on the  
ground when filling.  
does not turn off after a few driving  
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
– Do not use electronic devices when  
filling.  
● For additional information, see the  
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in  
the “Instruments and Controls” section  
earlier in this manual.  
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact  
with the container while you are fill-  
ing it.  
● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the  
cap a third of a turn, and wait for any  
“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuel  
from spraying out and possibly causing  
personal injury. Then remove the cap.  
– Use only approved portable fuel con-  
tainers for flammable liquid.  
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING  
COLUMN  
SUN VISORS  
TELESCOPIC OPERATION  
1
Pull the lever  
all the way toward you and  
᭺
adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in  
3
direction  
, to the desired position. Lock the  
wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the  
lever has returned to its original position.  
᭺
WARNING  
Do not adjust the steering wheel any  
closer to you than is necessary for proper  
steering operation and comfort. The driv-  
er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you  
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting  
sideways or out of position in any way, you  
are at greater risk of injury or death in a  
crash. You may also receive serious or  
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up  
against it when it inflates. Always sit back  
against the seatback and as far away as  
practical from the steering wheel. Always  
use the seat belts.  
LPD0398  
TILT OPERATION  
1
Pull the lever  
all the way toward you and  
᭺
2
adjust the steering wheel up or down  
to the  
᭺
desired position. Lock the wheel by releasing the  
lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its  
original position.  
WPD0435  
WARNING  
Coupe shown, sedan similar  
To block glare from the front, swing down the  
main sun visor.  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while  
driving. You could lose control of your  
vehicle and cause an accident.  
1
᭺
2
To block glare from the side, remove the sun  
visor from the center mount and swing the  
sun visor to the side.  
᭺
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MIRRORS  
3
Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)  
in or out as needed.  
᭺
CAUTION  
Do not store the sun visor before returning  
the extension to its original position.  
LPD0400  
WPD0126  
Coupe shown, sedan similar  
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)  
VANITY MIRRORS  
1
The night position  
reduces glare from the  
᭺
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor  
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity  
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the  
mirror cover is open.  
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.  
2
Use the day position  
hours.  
when driving in daylight  
᭺
WARNING  
Use the night position only when neces-  
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.  
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press  
the  
turn on.  
button again. The indicator light will  
For information on HomeLinkா Universal Trans-  
ceiver operation, see “HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver”in the “Instrument and controls”sec-  
tion of this manual.  
For information on the compass display, see  
“Compass display” in the “Instrument and con-  
trols” section of this manual.  
NOTE:  
Do not hang any objects over the sensors  
WPD0333  
LPD0346  
2
or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.  
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the  
sensors, resulting in improper operation.  
᭺
Electric control type  
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE  
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)  
The outside mirror remote control only operates  
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON  
position.  
OUTSIDE MIRRORS  
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-  
cally dims according to the intensity of the head-  
lights of the vehicle following you. The automatic  
anti-glare feature operates only when the ignition  
switch is in the ON position.  
WARNING  
Rotate the control lever to select the right or left  
mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by  
moving the control lever.  
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on  
the passenger side are closer than they  
appear. Be careful when moving to the  
right. Using only this mirror could cause  
an accident. Use the inside mirror or  
glance over your shoulder to properly  
judge distances to other objects.  
1
The indicator light  
will illuminate when the  
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.  
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)  
᭺
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,  
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-  
tional information, see “Rear window and outside  
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instrument and  
controls” section of this manual.  
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press  
the  
button. The indicator light will turn off.  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WPD0056  
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so  
equipped)  
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.  
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice  
recognition systems  
Control panel buttons (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
How to use the SETUP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7  
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10  
Heater and air conditioner (manual)  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11  
Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11  
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-12  
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13  
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14  
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18  
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18  
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19  
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
Audio system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21  
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21  
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21  
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . .4-22  
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22  
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player. . . . . .4-27  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)  
changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-38  
CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43  
Steering wheel switch for audio control  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45  
Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System without  
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46  
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48  
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48  
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50  
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-51  
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53  
Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with  
Nissan Voice Recognition System (if so equipped) . . .4-69  
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-69  
System features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System voice  
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-61  
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62  
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63  
Pairing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63  
Phone download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64  
Making a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66  
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66  
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67  
Phone setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-68  
commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71  
Navigation system voice commands  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72  
Voice recognition settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72  
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS (if so  
equipped)  
WARNING  
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-  
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,  
fire, or electrical shock.  
● Do not use this system if you notice any  
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or  
lack of sound. Continued use of the  
system may result in accident, fire or  
electric shock.  
● In case you notice any foreign object in  
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,  
or notice smoke or smell coming from  
it, stop using the system immediately  
and contact your nearest NISSAN  
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may  
lead to accidents, fire or electrical  
shock.  
LHA0746  
1.  
6.  
DEST button*  
brightness control button  
(P. 4-7)  
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to  
the separate Navigation System Owner’s  
Manual.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
TILT button*  
INFO button*  
SETUP button (P. 4-3)  
MAP button*  
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When you use this system, make sure the engine  
is running.  
If you do not press a button or touch a screen key  
for more than 1 minute on the START-UP screen,  
the screen will change to the audio screen auto-  
matically.  
If you use the system with the engine not  
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long  
time, it will use up all the battery power,  
and the engine will not start.  
To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate  
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.  
Reference symbols:  
SETUP button — This is a button on the control  
panel.  
“Display” key — This is a select key on the touch-  
screen. By touching this key you can proceed to  
the next function.  
LHA0747  
SETTING UP THE START-UP  
SCREEN  
HOW TO USE THE SETUP BUTTON  
When the SETUP button is pressed, the settings  
screen will appear on the display. You can select  
and/or adjust several functions, features and  
modes that are available for your vehicle. Touch  
one of the setting item keys to select each item to  
be set.  
With the ignition to ACC or ON, the SYSTEM  
START-UP warning is displayed on the screen.  
Read the warning and touch the “I agree” key  
(English) or the “Enter” (Français) key.  
If you do not touch the “I agree” key, the Naviga-  
tion system will not proceed to the next step  
display.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To turn the screen on,  
●
Press the SETUP button and then touch the  
display “ON” key, or  
●
Press the  
button. The message “Re-  
suming display” will appear and the Display  
“ON” key will be automatically turned on, the  
amber indicator will illuminate.  
LHA0748  
LHA0749  
Display off:  
Display settings  
Touch the Display “ON” key. The indicator of the  
display turns off; touch the “Back” key to accept  
the change. The message above will be dis-  
played briefly. When the audio, or any mode  
button on the control panel is operated, the dis-  
play turns on for that operation. If one of the  
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will  
automatically turn off after 5 seconds.  
Touch the “Display” key. The display screen will  
appear.  
Display/brightness/contrast:  
Touch the “–” key or the “+” key to adjust the  
brightness and contrast of the screen.  
The new settings are automatically saved when  
you exit the setting screen by touching the “Back”  
key or pressing any other mode button.  
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clock Format:  
Touch the  
key or the  
key to choose  
either the 12-hour clock display or the 24-hour  
clock display.  
Offset Adjust:  
Touch the “–”key or the “+”key to adjust the time  
by increasing or decreasing per minute.  
Daylight Saving Time:  
When this item is turned on, the daylight saving  
time, application is enabled. To turn off daylight  
saving time, touch the Daylight Saving Time “ON”  
key; touch it again to enable daylight saving.  
LHA0750  
LHA1005  
Time Zone:  
Clock  
Touch the “Time Zone”key, the Time Zone screen  
will appear.  
Adjusting the time:  
The following display will appear when pressing  
the SETUP button, then touching the “Clock”key.  
Select one of the following zones, depending on  
the current location. Touch the “ON” key for the  
particular time zone.  
On-screen Clock:  
When this item is turned on, a clock is always  
displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.  
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly  
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.  
To turn off the clock in the upper right corner of  
the screen touch the On-screen Clock “ON” key,  
touch it again to display the clock.  
●
●
●
●
●
●
Pacific zone  
Mountain zone  
Central zone  
Eastern zone  
Atlantic zone  
Newfoundland zone  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After selection, touch the “Back” key the Clock  
screen will appear.  
Pacific zone has been set as the initial (default)  
setting.  
LHA1006  
LHA0751  
Beep setting  
Language/units  
Touch the “Volumes/Tones” key. Touch the But-  
ton Beeps “ON”key to turn on or turn off the beep  
sound. To accept the changes touch the “Back”  
key.  
The following display will appear when pressing  
the SETUP button, then touching the  
“Language/Units” key.  
With this option on, a beep will sound if any  
button is pressed or any key is touched. The  
amber indicator will be illuminated.  
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice recognition settings  
For information on the voice recognition settings,  
see “Voice Recognition System (if so equipped)”  
later in this section.  
Audio settings  
For information on the audio settings, see “Audio  
System” later in this section.  
Navigation settings  
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual for information regarding these set-  
tings.  
LHA1007  
LHA1008  
BUTTON  
Select Language:  
Select Units:  
To change the display brightness, press  
Touch the “Select Language” key. From the fol-  
lowing display, select the English “ON” key or the  
Français “ON” key for your language preference.  
Touch the “Select Units” key. From the following  
display, select the US “ON” key or the Metric  
“ON” key for your units preference.  
the  
change the display to the day  
night display. The brightness can then be  
button. Pressing the button again will  
or the  
If you select the “Français” key, French language  
will be displayed. To obtain a French Owner’s  
Manual, please see “Owner’s Manual / Service  
Manual order information” in the “Technical and  
consumer information” section.  
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG  
Metric: — km, °C, L/100 km  
adjusted by touching the  
key.  
key or the  
The settings are automatically saved when you  
exit the menu by touching the “Back” key.  
If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the  
display will return to the previous display.  
Phone settings  
For information on the phone settings, see  
“Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System with  
Navigation (if so equipped)” later in this section.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so  
equipped)  
When the shift selector is shifted into the R  
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows the  
view directly to the rear of the vehicle.  
● When washing the vehicle with high-  
pressure water, be sure not to spray it  
around the camera. Otherwise, water  
may enter the camera unit causing wa-  
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-  
function, fire or an electric shock.  
WARNING  
● The system is designed as an aid to the  
driver in detecting large stationary ob-  
jects to help avoid damaging the ve-  
hicle. The system will not detect small  
objects below the bumper, and may not  
detect objects close to the bumper or  
on the ground.  
● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-  
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-  
function or cause damage resulting in a  
fire or an electric shock.  
CAUTION  
● The RearView Monitor is a convenience  
but it is not a substitute for proper back-  
ing. Always turn and check that it is safe  
to do so before backing up. Always  
back up slowly.  
There is a plastic cover over the camera.  
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning  
dirt or snow from the cover.  
LHA0437  
They are indicated as reference distances to  
objects. The lines and colors in the display indi-  
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED  
LINES  
A
cate distances from the back bumper line  
the illustration.  
in  
᭺
● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-  
tor differ from actual distance because  
a wide-angle lens is used.  
1
1.5 ft (0.5 m) red  
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and  
᭺
distances to objects with reference to the  
2
3 ft (1 m) yellow  
᭺
A
● Make sure that the trunk is securely  
closed when backing up.  
bumper line  
are displayed on the monitor.  
᭺
3
7 ft (2 m) green  
᭺
4
● Do not put anything on the rearview  
camera. The rearview camera is in-  
stalled beside the license plate light.  
10 ft (3 m) green  
᭺
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than  
the actual clearance.  
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-  
tor may differ somewhat from those of the  
actual object.  
OPERATING TIPS  
●
When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-  
verse), the monitor screen automatically  
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.  
However, the radio can be heard.  
When the contrast of objects is low at night,  
pressing the SETUP button may not change  
the brightness.  
●
It may take some time until the RearView  
Monitor is displayed after the shift selector  
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects  
may be distorted momentarily until the Rear-  
View Monitor screen is displayed com-  
pletely. When the shift selector is returned to  
a position other than R (Reverse), it may take  
some time until the screen changes. Objects  
on the screen may be distorted until they are  
completely displayed.  
●
●
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a  
dark place or at night.  
If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,  
the RearView Monitor may not display ob-  
jects. Clean the camera.  
●
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to  
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-  
tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth  
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent  
and then wipe with a dry cloth.  
LHA1013  
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN  
To adjust the quality of the screen, press the  
SETUP button.  
●
When the temperature is extremely high or  
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-  
jects. This is not a malfunction.  
●
●
Do not damage the camera as the monitor  
screen may be adversely affected.  
●
To adjust the Brightness, Tint, Contrast, Dis-  
play ON/OFF and Color of the RearView  
Monitor, press the SETUP button with the  
RearView Monitor on, then touch the “–” or  
“+” key on the item and adjust the level.  
Do not use body wax on the camera window.  
If body wax does get on the camera window,  
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-  
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.  
●
●
When strong light directly enters the cam-  
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.  
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the  
screen. This is due to strong reflected light  
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.  
●
Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Tint  
and Color of the RearView Monitor while the  
vehicle is moving.  
●
The screen may flicker under fluorescent  
light. This is not a malfunction.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VENTS  
WHA0736  
WHA0737  
WHA0688  
Right and Left  
Center  
Rear (sedan, if so equipped)  
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent  
slides.  
Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move  
the dial toward the  
to open the vents or  
toward the to close them.  
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER  
(manual) (if so equipped)  
WARNING  
● The air conditioner cooling function op-  
erates only when the engine is running.  
● Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the assistance  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should also not be left alone. They  
could accidentally injure themselves or  
others through inadvertent operation of  
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,  
temperatures in a closed vehicle could  
quickly become high enough to cause  
severe or possibly fatal injuries to  
people or animals.  
WHA1177  
1. Fan speed control/system OFF dial  
2. Air flow control buttons  
3. Temperature control dial  
4. Air conditioner button  
5. Rear window defroster  
6. MAX A/C button  
CONTROLS  
● Do not use the recirculation mode for  
long periods as it may cause the interior  
air to become stale and the windows to  
fog up.  
Fan control dial  
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and  
controls fan speed.  
Air flow control buttons  
7. Front window defrost button  
8. Air recirculation button  
The air flow control buttons allow you to select  
the air flow outlets.  
MAX — Air flows from center and side  
A/C  
vents with maximum cooling.  
— Air flows from center and side  
vents.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the off position for normal heater or air con-  
ditioner operation.  
— Air flows from center and side  
vents and foot outlets.  
1. Press the button to the OFF position  
for normal heating.  
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.  
— Air flows from defroster outlets  
and foot outlets.  
Air conditioner button  
2. Press the  
air flow control button.  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
The button is provided only on vehicles equipped  
with an air conditioner.  
— Air flows mainly from defroster  
outlets.  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position between the middle and the  
hot position.  
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the  
desired position and push the  
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light  
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.  
To turn off the air conditioner, push the  
button again.  
Temperature control dial  
button to  
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust  
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the  
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase  
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.  
Ventilation  
This mode directs outside air to the side and  
center ventilators.  
Air recirculation button  
The air conditioner cooling function oper-  
ates only when the engine is running.  
1. Press the  
2. Press the  
button to the OFF position.  
air flow control button.  
On position (Indicator light on):  
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.  
Rear window defroster switch  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
For more information about the rear window de-  
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside  
mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the  
“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.  
Press the  
button to the on position when:  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
●
●
driving on a dusty road.  
to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-  
senger compartment.  
Defrosting or defogging  
HEATER OPERATION  
Heating  
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to  
defrost/defog the windows.  
●
for maximum cooling when using the air con-  
ditioner.  
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot  
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost  
outlets.  
1. Press the defrost/defog button  
.
Off position (Indicator light off):  
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-  
ment and distributed through the selected outlet.  
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position between the middle and the  
hot position.  
1. Press the  
2. Press the  
button to the OFF position. Operating tips  
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades  
air flow control button.  
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This  
improves heater operation.  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
●
To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-  
dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest  
setting and the temperature control to the  
full HOT position.  
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the  
desired position, and push in the  
button to  
●
When the  
position is selected, the air Heating and defogging  
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-  
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions  
are added to the heater operation.  
conditioner automatically turns on (however,  
the indicator light on the  
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-  
shield.  
button will  
not come on) if the outside temperature is  
more than 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for  
more than one minute, the air conditioning  
system will continue to operate until the fan  
control dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle is  
shut off, or the A/C button is used to turn off  
the compressor even if the air flow control  
dial is turned to a position other than  
the  
which helps defog the windshield.  
The mode automatically turns off, al-  
lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-  
senger compartment to further improve the  
defogging performance.  
1. Press the  
air flow control button.  
The air conditioner cooling function oper-  
ates only when the engine is running.  
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
Cooling  
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position between the middle and the  
hot position.  
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.  
1. Press the  
button to the OFF position.  
position. This dehumidifies the air  
●
When the  
position is selected, the air  
2. Press MAX A/C or  
button.  
air flow control  
conditioner automatically turns on if the out-  
side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).  
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
the windshield. The  
mode automati-  
cally turns off, allowing outside air to be  
drawn into the passenger compartment to  
further improve the defogging performance.  
4. Push the  
comes on.  
button. the indicator light  
Bi-level heating  
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side  
and center vents and to the front and rear floor  
outlets.  
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
For quick cooling when the outside tem-  
perature is high, push the button to  
the ON position. Be sure to return the  
to the OFF position for normal cooling. MAX  
A/C may be used for quick cooling.  
●
●
A visible mist may be seen coming from the  
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air  
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
When the  
or  
are selected, the air  
conditioner automatically turns on (however, the  
indicator light will not illuminate) if the outside  
temperature is more than 36°F (2°C). This dehu-  
midifies the air which helps defog the windshield.  
If the engine coolant temperature  
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-  
perature over the normal range, turn  
the air conditioner off. See “If your  
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of  
emergency” section of this manual.  
The  
mode automatically turns off, allowing  
Dehumidified heating  
outside air to be drawn into the passenger com-  
partment to further improve the defogging perfor-  
mance.  
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.  
1. Press the  
2. Press the  
button to the OFF position.  
air flow control button.  
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
AIR FLOW CHARTS  
The following charts show the button and dial  
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,  
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation  
button should always be in the OFF posi-  
tion for heating and defrosting.  
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
Operating tips  
●
Keep the windows and moonroof closed  
while the air conditioner is in operation.  
4. Push the  
comes on.  
button. The indicator light  
●
After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3  
minutes with the windows open to vent hot  
air from the passenger compartment. Then,  
close the windows. This allows the air con-  
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.  
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-  
sired position.  
Dehumidified defogging  
This mode is used to defog the windows and  
dehumidify the air.  
●
The air conditioning system should be  
operated for approximately 10 minutes  
at least once a month. This helps pre-  
vent damage to the system due to lack  
of lubrication.  
1. Press the  
air flow control button.  
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-  
tion.  
3. Press the  
comes on.  
button. The indicator light  
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHA1179  
WHA1180  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA1181  
WHA1182  
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHA1183  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER  
(automatic) (if so equipped)  
● Do not use the recirculation mode for  
long periods as it may cause the interior  
air to become stale and the windows to  
fog up.  
Start the engine and operate the controls to  
activate the air conditioner.  
AUTOMATIC OPERATION  
Cooling or heating (auto)  
This mode may be normally used all year round as  
the system automatically works to keep a con-  
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan  
speed are also controlled automatically.  
WHA1171  
1. Driver temperature control dial  
2. Air flow control buttons  
3. Passenger temperature control dial  
4. DUAL button  
WARNING  
1. Push the AUTO button on.  
● The air conditioner cooling function op-  
erates only when the engine is running.  
2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control  
dial to the left or right to set the desired  
temperature. Driver and passenger tem-  
peratures can be set independently. Press  
DUAL or turn the passenger temperature  
control dial to the left or right to activate dual  
climate control functions. Turn the passen-  
ger’s side temperature control dial to the left  
or right to set the desired passenger’s tem-  
perature.  
● Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the assistance  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should also not be left alone. They  
could accidentally injure themselves or  
others through inadvertent operation of  
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,  
temperatures in a closed vehicle could  
quickly become high enough to cause  
severe or possibly fatal injuries to  
people or animals.  
5. Rear defrost button  
6. Front window defrost button  
7. Fan speed dial/system OFF button  
8. Air recirculation button  
9. A/C ON/OFF button  
10. AUTO button  
●
Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F  
(24°C) for normal operation.  
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
The temperature of the passenger compart-  
ment will be maintained automatically. Air  
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off  
are also controlled automatically.  
●
When the  
control is activated, the air Air recirculation  
conditioner will automatically be turned on at  
outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C).  
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog  
the windshield. The air recirculation mode  
automatically turns off, allowing outside air  
to be drawn into the passenger compart-  
ment to further improve the defogging per-  
formance.  
Push the air recirculation button  
culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator  
light on the switch will come on.  
to recir-  
A visible mist may be seen coming from the  
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is  
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-  
function.  
The air recirculation button will not be activated  
when the air conditioner is in DEF or  
mode.  
Air flow control  
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging  
Push the air flow control buttons to manually  
control air flow and select the air outlet:  
Rear window defroster switch  
1. Push the defroster control button  
to  
For more information about the rear window de-  
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside  
mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the  
“Instruments and controls”section of this manual.  
— Air flows from center and side  
vents.  
— Air flows from center and side  
vents and foot outlets.  
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.  
turn the system on. The indicator light in the  
button will illuminate.  
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right  
to set the desired temperature.  
MANUAL OPERATION  
Fan speed control  
●
To quickly remove ice from the outside of the  
windows, turn the manual fan control to HI.  
— Air flows from defroster and foot  
outlets.  
●
As soon as possible after the windshield is  
clean, push the AUTO button to return to the  
auto mode.  
— Air flows from defroster outlets.  
Turn the fan control dial  
manually control the fan speed.  
left or right to  
To turn system off  
Press the  
off.  
/OFF button to turn the system  
Press the  
/OFF button.  
Push the AUTO button to return to automatic  
control of the fan speed.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER  
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-  
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with  
the environment in mind.  
OPERATING TIPS  
●
When the engine coolant temperature and  
outside air temperature are low, the air flow  
from the foot outlets may not operate for a  
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is  
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-  
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets  
will operate normally.  
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s  
ozone layer.  
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-  
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-  
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants  
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner  
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant  
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and  
consumer information” section of this manual.  
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-  
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.  
WHA0791  
The sunload sensor, located on the top of the  
instrument panel on the driver’s side, helps the  
system maintain a constant temperature. Do not  
put anything on or around this sensor.  
WARNING  
The air conditioner system contains re-  
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid  
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-  
vice should be done only by an experi-  
enced technician with proper equipment.  
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
Reception conditions will constantly change be-  
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,  
signal distance and interference from other ve-  
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-  
scribed below are some of the factors that can  
affect your radio reception.  
Static and flutter: During signal interference from  
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position  
(usually in conjunction with increased distance  
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can  
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the  
treble control to reduce treble response.  
RADIO  
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-  
tion, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob  
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with  
the engine not running, the ignition should be  
placed in the ACC position.  
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come  
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-  
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-  
nate the noise.  
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective  
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected  
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The  
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-  
mentary flutter or loss of sound.  
Radio reception is affected by station signal  
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-  
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-  
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality  
normally are caused by these external influences.  
FM RADIO RECEPTION  
AM RADIO RECEPTION  
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-  
hicle may influence radio reception quality.  
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi  
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM  
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-  
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM  
station reception even if the FM station is within  
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is  
directly related to the distance between the  
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-  
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-  
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect  
off objects.  
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can  
bend around objects and skip along the ground.  
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the  
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of  
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-  
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter  
to receiver.  
Radio reception  
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with  
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-  
dio reception. These circuits are designed to  
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-  
ity of that reception.  
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing  
through freeway underpasses or in areas with  
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several  
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in  
areas where no obstacles exist.  
However, there are some general characteristics  
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect  
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even  
when the finest equipment is used. These char-  
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-  
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction  
in your NISSAN radio system.  
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from  
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade  
and/or drift.  
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical  
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so  
equipped)  
Compact disc (CD) player  
CAUTION  
When the satellite radio is used for the first time  
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite  
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-  
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite  
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or  
large building for satellite radio to receive all of  
the necessary data.  
● Do not force a compact disc into the CD  
insert slot. This could damage the CD  
and/or CD changer/player.  
● Trying to load a CD with the CD door  
closed could damage the CD and/or CD  
changer.  
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO  
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is  
selected unless optional satellite receiver and  
antenna are installed and an XMா satellite radio  
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is  
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.  
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD  
player at a time.  
●
●
Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)  
round discs that have the “COMPACT  
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc  
or packaging.  
Satellite radio performance may be affected if  
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio  
signal.  
During cold weather or rainy days, the  
player may malfunction due to the hu-  
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD  
and dehumidify or ventilate the player  
completely.  
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite  
antenna.  
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can  
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the  
ice to restore satellite radio reception.  
LHA0099  
●
●
The player may skip while driving on  
rough roads.  
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS  
The CD player sometimes cannot func-  
tion when the compartment tempera-  
ture is extremely high or low.  
Decrease/increase the temperature  
before use.  
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
Do not expose the CD to direct sun-  
light.  
1. MP3 or WMA file not supported → “UN-  
Compact Disc with MP3 or WMA  
PLAYABLE TRACK” → Go to next track  
Terms:  
CDs that are in poor condition or are  
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-  
prints may not work properly.  
2. CD ROM → “No Audio Track” → Eject disc  
and go to the last mode (CD player only) /  
Go to next disc (CD changer only)  
●
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures  
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the  
most well-known compressed digital audio  
file format. This format allows for near “CD  
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of  
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an  
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the  
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with  
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3  
compression removes the redundant and  
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the  
human ear doesn’t hear.  
●
The following CDs may not work prop-  
erly:  
3. TEMP/MECH ERROR → “PRESS EJECT”  
4. READ/FOCUS ERROR → “CHECK DISC”  
CHECK DISC:  
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)  
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)  
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)  
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-  
rectly (the label side is facing up,  
etc.).  
●
Do not use the following CDs as they  
may cause the CD player to malfunc-  
tion:  
● Confirm that the CD is not bent or  
warped and it is free of scratches.  
●
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a  
compressed audio format created by Mi-  
crosoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA  
codec offers greater file compression than  
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more  
digital audio tracks in the same amount of  
space when compared to MP3s at the same  
level of quality.  
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter  
● CDs that are not round  
PRESS EJECT:  
This is an error due to excessive tem-  
perature inside the player. Remove the  
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After  
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD  
can be played when the temperature of  
the player returns to normal.  
● CDs with a paper label  
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or  
have abnormal edges  
●
●
This audio system can only play pre-  
recorded CDs. It has no capability to  
record or burn CDs.  
●
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of  
bits per second used by a digital music file.  
The size and quality of a compressed digital  
audio file is determined by the bit rate used  
when encoding the file.  
UNPLAYABLE:  
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-  
tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).  
If the CD cannot be played, one of the  
following messages will be displayed.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency  
is the rate at which the samples of a signal  
are converted from analog to digital (A/D  
conversion) per second.  
Playback order:  
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA  
files is as illustrated.  
●
●
●
The names of folders not containing MP3 or  
WMA files are not shown in the display.  
Multisession — Multisession is one of the  
methods for writing data to media. Writing  
data once to the media is called a single  
session, and writing more than once is called  
a multisession.  
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,  
“Root Folder” is displayed.  
The playback order is the order in which the  
files were written by the writing software.  
Therefore, the files might not play in the  
desired order.  
●
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the  
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that  
contains information about the digital music  
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit  
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-  
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title  
line on the display.  
* Windowsா and Windows Mediaா are regis-  
tered trademarks and trademarks in the United  
States of America and other countries of Mi-  
crosoft Corporation of the USA.  
WHA1078  
Playback order chart  
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specification chart:  
Supported media  
CD, CD-R, CD-RW  
Supported file systems  
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.  
Version  
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5  
MP3  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
8 kHz - 48 kHz  
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR  
Supported  
versions*1  
WMA  
Version  
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9  
Sampling frequency  
Bit rate  
32 kHz - 48 kHz  
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR  
Tag information  
Folder levels  
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)  
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)  
128 characters  
Text character number limitation  
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:  
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)  
Displayable character codes*2  
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.  
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting guide:  
Symptom  
Cause and Countermeasure  
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.  
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.  
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.  
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.  
Cannot play  
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.  
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for  
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.  
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.  
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.  
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.  
Poor sound quality  
Bit rate may be too low.  
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.  
before the music starts  
playing.  
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the  
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.  
Music cuts off or skips  
Skipping with high bit rate  
files  
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.  
Moves immediately to the  
next song when playing  
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there  
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.  
Songs do not play back in  
the desired order  
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.  
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. RADIO button  
13. CD button  
14. DISP button  
15. PRESET A·B·C button  
16. Station select (1 - 6) buttons  
17.  
pause/mute button  
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT  
DISC (CD) PLAYER  
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-  
tion precautions” earlier in this section.  
Audio main operation  
PWR/VOL control knob  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position, then press the PWR/VOL control knob.  
If you listen to the radio with the engine not  
running, place the ignition in the ACC position.  
The mode (radio or CD) that was playing imme-  
diately before the system was turned off resumes  
playing.  
LHA0728  
1. SEEK/TRACK button  
2. CD insert slot  
3. TUNE/FF·REW button  
6. CLOCK button  
7. AUX IN jack  
8. SCAN button  
9. RDM/RPT button  
10. PWR/VOL control knob  
11. AUX button  
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.  
Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turns  
the system off.  
4.  
CD eject button  
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to  
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.  
5. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE  
and BALANCE)  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade and Bal-  
ance)  
DISP (display) button:  
Clock set  
Pressing the DISP (display) button will show text  
about CD information in the audio display.  
1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap-  
proximately 2 seconds.  
Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as  
follows:  
If the text information is to long to fully be dis-  
played on the screen; press and hold the DISP  
button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll  
through the rest of the text.  
2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.  
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Beep  
3. Press the SEEK/TRACK button  
ON/OFF → Audio → Bass  
or  
to adjust the hours.  
TUNE/FF·REW  
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance press  
the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-  
4. Press  
or  
button  
CD display mode  
pears  
in  
the  
display.  
Press  
the  
to adjust the minutes.  
To change the text displayed while playing a CD  
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button  
will allow you to scroll  
TUNE/FF·REW  
or  
to adjust Bass  
5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the  
clock set mode.  
and Treble to the desired level. You can also use  
the TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade and  
Balance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level be-  
tween the front and rear speakers and Balance  
adjusts the sound between the right and left  
speaker.  
through CD text as follows: Track number and  
Track time → Album title → Song title.  
The display will return to the regular clock display  
after 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK  
button again to return to the regular clock display.  
●
●
●
●
Track number displays the track number se-  
lected on the disc.  
pause/mute button:  
To turn the Beep sound off or on, press the  
AUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the  
Track time displays the amount of time the  
track has played.  
To mute or pause the audio sound, press  
TUNE/FF·REW button  
or  
until the  
the  
pause/mute button. Press the  
Album title displays the title of the CD being  
played.  
desired mode is displayed. This turns on or turns  
off the beep sound when audio buttons are  
pressed.  
button again to resume the audio sound.  
FM/AM radio operation  
FM/AM band select:  
Song title displays the title of the selected  
CD track.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly  
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-  
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically  
reappear after about 10 seconds.  
Clock operation  
Pressing the RADIO button will change the band  
as follows:  
Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock  
with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button  
again to turn off the clock display.  
AM ←→ FM  
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the RADIO button is pressed while the  
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the  
radio will come on at the station last played.  
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN  
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button  
again during this 5 second period stops scan  
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.  
Compact disc (CD) player operation  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position, and carefully insert the compact disc  
into the slot with the label side up. The compact  
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts  
to play.  
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO  
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-  
matically be turned off and the last radio station  
played will come on.  
Station memory operations:  
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to  
the A, B and C preset button in any combination  
of AM or FM stations.  
If the radio is already operating, it automatically  
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.  
The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during  
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast  
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes  
from stereo to monaural reception.  
CD button:  
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change  
between storage banks. The radio displays  
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of  
presets are active.  
When the CD button is pressed with a compact  
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns  
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.  
TUNE/FF·REW (tuning)  
button:  
2. Tune to the desired station using manual  
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of  
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)  
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes  
when the select button is pressed.)  
TUNE/FF·REW (Fast For-  
ward, Rewind) button:  
Press the TUNE/FF·REW button  
for manual tuning. To move quickly through the  
channels, hold the tuning buttons down.  
or  
When the TUNE/FF·REW button  
or  
is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the  
compact disc plays at an increased speed while  
fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is  
released, the compact disc returns to normal play  
speed.  
SEEK (tuning) button:  
3. The channel indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Programming is now  
complete.  
Press the SEEK/TRACK button  
to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-  
cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.  
or  
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-  
ner.  
SEEK/TRACK button:  
SCAN (tuning) button:  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
When  
is pressed while the compact disc  
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the  
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to  
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-  
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-  
is playing, the next track following the present  
one starts to play from the beginning.  
Press  
several times to skip several tracks.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-  
vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-  
pears in the display window. (When the last track  
on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is  
played.)  
CD EJECT:  
When the button is pressed with a com-  
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be  
ejected.  
When  
is pressed, the track being played  
several  
When the  
button is pressed while the  
returns to the beginning. Press  
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the  
button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track.  
compact disc is playing, the compact disc will  
eject and the system will turn off.  
CD IN indicator:  
RDM/RPT button:  
A CD icon indicator appears on the display when  
a CD is loaded with the system on.  
When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while the  
compact disc is being played, the play pattern  
can be changed as follows:  
AUX (Auxiliary) button:  
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The  
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard  
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-  
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-  
puters.  
Random Disc ←→ Repeat Track ←→ Normal  
Random Disc: The order of the tracks on the disc  
will be mixed during play.  
Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing  
will be repeated.  
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device  
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.  
SCAN (CDs) button:  
Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds to  
scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds  
per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scan  
mode.  
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through  
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is  
pressed during scan mode.  
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. RDM/RPT button  
10. PWR/VOL control knob  
11. AUX button  
12. RADIO* button  
13. CD button  
14. DISP button  
15. PRESET A·B·C button  
16. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons  
17.  
CD load button  
*No satellite radio reception is available  
unless there is an active XMா satellite  
radio service subscription. Satellite ra-  
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii  
and Guam. If satellite radio is not opera-  
tional then pressing the RADIO button  
will switch between FM and AM bands.  
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH  
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if  
so equipped)  
LHA0729  
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-  
tion precautions” earlier in this section.  
Type A  
1. SEEK/TRACK button  
2. CD insert slot  
3. TUNE/FF·REW button  
5. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE,  
SSV, BALANCE and BEEPS)  
6. CLOCK button  
7. AUX IN jack  
8. SCAN button  
No satellite radio reception is available unless  
there is an active XMா satellite radio service  
subscription. Satellite radio is not available in  
Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not  
4.  
CD eject button  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
operational then pressing the RADIO button will  
switch between FM and AM bands.  
Clock set  
TUNE/FF·REW  
or  
to adjust Bass  
and Treble to the desired level. You can also use  
the TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade and  
Balance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level be-  
tween the front and rear speakers and Balance  
adjusts the sound between the right and left  
speaker.  
1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap-  
proximately 2 seconds.  
Audio main operation  
2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.  
PWR/VOL control knob  
3. Press the SEEK/TRACK button  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position, and then press the PWR/VOL control  
knob while the system is off to call up the mode  
(radio or CD) which was playing immediately  
before the system was turned off.  
or  
to adjust the hours.  
TUNE/FF·REW  
To turn the Beep sound off or on, press the  
AUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the  
4. Press  
or  
button  
to adjust the minutes.  
TUNE/FF·REW button  
or  
until the  
5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the  
clock set mode.  
desired mode is displayed. This turns on or turns  
off the beep sound when audio buttons are  
pressed.  
To turn the system off, press the PWR/VOL con-  
trol knob.  
The display will return to the regular clock display  
after 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK  
button again to return to the regular clock display.  
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to adjust the  
volume.  
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume mode to  
OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH, press the  
TUNE/FF·REW button.  
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-  
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume  
changes as the driving speed changes.  
DISP (display) button:  
Pressing the DISP (display) button will show text  
information about CD, MP3 and SAT (satellite, if  
so equipped) in the audio display.  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly  
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-  
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically  
reappear after about 10 seconds.  
AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade, SSV,  
Balance and Beeps)  
If the text information is to long to fully be dis-  
played on the screen; press and hold the DISP  
button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll  
through the rest of the text.  
Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as  
follows:  
Clock operation  
Bass → Treble → Fade → Spd Sen Vol → Bal-  
Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock  
with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button  
again to turn off the clock display.  
ance → Beep ON/OFF → Audio → Bass  
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance press  
the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-  
pears  
in  
the  
display.  
Press  
the  
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD display mode  
●
●
●
Album title displays the title of the album of  
the song playing.  
FM/AM/SAT radio operation  
To change the text displayed while playing a CD  
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button  
will allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:  
Track number and Track time ←→ Album title  
←→ Song title.  
FM/AM/SAT band select:  
Artist name displays the name of the artist of  
the song playing.  
Pressing the RADIO button will change the band  
as follows:  
Song title displays the title of the song playing.  
AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT (satellite, if so equipped)  
When the RADIO button is pressed while the  
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the  
radio will come on at the station last played.  
Satellite radio display mode (if so  
equipped)  
●
●
●
●
Track number displays the track number se-  
lected on the disc.  
To change the text displayed when listening to  
satellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISP  
button. The DISP button will scroll through the  
broadcast information as follows: Channel num-  
ber → Category name → Channel name → Artist  
name → Song title.  
●
●
●
●
Track time displays the amount of time the  
track has played.  
No satellite radio reception is available unless  
there is an active XMா satellite radio service  
subscription. Satellite radio is not available in  
Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not  
operational then pressing the RADIO button will  
switch between FM and AM bands.  
Album title displays the title of the CD being  
played.  
Song title displays the title of the selected  
CD track.  
Channel number displays the channel num-  
ber of the selected satellite radio station.  
MP3 display mode  
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO  
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-  
matically be turned off and the last radio station  
played will come on.  
Category name displays the category name  
of the selected satellite radio station.  
To change the text displayed when listening to a  
CD with MP3s and ID3 tags, press the DISP  
button. The DISP button will scroll through the  
CD text as follows: Track number and Track time  
←→ Folder title ←→ Album title ←→ Artist name  
←→ Song title.  
Channel name displays the channel name  
the selected satellite radio station.  
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM  
stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast  
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change  
from stereo to monaural reception.  
Artist name displays the name of the artist,  
host or weather condition of the selected  
satellite radio station.  
●
●
●
Track time displays the amount of time the  
current track has been playing.  
●
Song title displays the song title, show  
name, or temperature of the selected satel-  
lite radio station.  
Track number displays the number of the  
track playing on the selected disc.  
Folder title displays the title of the folder.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TUNE/FF·REW (tuning)  
button:  
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of  
presets are active.  
●
Music or programming type such as “Clas-  
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.  
2. Tune to the desired station using manual  
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of  
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)  
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes  
when the select button is pressed.)  
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the  
RDS icon is displayed.  
Press the TUNE/FF·REW button  
or  
for manual tuning. To move quickly through the  
channels, hold the tuning buttons down.  
Compact disc (CD) changer operation  
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON  
position and insert the compact disc into the slot  
with the label side facing up. The compact disc  
will be guided automatically into the slot and start  
playing. To insert the disc, first press the  
button.  
SEEK (tuning) button:  
3. The channel indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Programming is now  
complete.  
Press the SEEK/TRACK button  
to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-  
cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.  
or  
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-  
ner.  
SCAN (tuning) button:  
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-  
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.  
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the  
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to  
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-  
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-  
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN  
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button  
again during this 5 second period stops scan  
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
If the system has been turned off while the com-  
pact disc was playing, pressing the PWR button  
will start the compact disc.  
Radio data system (RDS):  
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discs  
in the CD changer.  
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data  
information service transmitted by some radio  
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-  
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but  
many stations are now considering broadcasting  
RDS data.  
CD load button:  
Station memory operations:  
To insert a CD in the CD changer, press  
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to  
the A, B and C preset button in any combination  
of AM or FM stations.  
the  
load button for less than 1.5 seconds.  
Select the loading slot by pressing the CD insert  
select button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.  
RDS can display:  
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.  
Station name, such as “The Groove”.  
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change  
between storage banks. The radio displays  
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press  
the  
load button for more than 1.5 seconds.  
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the  
display when CDs are loaded into the changer.  
Random Disc: The tracks on the current selected  
disc will be played randomly.  
SEEK/TRACK button:  
Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing will  
be repeated.  
Repeat Track: The current track will be repeated.  
When  
is pressed while the compact disc  
CD button:  
is playing, the track following the present one  
starts to play from the beginning. Press  
several times to skip several tracks. Each time the  
button is pressed, the CD advances 1 additional  
track. The track number appears in the display  
window. (When the last track on the compact  
disc is skipped, the first track is played.)  
When the CD button is pressed with the system  
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will  
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.  
*This mode is only available when multiple CDs  
are loaded into the CD changer.  
When the CD button is pressed with the com-  
pact disc loaded but the radio playing, the radio  
will automatically be turned off and the compact  
disc will start to play.  
MP3 RDM/RPT button:  
When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while an  
MP3 compact disc is being played, the play  
pattern can be changed as follows:  
When  
is pressed, the track being played  
several  
TUNE/FF·REW (fast for-  
ward, rewind) button:  
returns to the beginning. Press  
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the  
button is pressed, the CD moves back 1 track.  
Random All Discs* → Random Disc → Repeat  
Disc → Random Folder → Repeat Folder →  
Repeat Track → normal → Random All Discs  
Random All Discs: The loaded discs will be  
played randomly, not in sequence of how they are  
loaded.  
Random Disc: The tracks on the current selected  
disc will be played randomly.  
Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing will  
be repeated.  
When the TUNE/FF·REW  
or  
button  
CD select buttons:  
is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the  
compact disc plays at an increased speed while  
fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is  
released, the CD returns to normal play speed.  
To play another CD that has been loaded, press a  
CD select button (1 – 6).  
RDM/RPT button:  
MP3 TUNE/FF·REW  
button:  
When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while a  
compact disc is being played, the play pattern  
can be changed as follows:  
Random Folder: The folders on the current MP3  
disc will be played randomly.  
Repeat Folder: The current folder being played  
will be repeated.  
While  
playing  
an  
MP3,  
press  
the  
Random All Discs* → Random Disc → Repeat  
Disc → Repeat Track → normal → Random All  
Discs  
TUNE/FF·REW  
forward or backward through available folders.  
or  
button to scan  
Repeat Track: The current track will be repeated.  
To fast forward or rewind through an MP3 audio  
Random All Discs: The loaded discs will be  
played randomly, not in sequence of how they are  
loaded.  
track, press the TUNE/FF·REW  
button for more than 1.5 seconds.  
or  
*This mode is only available when multiple CDs  
are loaded into the CD changer.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCAN button:  
All Discs, 1 Track, 1 Folder  
All discs:  
1 Disc, All Tracks  
While listening to an MP3 CD with other CDs  
loaded into the CD changer, press and hold the  
SCAN button for approximately 2 seconds, to  
preview the first 10 seconds of the first track in  
the first folder on the MP3 CDs loaded. Pressing  
the SCAN button again during this 10 second  
period stops the scan and the current loaded CD  
will remain playing.  
●
Press and hold the  
button for more  
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be  
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed  
within 15 seconds, or the button is pressed  
again during the eject sequence, the entire  
disc eject sequence will be canceled. When  
this button is pressed while the compact  
disc is being played, the compact disc will  
eject and the last source will be played.  
While listening to a CD, press the SCAN button  
to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on  
the CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button again  
during this 10 second period stops the scan and  
the CD remains on that track.  
All Discs, 1 Track  
CD Eject:  
While listening to a CD with other CDs loaded  
into the CD changer, press and hold the SCAN  
button for approximately 2 seconds, to preview  
the first 10 seconds of the first track on the CDs  
loaded. Pressing the SCAN button again during  
this 10 second period stops the scan and the  
current loaded CD will remain playing.  
CD IN indicator:  
Current/Selected disc:  
A CD icon indicator appears on the display when  
a CD is loaded with the system on.  
●
Press the  
button, then press the slot  
number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The  
compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num-  
ber (1 – 6) is pressed the current loaded  
disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected disc  
is not removed within 15 seconds, the disc  
will reload.  
AUX (Auxiliary) button:  
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The  
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard  
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-  
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-  
puters.  
MP3 SCAN mode:  
1 Disc All Folders  
While listening to an MP3 CD, press the SCAN  
button to preview the first 10 seconds of each  
track in each folder on the MP3 CD playing.  
Pressing the SCAN button again during this 10  
second period stops the scan and the CD re-  
mains on that track and folder.  
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device  
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.  
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. RADIO* button  
2. Touch-screen keys (vary depending on  
what function is selected)  
3. SEEK/TRACK button  
4. TUNE·FOLDER and AUDIO control  
knob (BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE,  
FADE and SSV (if so equipped))  
5. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons  
6. CD insert slot  
7. CD changer select (1 - 6) buttons  
8.  
CD eject button  
9. AUX jack  
10. A·B·C button  
11. ON·OFF/VOL control knob  
12. CD/AUX button  
*No satellite radio reception is available  
unless there is an active XMா satellite  
radio service subscription. Satellite ra-  
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii  
and Guam. If satellite radio is not opera-  
tional then pressing the RADIO button  
will switch between FM and AM bands.  
LHA0730  
Type B  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To turn the system off, press the ON·OFF/VOL  
control knob.  
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH  
COMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER (if  
so equipped)  
Turn the ON·OFF/VOL control knob to adjust the  
volume.  
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-  
tion precautions” earlier in this section.  
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-  
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volume  
changes as the driving speed changes.  
No satellite radio reception is available unless  
there is an active XMா satellite radio service  
subscription. Satellite radio is not available in  
Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not  
operational then pressing the RADIO button will  
switch between FM and AM bands.  
AUDIO knob (Bass, Treble, Balance, Fade,  
and SSV):  
Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode as  
follows:  
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade → Audio →  
Reference symbols:  
LHA0747  
Bass  
RADIO button — This is a button on the radio. By  
pressing this button you can select the item or  
perform this action.  
To change the SSV mode from 0 to 5, press the  
SETUP button. Then touch the “Audio” key, the  
audio settings screen will be displayed. Touch  
the “–” or “+” key to change the SSV.  
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fade press  
the AUDIO knob until the desired mode appears  
in the display. Turn the Tuning knob to adjust  
Bass and Treble to the desired level. You can also  
use the Tuning knob to adjust Fade and Balance  
modes. Fade adjusts the sound level between the  
front and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the  
sound between the right and left speakers.  
“Display” key — This is a select key on the touch-  
screen. By touching this key you can proceed to  
the next function.  
While in this screen you can also adjust the other  
audio settings by touching the corresponding  
key.  
Audio main operation  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, touch the “Back” key repeatedly  
until the radio or the CD display reappears.  
ON·OFF/VOL control:  
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the  
desired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedly  
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-  
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically  
reappear after about 10 seconds.  
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON  
position, then press the ON·OFF/VOL control  
knob while the audio system is off to call up the  
mode (radio or CD) which was playing immedi-  
ately before the system was turned off.  
Clock set  
For setting the clock, see “Adjusting the time”  
earlier in this section.  
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
Track time displays the amount of time the  
current track has been playing.  
FM/AM/SAT radio operation  
FM/AM/SAT band select:  
●
●
●
Title displays the name of the song playing.  
Artist displays the name of the artist.  
Album displays the name of the album.  
Pressing the RADIO button will change the band  
as follows:  
AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT  
When the RADIO button is pressed with the  
ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, the  
radio will come on at the station last played.  
Satellite radio display  
Some satellite stations might broadcast informa-  
tion that shows up in the display.  
Depending on what the station decides to broad-  
cast the following text might be displayed:  
No satellite radio reception is available unless  
there is an active XMா satellite radio service  
subscription. Satellite radio is not available in  
Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. If satellite radio is not  
operational then pressing the RADIO button will  
switch between FM and AM bands.  
●
●
●
●
Channel number displays the channel num-  
ber of the selected satellite radio station.  
LHA1009  
CD display mode  
Category name displays the category name  
of the selected satellite radio station.  
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD  
certain text might be displayed (when CD en-  
coded with text is being used).  
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO  
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-  
matically be turned off and the last radio station  
played will come on.  
Channel name displays the channel name of  
the selected satellite radio station.  
Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is  
encoded the following text might be displayed  
during CD playback:  
Artist name displays the name of the artist,  
host or weather condition of the selected  
satellite radio station.  
The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM  
stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast  
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change  
from stereo to monaural reception.  
●
●
Disc number displays which disc is playing  
●
Song title displays the song title, show  
name, or temperature of the selected satel-  
lite radio station.  
Folder number displays the folder number on  
the CD that is being played.  
TUNE·FOLDER (tuning) knob:  
●
Track number displays the number of the  
track that is being played.  
To manually tune the radio, turn the  
TUNE·FOLDER tuning knob to the right or left.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(1 – 6) buttons until a beep sound is heard  
(the station will now appear in one of the 1 –  
6 keys on the screen)  
Compact disc (CD) changer operation  
SEEK/TRACK (tuning)  
button:  
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-  
tion, press one of the CD changer (1 – 6) but-  
tons. Once the CD slot has open insert the  
compact disc into the slot with the label side  
facing up. The compact disc will be guided auto-  
matically into the slot and start playing.  
4. The channel indicator will then come on and  
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now  
complete.  
Press the SEEK/TRACK button  
or  
for less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low  
or low to high frequencies and stop at the next  
broadcasting station.  
5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-  
ner.  
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-  
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.  
“Scan” (tuning) key:  
Touch the “Scan” key. SCAN illuminates in the  
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to  
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-  
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-  
cient signal strength. Touching the “Scan” key  
again during this 5 second period stops scan  
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.  
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse  
blows, the radio memory will be canceled. In that  
case, reset the desired stations.  
If the system has been turned off while the com-  
pact disc was playing, pressing the  
ON·OFF/VOL control knob will start the compact  
disc.  
Radio data system (RDS):  
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data  
information service transmitted by some radio  
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-  
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but  
many stations are now considering broadcasting  
RDS data.  
Loading buttons:  
1 Disc Load:  
Station memory operations:  
●
●
●
Press one of the CD changer (1 – 6) select  
buttons for less than 1.5 seconds, then in-  
sert the CD.  
18 stations can be set for the FM, AM or SAT  
(Satellite if so equipped) radio to the A, B and C  
preset button in any combination of FM, AM or  
SAT stations.  
While in CD mode press one of the station  
and CD select (1 – 6) buttons on the radio,  
then insert the CD.  
RDS can display:  
1. Press the A·B·C button or the “Preset”key to  
select preset channel A, B or C.  
●
●
●
Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.  
Station name, such as “The Groove”.  
While in CD mode press one of the CD (1 –  
6) keys on the screen, then insert the CD.  
2. Press the RADIO button to select the de-  
sired FM, AM or SAT station band.  
Music or programming type such as “Clas-  
sical”, “Country” or “Rock”.  
All Disc Load:  
3. Tune to the desired station using manual  
tuning, seek tuning or scan tuning. Press  
and hold any of the desired station memory  
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the  
RDS icon is displayed.  
●
Press and hold one of the CD changer (1 –  
6) buttons for more than 1.5 seconds.  
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the  
display when CDs are loaded into the changer.  
the file select keys; the system will start playing  
that track in the selected folder.  
list screen displays. Touch one of the track or file  
select keys, the system will start playing that track  
or file.  
When one of the CD changer (1 – 6) buttons is  
pressed with the compact disc loaded but the  
radio playing, the radio will automatically be  
turned off and the compact disc will start to play.  
SEEK/TRACK button:  
CD select buttons:  
When the SEEK/TRACK  
button is  
To play another CD that has been loaded:  
pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while a com-  
pact disc is playing, the track being played re-  
turns to its beginning. Press several times to skip  
back through tracks. The compact disc will go  
back the number of times the button is pressed.  
●
●
●
Touch one of the CD select (1–6) keys on  
the touch-screen or  
DISC button:  
When the DISC button is pressed with the sys-  
tem off and a compact disc loaded, the system  
will turn on and the compact disc will start to play.  
Press one of the station and CD select (1 –  
6) buttons on the radio or  
Press one of the CD changer (1 – 6) select  
buttons.  
When the SEEK/TRACK  
button is  
When the DISC button is pressed with a com-  
pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio  
will automatically be turned off and the compact  
disc will start to play.  
pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while the  
compact disc is playing, the next track will start to  
play from its beginning. Press several times to  
skip through tracks. The compact disc will ad-  
vance the number of times the button is pressed.  
(When the last track on the compact disc is  
skipped through, the first track will be played.)  
“Scan” key:  
While listening to a CD, touch the “Scan” key to  
preview the first 10 seconds of each track on the  
current CD playing. Touching the “Scan” key  
during this 10 second period stops the scan and  
the CD remains on that track.  
TUNE·FOLDER knob:  
While playing an MP3 CD to skip through folders  
turn the TUNE·FOLDER knob right or left to skip  
forward or backward through the available fold-  
ers.  
When pressing the SEEK/TRACK  
(fast  
“Repeat” key:  
forward) or (rewind) button for more than  
When the “Repeat” key is touched while a com-  
pact disc is played, the play pattern can be  
changed as follows:  
1.5 seconds, the CD being played will fast for-  
ward or rewind. When the button is released, the  
CD will return to normal play speed.  
This function will only operate on an MP3 CD with  
multiple folders.  
“Folder” key:  
CD:  
“Track” key:  
While playing an MP3 CD you can select a track  
inside a folder. Touch the “Folder” key; a list  
screen displays. Touch one of the folder select  
keys; another list screen displays. Touch one of  
1 DISC RPT → 1 TRACK RPT  
While playing a CD or an MP3 CD you can select  
a track or file on the disc. Touch the “Track” key, a  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MP3 CD:  
CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:  
CD EJECT:  
The AUX jack is located above the CD changer.  
The AUX audio input jack accepts any standard  
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-  
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop  
computer.  
1 DISC RPT → 1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRACK  
RPT  
Current/Selected disc:  
1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing will  
be repeated.  
1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playing  
will be repeated  
1 FOLDER RPT: The folder that is currently play-  
ing will be repeated.  
●
Press the  
button. The loaded com-  
pact disc will be ejected. Also, if the ejected  
disc is not removed within 15 seconds, the  
disc will reload.  
Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatible  
device when it is plugged into the AUX jack.  
All discs:  
●
Press and hold the  
button for more  
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be  
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed  
“Random” key:  
When the “Random” key is touched while a com-  
pact disc is played, the play pattern can be  
changed as follows:  
within 15 seconds, or the  
button is  
pressed again during the eject sequence,  
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-  
celed.  
CD:  
ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM  
MP3 CD:  
When this button is pressed while the compact  
disc is being played, the compact disc will eject  
and the next compact disc will be loaded. If no  
disc is loaded, the system will stay on the com-  
pact disc screen.  
ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER  
RDM  
ALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will be  
played randomly.  
CD IN indicator:  
1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-  
rently playing will be played randomly.  
1 FOLDER RDM: Folders from that disc that is  
currently playing will be played randomly.  
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs  
have been loaded into the changer in CD mode  
only.  
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
A new disc may be rough on the inner and  
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by  
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the  
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.  
LHA0752  
LHA0049  
Type A  
CD CARE AND CLEANING  
1. Source select and Power on switch  
2. Tuning switch  
3. Volume control switch  
●
●
●
Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the  
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.  
Always place the discs in the storage case  
when they are not being used.  
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the  
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft  
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular  
motion.  
●
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or  
alcohol intended for industrial use.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SOURCE select switch:  
Push the SOURCE select switch to change the  
mode in the following sequence: PRESET A →  
PRESET B → PRESET C → CD* → AUX** →  
PRESET A.  
*This mode is only available when a CD is loaded.  
**This mode is only available when a compatible  
auxiliary device is plugged into the AUX jack.  
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,  
B or C), use the tuning switch  
or  
to  
select one of the preset radio stations (1 – 6).  
LHA0753  
LHA0754  
Volume control switch  
Type B  
Type C  
1. Source select and Power on switch  
2. Tuning switch  
1. Source select and Power on switch  
2. Tuning switch  
Push the volume control switch to increase or  
decrease the volume.  
3. Volume control switch  
3. Volume control switch  
Tuning  
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR  
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)  
Memory change (radio):  
POWER on switch  
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,  
B or C), push the tuning switch  
for less than 1.5 seconds to change to the next  
preset station in memory.  
or  
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-  
tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio  
system on.  
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO  
Seek tuning (radio):  
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in  
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following  
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may  
adversely affect the engine control system and  
other electronic parts.  
CAUTION  
Push the tuning switch  
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous  
radio station.  
or  
for more  
● Do not place metalized film near the  
rear window glass or attach any metal  
parts to it. This may cause poor recep-  
tion or noise.  
Next/Previous track (CD):  
WARNING  
● When cleaning the inside of the rear  
window, be careful not to scratch or  
damage the rear window antenna.  
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a  
dampened soft cloth.  
Push the tuning switch  
or  
for less  
● A cellular telephone should not be used  
while driving so full attention may be  
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-  
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-  
phones while driving.  
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the  
present track or skip to the next track. Push  
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.  
Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):  
● If you must make a call while your ve-  
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-  
lar phone operational mode (if so  
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-  
ercise extreme caution at all times so  
full attention may be given to vehicle  
operation.  
Push the tuning switch  
than 1.5 seconds to change the playing disc up  
or down.  
or  
for more  
ANTENNA  
Window antenna  
● If you are unable to devote full attention  
to vehicle operation while talking on  
the phone, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear  
window.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE  
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-  
sible from the electronic control  
modules.  
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle  
in a safe location. If you have to use a  
phone while driving, exercise extreme  
caution at all times so full attention may  
be given to vehicle operation.  
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in  
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-  
trol system harnesses. Do not route the  
antenna wire next to any harness.  
● If you are unable to devote full attention  
to vehicle operation while talking on  
the phone, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio  
as recommended by the manufacturer.  
● Connect the ground wire from the CB  
radio chassis to the body.  
CAUTION  
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,  
use a phone after starting the engine.  
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.  
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
module when the ignition switch is placed in the  
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned  
on and carried in the vehicle.  
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா  
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.  
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone  
at a time.  
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System, refer to the following notes.  
●
Set up the wireless connection between a  
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle  
phone module before using the hands-free  
phone system.  
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones  
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle  
phone  
module.  
Please  
visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-  
mended phone list and pairing.  
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free  
phone under the following conditions:  
WHA1042  
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-  
vice area.  
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with  
your cellular phone in the vehicle.  
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-  
patible Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you  
can set up the wireless connection between your  
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.  
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can  
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is  
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such  
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking  
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-  
tainous area.  
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-  
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-  
ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-  
matically connected with the in-vehicle phone  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it  
from being dialed.  
●
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual  
regarding the telephone charges, cellular  
phone antenna and body, etc.  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed to  
Visteon.  
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal  
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be  
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-  
ing a call.  
REGULATORY INFORMATION  
FCC Regulatory information  
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with  
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the  
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,  
modification, or attachments could damage  
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-  
tions.  
Do not place the cellular phone in an area  
surrounded by metal or far away from the  
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone  
quality degradation and wireless connection  
disruption.  
USING THE SYSTEM  
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows  
hands-free operation of the Bluetoothா Phone  
System.  
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may  
not be available so full attention may be given to  
vehicle operation.  
●
While a cellular phone is connected through  
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-  
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-  
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge  
cellular phones.  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions:  
1. This device may not cause interference and  
Initialization  
2. this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause un-  
desired operation of the device.  
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON  
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,  
which takes a few seconds. If the  
pressed before the initialization completes, the  
system will announce “Hands-free phone system  
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.  
●
●
If the hands-free phone system seems to be  
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”  
later in this section. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-  
shooting help.  
button is  
IC Regulatory information  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-  
ence, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to  
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-  
ing the device in a different location may  
reduce or eliminate the noise.  
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-  
quirements of the Canadian Interference-  
Causing Equipment Regulations.  
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
●
If a command is not recognized, the system  
announces, “Command not recognized.  
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a  
clear voice.  
●
To speed the operation you can say multiple  
commands. For example, press the  
button then say “Phonebook, New entry”  
rather than “Phonebook.” Wait for the voice  
feedback prompt then say “New entry”.  
Operating tips  
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN  
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:  
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as  
possible. Close the windows to eliminate  
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration  
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system  
from recognizing voice commands correctly.  
If you want to go back to the previous com-  
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-  
tion” any time the system is waiting for a  
response.  
How to say numbers  
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain  
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer  
to the following rules and examples.  
You can cancel a command when the sys-  
tem is waiting for a response by saying,  
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces  
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can  
●
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a  
command. Otherwise, the command will not  
be received properly.  
●
Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
●
●
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds  
after the tone sounds.  
also press the  
button on the steering  
–
“One eight oh oh six six two six two oh  
oh”, or  
wheel at any time. Whenever the VR session  
is cancelled, a double beep sounds to indi-  
cate you have exited the system.  
Speak in a natural voice without pausing  
between words.  
–
“One eight zero zero six six two six two oh  
oh”  
●
●
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice  
feedback, press the volume control switches  
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being  
provided with feedback. You can also use  
the radio volume control knob.  
Giving voice commands  
●
Words can be used for the first 4 digits  
places only.  
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press  
and release the  
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a  
command.  
button located on the  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh  
oh”,  
In most cases you can interrupt the voice  
feedback to speak the next command by  
The command given is picked up by the micro-  
phone, and voice feedback is given when the  
command is accepted.  
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty  
two hundred, and  
pressing the  
wheel.  
button on the steering  
●
If you need to hear the available commands  
for the current menu again, say “Help” and  
the system will repeat them.  
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two  
hundred.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
Numbers can be spoken in small groups.  
The system will prompt you to continue en-  
tering digits, if desired.  
See “List of voice commands” and “Interna-  
tional” later in this section for more informa-  
tion.  
Example: 1-555-1212 *123  
Example: 1-800-662-6200  
– “One eight zero zero”  
– “One five five five one two one two star  
one two three”  
The system repeats the numbers and  
prompts you to enter more.  
NOTE:  
– “six six two”  
For best results, say phone numbers as  
single digits.  
The system repeats the numbers and  
prompts you to enter more.  
The voice command “Help” is available at any  
time. Please use the “Help” command to get  
information on how to use the system.  
– “six two zero zero”  
LHA0757  
●
Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-  
able when using the “Call International”  
command and the “Send” command during  
a call).  
CONTROL BUTTONS  
The control buttons for the Bluetoothா Hands-  
Free Phone System are located on the steering  
wheel.  
●
●
●
Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using  
the “Call International” command).  
PHONE/SEND  
Press the  
button to initiate a VR  
Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available  
only when storing a phone book number).  
session or answer an incoming call.  
You can say “star” for “*” and “pound” for “#”  
at any time in any position of the phone  
number (available only when using “Call In-  
ternational” command).  
You can also use the  
button to  
skip through system feedback and to  
enter commands during a call. See “List  
of voice commands” and “During a call”  
later in this section for more information.  
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For information on speaker adaptation, see  
“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in this  
section.  
Pairing procedure  
PHONE/END  
Press the  
NOTE:  
button to cancel a VR  
4. The system announces the current language  
and gives you the option to change the lan-  
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in  
French). Use the following chart to select  
the language.  
session or end a call.  
The pairing procedure must be performed  
when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle  
starts moving during the procedure, the  
procedure will be cancelled.  
GETTING STARTED  
The following procedures will help you get  
started using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-  
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice  
commands” later in this section.  
Main Menu  
NOTE:  
A
“Setup”  
᭺
B
“Pair phone”  
᭺
You must press the  
the button within  
button or  
seconds to  
C
“New phone”  
Choosing a language  
5
᭺
change the language.  
D
Initiate from handset  
᭺
You can interact with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free  
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.  
E
Name phone  
᭺
Press  
(PHONE/SEND)  
Press  
(PHONE/END)  
to select  
Current  
language  
F
Assign priority  
᭺
To change the language, perform the following.  
to select  
Spanish  
English  
English  
G
Choose ringtone  
᭺
1. Press and hold the  
than 5 seconds.  
button for more  
English  
Spanish  
French  
French  
French  
Spanish  
1. Press the  
button on the steering  
wheel. The system announces the available  
commands.  
2. The system announces: “Press the  
PHONE/SEND button for the  
(
)
5. If you decide not to change the language, do  
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the  
VR session will end, and the language will  
not be changed.  
A
hands-free phone system to enter the  
speaker adaptation mode or press the  
2. Say: “Setup” . The system acknowledges  
᭺
the command and announces the next set of  
available commands.  
PHONE/END (  
) button to select a dif-  
ferent language.”  
B
3. Say: “Pair phone” . The system acknowl-  
᭺
edges the command and announces the  
next set of available commands.  
3. Press the  
button.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
4. Say: “New phone” . The system acknowl-  
refer to “Setup” later in this section for more  
information on changing priorities.  
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-  
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five  
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two  
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five  
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than  
10 digits or any special characters, say “In-  
ternational”. See “How to say numbers” ear-  
lier in this section, for more information.  
᭺
edges the command and asks you to initiate  
pairing from the phone handset  
D
.
᭺
7. The system will ask if you would like to select  
G
The pairing procedure of the cellular phone  
varies according to each cellular phone  
model. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-  
tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-  
lular phones.  
a custom ring tone  
. Follow the instruc-  
᭺
tions provided by the system or refer to  
“Setup” later in this section for more infor-  
mation on selecting ringtones.  
4. When you have finished speaking the phone  
number, the system repeats it back and an-  
nounces the available commands.  
Making a call by entering a phone  
number  
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter  
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code  
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and  
cannot be changed.  
Main Menu  
C
5. Say: “Dial”  
. The system acknowledges  
᭺
A
“Call”  
᭺
the command and makes the call.  
B
Number (speak digits)  
᭺
For additional command options, see “List of  
voice commands” later in this section.  
C
“Dial”  
5. The system asks you to say a name for the  
᭺
E
phone  
.
᭺
Receiving a call  
1. Press the  
button on steering wheel. A  
If the name is too long or too short, the  
system tells you, then prompts you for a  
name again.  
tone will sound.  
When you hear the ring tone, press the  
button on the steering wheel.  
A
2. Say: “Call”  
. The system acknowledges  
᭺
the command and announces the next set of  
available commands.  
Once the call has ended, press the  
on the steering wheel.  
button  
Also, if more than one phone is paired and  
the name sounds too much like a name  
already used, the system tells you, then  
prompts you for a name again.  
Say: “Call International” to dial more than 10  
digits or any special characters.  
NOTE:  
If you do not wish to take the call when you  
6. The system asks you to assign a priority level  
3. Say the number you wish to call starting with  
F
B
the area code in single digit format . If the  
᭺
hear the ring tone, press the  
on the steering wheel.  
button  
. The priority level determines which  
᭺
phone is active when more than one paired  
Bluetoothா phone is in the vehicle. Follow  
the instructions provided by the system or  
system has trouble recognizing the correct  
phone number, try entering the number in  
the following groups: 3-digit area code,  
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For additional command options, see “List of  
voice commands” later in this section.  
If you want to go back to the previous command,  
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time  
the system is waiting for a response.  
See “Phone book” later in this section to learn  
how to store entries.  
When prompted by the system, say the name of  
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system  
acknowledges the name.  
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS  
When you get used to the menus in the system,  
you can talk ahead by saying more than one  
command at a time. For example, say, “Call five  
five five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”  
Main Menu  
“Call” or “Call International”  
“Phone Book”  
“Memo Pad”  
If there are multiple locations associated with the  
name, the system asks you to choose the loca-  
tion.  
Also, when you get used to the system re-  
sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone by  
“Setup”  
Once you have confirmed the name and location,  
the system begins the call.  
pressing the  
button on the steering wheel.  
When you press and release the  
button on  
However, if you press the  
button when the  
B
Number (speak digits)  
᭺
the steering wheel, you can choose from the  
commands on the Main Menu. The following  
pages describe these commands and the com-  
mands in each sub-menu.  
system is waiting for a response from you it will  
end the VR session.  
When prompted by the system, say the number  
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”  
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”  
earlier in this section for more details.  
“Call”  
Main Menu  
Remember to wait for the tone before  
speaking.  
“Call” or “Call International”  
C
“Redial”  
᭺
A
Name (speak name)  
᭺
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands  
currently available any time the system is waiting  
for a response.  
Use the Redial command to call the last number  
that was dialed within the vehicle.  
B
Number (speak digits)  
᭺
C
“Redial”  
᭺
NOTE:  
If you want to end an action without completing it,  
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the  
system is waiting for a response. The system will  
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is  
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate  
you have exited the system.  
D
“Call Back”  
᭺
The system will not redial the last number  
dialed by the handset keypad.  
A
Name (speak name)  
᭺
If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, you  
can dial a number associated with a name and  
location.  
The system acknowledges the command, re-  
peats the number and begins dialing.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If a redial number does not exist, the system  
announces, “There is no number to redial” and  
ends the VR session.  
●
●
“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces  
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns  
to the call.  
NOTE:  
If a call is ended or the cellular phone  
network connection is lost while the Mute  
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset  
to “off” for the next call so the other party  
can hear your voice.  
D
“Call back”  
᭺
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of  
the last incoming call within the vehicle.  
“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send  
command to enter numbers, “*”or “#”during  
a call. For example, if you were directed to  
dial an extension by an automated system:  
“Phone book”  
The system acknowledges the command, re-  
peats the number and begins dialing.  
Say: “Send one two three four.”  
NOTE:  
The system acknowledges the command  
and sends the tones associated with the  
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-  
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,  
Say “pound” for “#”.  
If a call back number does not exist, the system  
announces, “There is no number to call back”and  
ends the VR session.  
Phone book commands are not available  
when the vehicle is moving.  
International  
Main Menu  
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special  
characters, please say “international”. When the  
system acknowledges the command, the system  
will prompt you to speak the number.  
“Phone Book”  
●
“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-  
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular  
phone when privacy is desired.  
A
“New Entry”  
᭺
B
“Edit”  
᭺
C
“Delete”  
᭺
During a call  
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call  
transferred to privacy mode.” The system  
then ends the VR session.  
D
“List Names”  
᭺
During a call there are several command options  
available. Press the  
button on the steering  
The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for each  
phone paired with the system. Each name can  
have up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-  
ated with it.  
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-  
mands.  
You can also issue the Transfer Call com-  
mand again to return to a hands-free call  
through the vehicle.  
●
“Help” — The system announces the avail-  
able commands.  
●
“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute  
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.  
Use the mute command again to unmute  
your voice.  
●
“Go back/Correction” — The system an-  
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session  
and returns to the call.  
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
NOTE:  
Enter a phone number by voice command:  
“Edit”  
᭺
Each phone has its own separate phone  
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone  
book if you are currently connected with  
Phone B.  
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”  
See “How to say numbers” earlier in this section  
for more information.  
Use the Edit command to alter an existing phone  
book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phone  
number to an existing entry.  
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory:  
When prompted by the system, say the name of  
the entry you wish to edit.  
A
“New entry”  
᭺
Use the New Entry command to store a new  
name in the system.  
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges  
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer  
from the phone handset. The new contact phone  
number will be transferred from the cellular  
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.  
The system acknowledges the name and asks  
you for the location you would like to edit.  
When prompted by the system, say the name you  
would like to give the new entry.  
Say the name of the location.  
The system acknowledges the location.  
For example, say: “Mary.”  
If the name is too long or too short, the system  
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.  
The transfer procedure varies according to each  
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions  
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN  
recommended cellular phones.  
The system will ask you to say a phone number or  
to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory.  
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name  
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts  
you for a name again.  
Enter a phone number by voice command:  
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.  
”See “How to say numbers”earlier in this section  
for more information.  
Once the system accepts the name and you  
confirm it is correct, the system asks for a location  
(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).  
The system repeats the number and prompts you  
for the next command. When you have finished  
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose  
“Store.”  
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory:  
For example, say: “Home.”  
The system acknowledges the location.  
The system confirms the name, location and  
number. The system then asks if you would like to  
store another location for the same name. If you  
do not wish to store another location, the system  
ends the VR session.  
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges  
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer  
from the phone handset. The new contact phone  
number will be transferred from the cellular  
phone via the Bluetoothா communication link.  
The system will ask you to say a phone number or  
to transfer a phone number stored in the cellular  
phone’s memory.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
The transfer procedure varies according to each  
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s  
Manual for details. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions  
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN  
recommended cellular phones.  
If a redial number or a call back number exists, the  
system deletes them without asking for confirma-  
tion.  
“Record”  
᭺
The system announces “Recording” and a tone  
sounds, signaling you to begin.  
If there is no number for the entry you are trying to  
delete, the system says so and ends the VR  
session.  
Speak the information you wish to record clearly.  
When you are done, press the  
button on the steering wheel.  
or  
The system repeats the number and prompts you  
for the next command. When you have finished  
entering numbers, choose “Store.”  
D
“List names”  
᭺
Use the List Names command to hear all the  
names and locations in the phone book.  
A tone sounds and the system announces  
“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to end  
the VR session.  
The system confirms the name, location and  
number, then announces that the entry has been  
stored. The system then ends the VR session.  
The system recites the phone book entries but  
does not include the actual phone numbers.  
When the playback of the list is complete, the  
system goes back to the main menu.  
If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wish  
to record over the oldest memo.  
C
“Delete”  
᭺
B
“Play”  
᭺
Use the Delete command to erase one entry from  
the phone book, all entries from the phone book,  
the current redial number or the current call back  
number.  
The system plays back all the memos in the order  
of newest to oldest. The system ends the VR  
session.  
You can stop the playback of the list at any time  
by pressing the  
button on the steering  
wheel. The system ends the VR session.  
If there are no memos recorded, the system an-  
nounces “No messages to play.” The system  
ends the VR session.  
“Memo pad”  
To delete entries from the phone book, say a  
name or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-  
tem.  
Main Menu  
C
“Delete”  
᭺
The Delete command erases all memos. The  
system asks you to confirm this action before  
deleting all memos.  
“Memo Pad”  
The system acknowledges the command and  
asks you to confirm the deletion.  
A
“Record”  
᭺
B
“Play”  
᭺
C
“Delete”  
᭺
To delete the current redial number or call back  
number, say “redial number” or “call back num-  
ber” when prompted by the system.  
The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6 voice  
memos, each up to 20 seconds long.  
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair a  
sixth phone, the system announces that you must  
first delete one phone or replace an existing  
phone.  
“Select phone”  
“Setup”  
᭺
Use the Select Phone command to select a  
phone of lesser priority when two or more phones  
paired with Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys-  
tem are in the vehicle at the same time.  
Main Menu  
“Setup”  
“Pair Phone”  
A
If you try to pair a phone that has already been  
paired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-  
nounces the name the phone is already using.  
The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.  
᭺
B
“List Phone”  
᭺
The system asks you to name the phone and  
confirm the selection.  
C
“Select Phone”  
᭺
D
“Change Priority”  
Once the selection is confirmed, the selected  
phone remains active until the ignition switch is  
placed in the OFF position or you select a new  
phone.  
᭺
E
When prompted by the system, choose from the  
following commands:  
“Delete Phone”  
᭺
F
“Select Ringtone”  
᭺
●
“New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone”  
earlier in this section.  
G
“Bluetooth Off”  
᭺
D
“Change priority”  
᭺
Use the Setup command to change options as-  
sociated with the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System.  
●
“Replace phone” — The system announces  
the names of the phones already paired and  
asks which you would like to replace.  
Use the Change Priority command to change the  
priority level of the active phone.  
The priority level determines which phone is ac-  
tive when more than one paired Bluetoothா  
phone is in the vehicle.  
A
“Pair phone”  
᭺
Use the Pair Phone command to pair a compat-  
ible phone to the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System.  
Once you say the name of the phone you  
wish to replace, the pairing procedure will  
begin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier in  
this section.  
The system states the priority level of the active  
phone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).  
●
“List phone” – See the description below.  
If the new priority level is already being used for  
another phone, the two phones will swap priority  
levels.  
NOTE:  
B
“List phone”  
᭺
The pairing procedure must be performed  
when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle  
starts moving during the procedure, the  
procedure will be cancelled. Also, see  
“Pairing procedure” earlier in this section  
for additional information.  
Use the List Phone command to hear the names  
of the phones currently paired. If no phones are  
paired, the system announces, “No paired  
phones to list.” The system then ends the VR  
session.  
For example, if the current priority levels are:  
Priority Level 1 = Phone A  
Priority Level 2 = Phone B  
Priority Level 3 = Phone C  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
and you change the priority level of Phone C to  
Level 1, then:  
The system announces the name of the active  
phone and asks you to choose from the following  
commands:  
system is capable of storing a different speaker  
adaptation model for memory A and memory B.  
Priority Level 1 = Phone C  
Priority Level 2 = Phone B  
Priority Level 3 = Phone A  
If memory A is available, the system will use  
memory A to store the model. If memory A is in  
use and memory B is available, the system will  
use memory B to store the model. If both of the  
memory locations are in use, the system will ask  
the user to select which memory location should  
be overwritten.  
●
“Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtone  
and asks if you would like to select that tone.  
If you say “No”, the system plays the next  
ringtone available and continues to cycle  
through the ringtones until you select one or  
quit.  
E
“Delete phone”  
᭺
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a  
specific phone or all phones from the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System.  
●
“Silent” — The system asks you to confirm  
your wish to disable the ringtone.  
Training procedure  
The system announces the names of the phones  
already paired with the system and their priority  
level. The system then gives you the option to  
delete a specific phone, all phones or listen to the  
list again.  
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.  
G
“Bluetooth off”  
᭺
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet  
outdoor location.  
Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off the  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System.  
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-  
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-  
sion in P (Park) (AT and CVT models) or N  
(Neutral) (MT models).  
Once you choose to delete a phone or all phones,  
the system asks you to confirm this action.  
When the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone Sys-  
tem is off, you will not be able to make or receive  
calls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, you  
will not have access to the Phone Book.  
NOTE:  
3. Press and hold the  
than 5 seconds.  
button for more  
When you delete a phone, the associated  
phone book for that phone will also be  
deleted.  
You can still use the Memo Pad and access  
Setup.  
4. The system announces: “Press the  
PHONE/SEND button for the  
(
)
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE  
F
hands-free phone system to enter the  
speaker adaptation mode or press the  
“Select ringtone”  
᭺
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-  
dialect users to train the system to improve rec-  
ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of  
commands, the users can create a voice model of  
their own voice that is stored in the system. The  
Use the Select Ringtone command to select the  
tone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call is  
received.  
PHONE/END (  
) button to select a dif-  
ferent language.”  
5. Press the  
button.  
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For information on selecting a different lan-  
guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier in  
this section.  
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
nine seven pause pause three oh eight  
Cancel  
Training phrases  
During the SA mode, the system instructs the  
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system  
will prompt you for each phrase.)  
call back number  
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected  
automatically. If both memory locations are  
already in use, the system will prompt you to  
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-  
vided by the system.  
call star two zero nine five  
delete phone  
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
phone book new entry  
dial three oh four two nine  
delete call back number  
setup pair phone  
dial eight three zero five one  
Home  
7. When preparation is complete and you are  
ready to begin, press the  
button.  
four three pause two nine pause zero  
delete redial number  
phone book list names  
call eight oh five four one  
Correction  
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the  
instructions provided by the system.  
memo pad play  
eight pause nine three two pause seven  
delete all entries  
9. When training is finished, the system will tell  
you an adequate number of phrases have  
been recorded.  
call seven two four zero nine  
phone book delete entry  
memo pad record  
10. The system will ask you to say your name.  
Follow the instructions to register your name.  
setup change ring tone  
dial seven four oh one eight  
setup main menu  
11. The system will announce that speaker ad-  
aptation has been completed and the sys-  
tem is ready.  
dial star two one seven oh  
Yes  
Delete  
dial nine seven two six six  
memo pad delete  
The SA mode will stop if:  
No  
●
The  
button is pressed for more than 5  
select ring tone  
seconds in SA mode.  
call seven six three oh one  
go back  
dial eight five six nine two  
Bluetooth on  
●
●
The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.  
call five six two eight zero  
dial six six four three seven  
The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or  
LOCK position.  
setup change priority  
call three one nine oh two  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
The system should respond correctly to all voice  
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-  
countered, try the following solutions.  
Where the solutions are listed by number, try  
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until  
the problem is resolved.  
Symptom  
Solution  
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.  
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.  
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.  
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too  
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.  
System fails to interpret the command correctly.  
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.  
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-  
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.  
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by  
using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.  
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the  
phone book.  
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.  
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE PHONE  
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM  
(if so equipped)  
WARNING  
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle  
in a safe location. If you have to use a  
phone while driving, exercise extreme  
caution at all times so full attention may  
be given to vehicle operation.  
● If you are unable to devote full attention  
to vehicle operation while talking on  
the phone, pull off the road to a safe  
location and stop your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,  
use a phone after starting the engine.  
WHA1043  
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with  
your cellular phone in the vehicle.  
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have an ap-  
proved Bluetoothா enabled cellular phone, you  
can set up the wireless connection between your  
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.  
With Bluetoothா wireless technology, you can  
Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-  
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-  
ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-  
matically connected with the in-vehicle phone  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
module when the ignition switch is turned to the  
ON position with the paired cellular phone turned  
on and carried in the vehicle.  
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is  
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as  
in a tunnel, in an underground parking  
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-  
tainous area.  
●
●
If the hands-free phone system seems to be  
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”  
later in this section. You can also visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-  
shooting help.  
You can register up to 5 different Bluetoothா  
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.  
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone  
at a time.  
Some cellular phones or other devices may  
cause interference or a buzzing noise to  
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-  
ing the device in a different location may  
reduce or eliminate the noise.  
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it  
from being dialed.  
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the  
phone commands, so dialing a phone number  
using your voice is possible. For more details, see  
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” later in this  
section.  
●
●
When the radio wave condition is not ideal  
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be  
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-  
ing a call.  
●
●
Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual  
regarding the telephone charges, cellular  
phone antenna and body, etc.  
Immediately after the ignition switch is  
pushed to the ON position or the DVD-ROM  
for the navigation system is inserted into the  
player, it may be impossible to receive a call  
for a short period of time.  
Before using the Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
System, refer to the following notes.  
The signal strength display on the monitor  
will not coincide with the signal strength  
display of some cellular phones.  
●
Set up the wireless connection between a  
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone  
module before using the hands-free phone  
system.  
REGULATORY INFORMATION  
●
●
Do not place the cellular phone in an area  
surrounded by metal or far away from the  
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone  
quality degradation and wireless connection  
disruption.  
FCC Regulatory information  
●
Some Bluetoothா enabled cellular phones  
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with  
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the  
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,  
modification, or attachments could damage  
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-  
tions.  
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle  
phone  
module.  
Please  
visit  
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-  
mended phone list and pairing.  
While a cellular phone is connected through  
the Bluetoothா wireless connection, the bat-  
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-  
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge  
cellular phones.  
●
You will not be able to use a hands-free  
phone under the following conditions:  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions:  
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-  
vice area.  
1. This device may not cause interference and  
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. this device must accept any interference,  
including interference that may cause un-  
desired operation of the device.  
IC Regulatory information  
– Operation is subject to the following two con-  
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-  
ence, and (2) this device must accept any  
interference, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation of the device.  
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-  
quirements of the Canadian Interference-  
Causing Equipment Regulations.  
LHA0747  
WHA0788  
BLUETOOTH௡ is a  
trademark owned by  
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,  
U.S.A. and licensed to  
Xanavi Informatics  
Corporation.  
5. When the pairing is completed, the screen  
PAIRING PROCEDURE  
will return to the Bluetoothா setup display.  
1. Press the SETUP button, then touch the  
“Phone” key.  
2. Scroll to the bottom of the list and touch the  
“Bluetooth Setup” key.  
3. Touch the “Pair Phone” key, then touch one  
of the “None (Add New)” keys.  
VOICE COMMANDS  
You can use voice commands to operate various  
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone System features  
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For  
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition  
System” later in this section.  
4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,  
operate the Bluetoothா cellular phone to  
enter the PIN code. The pairing procedure of  
the cellular phone varies according to each  
cellular phone manufacturer. See the cellular  
phone Owner’s Manual for the details.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LHA0760  
LHA0761  
LHA1010  
PHONE DOWNLOAD  
Up to 70 phone numbers can be stored in the  
phonebook.  
1. Press the SETUP button, then touch the  
“Phone” key.  
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.  
3. Touch one of the “None (Add New)” keys  
from the name list of the phonebook.  
4. Touch the “Bluetooth” key in order to trans-  
fer a phonebook entry from your cellular  
phone to your phonebook in your car.  
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LHA0762  
LHA0763  
LHA0764  
5. Operate the cellular phone to send a per-  
son’s name and phone number from the  
memory of the cellular phone. The memory  
sending procedure from the cellular phone  
varies according to each cellular phone  
manufacturer. See the cellular phone Own-  
er’s Manual for more details.  
mation, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition  
System” later in this section.  
Downloaded Phonebook:  
Select an entry from a list of phone numbers you  
have already transferred from your phone to your  
vehicle.  
7. When the phonebook download is com-  
pleted, the screen will return to the name list  
of the phonebook.  
Outgoing Calls:  
Store the name and phone number from the  
outgoing call list.  
There are different methods to input a phone  
number. Select one of the following options in-  
stead of the “Bluetooth” key in step 4 above.  
6. If you want to add a voice tag, touch the  
“Yes” key on the Add a voice tag? screen.  
For example, if the partner’s name is David,  
speak “David” while the Store voice tag  
screen is on the display. The David voice tag  
is stored in the phonebook. Voice tag is a  
useful function for easy dialing supported by  
the voice recognition system. For more infor-  
Incoming Calls:  
Store the name and phone number from the  
incoming call list.  
Enter Data by Keypad:  
Input the name and phone number manually.  
To delete an item, touch the “Delete item” key.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b. Press and hold the phone  
the steering wheel switches.  
button on  
There are different methods to make a call. Select  
one of the following options instead of the  
“Phonebook” key in step 2 above.  
Redial:  
Dial the previously dialed number again.  
Call Logs - Outgoing Calls:  
Select the name and phone number from the  
outgoing call logs.  
Call Logs - Incoming Calls:  
Store the name and phone number from the  
outgoing call list.  
LHA0765  
LHA0766  
MAKING A CALL  
RECEIVING A CALL  
Downloaded Phonebook:  
Choose from a list of stored numbers that have  
been transferred from your phonebook to your  
vehicle.  
To make a call, follow the procedure below.  
When you hear a phone ring, the display will  
change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow  
the two procedures listed below.  
1. Press the phone button on the steer-  
ing wheel switches. The phone screen will  
appear on the display.  
Dial Keypad:  
Input the phone number manually.  
a. Touch the “Answer” key on the display.  
2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.  
b. Press the phone  
wheel switches.  
button on the steering  
3. Touch one of the downloaded person’s key  
from the list. Dialing will start.  
There are some options available when receiving  
a call. Select one of the following displayed on  
the screen.  
4. After the call is over, perform one of the  
following to finish the call.  
Answer:  
Accept an incoming call to talk.  
a. Touch the “Hang Up” key.  
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hold Call:  
Continue to hold call.  
Enter Digit :  
Brings up a keypad, enter digits when needed.  
For example, entering your PIN number for voice-  
mail.  
Reject Call:  
Reject an incoming call.  
Cancel Mute:  
This will appear after the “Mute” key is touched.  
Mute will be cancelled.  
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures  
listed below:  
a. Touch the “Reject Call” key on the display.  
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or  
quieter, press the volume control switch located  
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume  
control knob on the instrument panel while talking  
on the phone. This adjustment is also available in  
the SETUP mode.  
b. Press and hold the phone  
steering wheel switches.  
button on the  
LHA0767  
DURING A CALL  
There are some options available during a call.  
Select one of the following displayed on the  
screen if necessary:  
Hang up:  
Finish the call.  
Handset:  
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.  
Mute:  
Mute your voice to the person.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-  
book:  
Delete a single entry from the downloaded  
phonebook. Touch the corresponding letter  
key, then touch the name key you wish to  
delete. Touch the “Yes” key to delete the  
entry.  
Delete Call Logs:  
Delete all the outgoing or incoming call logs from  
the list.  
Phone Ringer Vol:  
Adjust the ring volume to be quieter “–” or louder  
“+”.  
LHA1010  
WHA0788  
Phone Incoming Vol:  
Adjust the phone incoming volume to be quieter  
“–” or louder “+”.  
●
●
Download All:  
PHONE SETTING  
Transfer phonebook entries from your cellu-  
lar phone to the vehicle’s phonebook. For  
more information, see “Phonebook down-  
load” earlier in this section.  
To set up the hands-free phone system to your  
preferred settings, press the SETUP button, then  
touch the “Phone” key on the display.  
Use Vehicle Ringtone:  
If this item is turned on, a specific ringtone that is  
different from the cellular phone’s will sound  
when receiving a call.  
Phonebook:  
Delete Downloaded Phonebook:  
Delete all of the downloaded phonebook  
entries.  
See “Phonebook download” earlier in this sec-  
tion.  
Downloaded Phonebook:  
See the following information for each item.  
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows  
hands-free operation of the systems equipped on  
this vehicle, such as the phone and navigation  
systems.  
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press  
the  
button located on the steering wheel.  
Then speak the command for the system you  
wish to activate. The command given is picked up  
by the microphone, and it is performed when it is  
properly recognized. At this time NISSAN Voice  
Recognition will provide a voice and message (in  
the center display) to inform you of the command  
results.  
LHA1011  
LHA1012  
USING THE SYSTEM  
Initialization  
●
Priority Change  
Bluetooth Setup:  
See the following information for each item.  
If multiple phones are registered to the sys-  
tem, you can change the priority of the  
phones on the shown list.  
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,  
NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized, which  
takes a few seconds. When completed, the sys-  
tem is ready to accept voice commands. If  
●
Bluetooth Hands-Free:  
If this item is turned off, the connection be-  
tween the cellular phone and the in-vehicle  
phone module will be canceled.  
●
●
Remove Paired Phone:  
Delete a registered cellular phone from the  
paired list.  
the  
button is pressed before the initializa-  
Bluetooth Info.:  
tion completes, the display will show the mes-  
sage: “Phonetic data downloaded. Please wait.”  
●
●
Paired Phone List:  
Check information about the device name,  
vehicle name, device address device PIN  
and connection status.  
Up to 5 registered cellular phones are  
shown on the list.  
Pair Phone:  
●
Edit Phone Name:  
See “Pairing Procedure” in this section.  
If you would like to change the way your  
phone’s name is displayed select this key, a  
character input screen will be displayed.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
If you want to cancel the command, press  
SYSTEM FEATURES  
the  
the  
button or press and hold  
button for 2 seconds during feed-  
NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the fol-  
lowing systems:  
back. The system will announce: “Voice in-  
put is canceled”  
●
Navigation (if so equipped) - See the sepa-  
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for  
the available voice commands and opera-  
tion.  
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice  
feedback, press the volume control buttons  
(Ϫ or +) on the steering wheel while being  
provided with the feedback.  
●
Bluetoothா Hands-Free Phone  
For additional information on the navigation sys-  
tem, see the separate Navigation System Own-  
er’s Manual.  
Operating tips  
To get the best performance out of NISSAN  
Voice Recognition, observe the following:  
How to say numbers  
LHA0768  
●
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as  
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the  
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration  
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system  
from recognizing the voice commands cor-  
rectly.  
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain  
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer  
to the following examples.  
Giving voice commands  
1. Press the  
button.  
2. The system announces: “Please say a com-  
mand”  
General rule: Either “zero”or “oh”can be used for  
“0”.  
●
Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a  
command. Otherwise, the command will not  
be received properly.  
3. After the tone sounds and the face icon of  
the display changes, speak a command. For  
additional information, see “List of voice  
commands” later in this section.  
Phone numbers:  
Speak phone numbers according to the following  
examples:  
●
●
Start speaking a command within 3.5 sec-  
onds after the tone sounds.  
●
1-800-662-6200  
4. Voice and message feedback will be pro-  
vided when the command is accepted.  
Speak in a natural voice without pausing  
between words.  
●
If the command is not recognized, the sys-  
tem announces: “Please say again.” Repeat  
the command in a clear voice.  
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
say “Dial” or “Phone dial” the system will  
respond with “Please say the first group of  
numbers”, then say:  
BLUETOOTHா HANDS-FREE  
PHONE SYSTEM VOICE  
COMMANDS  
Phone commands  
●
“[PHONE] DIAL <phone number digits> ”  
or “CALL <phone number digits> ”  
– “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh oh”,  
Dials the phone number given in the com-  
mand. Speak the phone number in one se-  
quence. The number is automatically dialed.  
Depending on the commands, some different  
phrases are available. Optional words are shown  
in brackets [ ]. A few words, identified with a slash  
/, indicate the alternate words that you can select  
when speaking the command. Data items that  
you need to enter, such as phone numbers, are  
indicated in italics with brackets < >.  
– “one eight hundred six six two six two oh  
oh”, or  
●
●
●
●
“[PHONE] REDIAL”  
Redials the phone number last dialed.  
– “one eight zero zero six six two six two oh  
oh”.  
“OUTGOING CALLS”  
Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).  
Note 1: For the best voice recognition phone  
dialing results, say phone numbers as single dig-  
its.  
How to say commands  
“INCOMING CALLS”  
Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).  
Example: “[PHONE] DIAL/CALL <phone num-  
ber digits> ” stands for the following possible  
commands.  
Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “five five  
five six thousand”.  
“PHONE SELECT <phone priority number  
1 to 5> ” or “SELECT/CHOOSE PHONE  
<phone priority number 1 to 5> ”  
DIAL <1 to 32 phone number digits>  
CALL <1 to 32 phone number digits>  
PHONE DIAL <1 to 32 phone number digits>  
Personal vocabulary (voicetags)  
If multiple phones are registered to the sys-  
tem, you can change which phone to con-  
nect to the system (as long as that phone is  
present in the vehicle).  
NISSAN Voice Recognition provides the function  
called “voicetags”, which can be associated with  
the phone and the navigation system (if so  
equipped). Using your own voice, 70 voicetags  
can be registered in the “Phonebook” (phone)  
and 20 locations can be registered in the “Ad-  
dress Book” (navigation system).  
Help commands  
●
“PHONEBOOK”  
●
“COMMAND LIST”, “VOICE HELP” or  
“HELP”  
Shows the first page of the “phone book”list.  
Gives spoken information about NISSAN  
Voice Recognition and displays the list of  
help commands.  
For additional information, see “Bluetoothா  
Hands-Free Phone System”earlier in this section  
and/or the separate Navigation System Owner’s  
Manual (if so equipped) for the method of “voic-  
etag” registration.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
●
“PHONEBOOK <voicetag> ”  
Shows the specified “voicetag” entry in the  
“phone book” and dials the phone number  
registered in the specified “voicetag” after  
pressing the ENTER button on the steering  
wheel.  
“ PHONEBOOK [PLAY] DIRECTORY” or  
“PLAY PHONEBOOK [DIRECTORY]”  
Dials the phone number registered in the  
phone book.  
NAVIGATION SYSTEM VOICE  
COMMANDS (if so equipped)  
For additional information, see the separate Navi-  
gation System Owner’s Manual for the voice  
commands available and operations.  
LHA0747  
LHA1014  
Voice Feedback:  
VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGS  
When this item is enabled (indicator is illumi-  
nated), vocal feedback during voice recognition  
system is activated. Touch the Voice Feedback  
“ON” key to disable the vocal feedback during  
voice recognition.  
Press the SETUP button then touch the “Voice  
Recognition” key.  
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE  
The system should respond correctly to all voice  
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-  
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide  
for the appropriate error.  
Where the solutions are listed by number. Try  
each solution in turn, starting with number one,  
until the problem is resolved.  
Symptom/error message  
Solution  
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-  
NIZED” or the system fails to interpret the  
command correctly.  
1. Ensure that the command format is valid. See Command list in this section.  
2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.  
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.  
NOTE:  
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.  
4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.  
The system consistently selects the wrong 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Address Book Directory  
voicetag.  
or Phone Directory command.  
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.  
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Starting and driving  
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2  
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Avoiding collision and rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Rapid air pressure loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
NISSAN Intelligent key™ battery discharge . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19  
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21  
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22  
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23  
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23  
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24  
Traction Control System (TCS) (if so equipped) . . . . . .5-25  
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26  
Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28  
Engine block heater (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29  
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16  
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18  
Cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19  
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING  
AND DRIVING  
● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are  
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-  
dows fully open, and have the vehicle  
inspected immediately.  
a. The vehicle is raised for service.  
WARNING  
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are  
● Do not leave children or adults who  
would normally require the assistance  
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets  
should also not be left alone. They  
could accidentally injure themselves or  
others through inadvertent operation of  
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,  
temperatures in a closed vehicle could  
quickly become high enough to cause  
severe or possibly fatal injuries to  
people or animals.  
entering  
into  
the  
passenger  
compartment.  
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces  
such as a garage.  
c. You notice a change in the sound of  
the exhaust system.  
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine  
running for any extended length of time.  
d. You have had an accident involving  
damage to the exhaust system, un-  
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.  
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,  
otherwise exhaust gases could be  
drawn into the passenger compart-  
ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid  
open, follow these precautions:  
THREE-WAY CATALYST  
The three-way catalyst is an emission control  
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust  
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at  
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.  
● Closely supervise children when they  
are around cars to prevent them from  
playing and becoming locked in the  
trunk where they could be seriously in-  
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear  
seatback and trunk lid securely latched  
when not in use, and prevent children’s  
access to car keys.  
1. Open all the windows.  
2. Set the  
air recirculation but-  
ton to off and the fan control dial to  
high to circulate the air.  
WARNING  
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-  
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals  
or flammable materials away from the  
exhaust system components.  
● If electrical wiring or other cable con-  
nections must pass to a trailer through  
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,  
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-  
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-  
try into the vehicle.  
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)  
WARNING  
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over  
flammable materials such as dry grass,  
waste paper or rags. They may ignite  
and cause a fire.  
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they  
contain colorless and odorless carbon  
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-  
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or  
death.  
● The exhaust system and body should be  
inspected by  
whenever:  
a
qualified mechanic  
5-2 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for  
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s  
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,  
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to  
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure  
telltale.  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING  
SYSTEM (TPMS)  
CAUTION  
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits  
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-  
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to  
help reduce exhaust pollutants.  
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),  
should be checked monthly when cold and in-  
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by  
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard  
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has  
tires of a different size than the size indicated on  
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,  
you should determine the proper tire inflation  
pressure for those tires.)  
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-  
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or  
electrical systems can cause overrich  
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,  
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-  
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-  
able loss of performance or other un-  
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a  
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the  
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-  
function indicator is combined with the low tire  
pressure telltale. When the system detects a  
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-  
mately one minute and then remain continuously  
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon  
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-  
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is  
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect  
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS  
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,  
including the installation of replacement or alter-  
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent  
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always  
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-  
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to  
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and  
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function  
properly.  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been  
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system  
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale  
when one or more of your tires is significantly  
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire  
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and  
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate  
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-  
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-  
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation  
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and  
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping  
ability.  
usual  
operating  
conditions  
are  
detected. Have the vehicle inspected  
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.  
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel  
level. Running out of fuel could cause  
the engine to misfire, damaging the  
three-way catalyst.  
● Do not race the engine while warming it  
up.  
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start  
the engine.  
Starting and driving 5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional information:  
●
●
The Tire and Loading Information label (also  
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire  
inflation pressure label) is located in the  
driver’s door opening.  
WARNING  
●
The TPMS does not monitor the tire  
pressure of the spare tire.  
● If the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden  
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,  
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road  
to a safe location and stop the vehicle  
as soon as possible. Driving with under-  
inflated tires may permanently damage  
the tires and increase the likelihood of  
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage  
could occur and may lead to an acci-  
dent and could result in serious per-  
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for  
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to  
the recommended COLD tire pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label to turn the low tire pressure  
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,  
replace it with a spare tire as soon as  
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case  
of emergency” section for changing a  
flat tire.)  
●
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle  
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25  
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a  
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a  
flat tire while driving).  
You can also check the pressure of all tires  
(except the spare tire) on the display screen  
(if so equipped). The order of the tire pres-  
sure figures displayed on the screen does  
not correspond with the actual order of the  
tire position. See “Tire pressure information”  
in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and  
voice recognition systems ” section.  
●
The low tire pressure warning light does not  
automatically turn off when the tire pressure  
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the  
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be  
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)  
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire  
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure  
gauge to check the tire pressure.  
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure  
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”  
section and “Tire pressure monitoring system  
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.  
●
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on  
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation  
and the outside temperature. Low outside  
temperature can lower the temperature of  
the air inside the tire which can cause a  
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause  
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-  
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low  
ambient temperature, check the tire pres-  
sure for all four tires.  
5-4 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Some examples are:  
AVOIDING COLLISION AND  
ROLLOVER  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, tire pressure will not be  
indicated, the TPMS will not function  
and the low tire pressure warning light  
will flash for approximately 1 minute.  
The light will remain on after 1 minute.  
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio  
frequencies are near the vehicle.  
WARNING  
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is  
being used in or near the vehicle.  
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe  
and prudent manner may result in loss of  
control or an accident.  
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a  
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the  
vehicle.  
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey  
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,  
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-  
neuvers, because these driving practices could  
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with  
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a  
collision with other vehicles or objects or  
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if  
the loss of control causes the vehicle to  
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and  
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under  
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-  
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may  
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as  
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and  
supplemental restraint system” section of this  
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
FCC Notice:  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol  
tire sealant into the tires, as this may  
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure  
sensors.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada.  
CAUTION  
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation of the device.  
Do not place metalized film or any metal  
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This  
may cause poor reception of the signals  
from the tire pressure sensors, and the  
TPMS will not function properly.  
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily  
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and  
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-  
minate.  
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions  
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted  
or improperly belted person is significantly  
more likely to be injured or killed than a  
person properly wearing a seat belt.  
Starting and driving 5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
If you decide that it is not safe to return the  
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,  
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the  
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.  
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY  
WARNING  
While driving, the right side or left side wheels  
may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this  
occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-  
ing the procedure below. Please note that this  
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle  
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-  
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.  
The following actions can increase the  
chance of losing control of the vehicle if  
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.  
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a  
collision and result in personal injury.  
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS  
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur  
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to  
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss  
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated  
tires.  
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in  
the direction of the flat tire.  
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.  
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.  
2. Do not apply the brakes.  
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator  
pedal.  
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling  
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway  
speeds.  
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel  
with both hands and try to hold a straight  
course.  
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.  
1. Remain calm and do not over react.  
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-  
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect  
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and  
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air  
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain  
control of the vehicle by following the procedure  
below. Please note that this procedure is only a  
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as  
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-  
hicle, road and traffic.  
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel  
with both hands and try to hold a straight  
course.  
4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-  
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.  
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-  
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed  
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-  
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle  
speed is reduced.  
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-  
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.  
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location  
off the road and away from traffic if possible.  
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually  
stop the vehicle.  
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the  
steering wheel until both tires return to the  
road surface. When all tires are on the road  
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-  
propriate driving lane.  
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and  
either contact a roadside emergency service  
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat  
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of  
this manual.  
5-6 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH  
WARNING  
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND  
DRIVING  
Do not operate the push-button ignition  
switch while driving the vehicle except in  
an emergency. (The engine will stop when  
the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-  
tive times in quick succession or the igni-  
tion switch is pushed and held for more  
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while  
the vehicle is being driven, this could lead  
to a crash and serious injury.  
WARNING  
Never drive under the influence of alcohol  
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-  
duces coordination, delays reaction time  
and impairs judgement. Driving after  
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood  
of being involved in an accident injuring  
yourself and others. Additionally, if you  
are injured in an accident, alcohol can  
increase the severity of the injury.  
LSD0237  
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,  
you must choose not to drive under the influence  
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are  
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-  
though the local laws vary on what is considered  
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol  
affects all people differently and most people  
underestimate the effects of alcohol.  
When the ignition switch is pushed without de-  
pressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch  
pedal (MT), the ignition switch position will illu-  
minate as follows:  
Push center  
●
●
●
once to change to ACC.  
two times to change to ON.  
three times to return to OFF.  
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And  
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-  
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your  
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-  
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.  
The ignition switch will automatically return to the  
LOCK position when any door is either opened or  
closed with the switch in the OFF position.  
Starting and driving 5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The ignition switch is equipped with an anti-theft  
steering lock device.  
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,  
the push-button ignition switch cannot be  
turned from the LOCK position.  
ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the  
ignition switch to the OFF position after 1 hour  
under the following conditions:  
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition  
switch position cannot be switched to OFF until  
the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position  
(CVT) or N (Neutral) position (MT).  
●
●
all doors are closed.  
Some indicators and warnings for operation are  
displayed on the vehicle information display. See  
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments  
and controls” section.  
shift selector is in P (Park).  
The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any  
of the following occur:  
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-  
ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:  
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH  
POSITIONS  
●
●
●
any door is opened.  
1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)  
position (CVT) or N (Neutral) position (MT).  
shift selector is moved out of the P (Park).  
ignition switch changes position.  
LOCK (Normal parking position):  
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch  
position will change to the ON position.  
The ignition switch can only be locked in this  
position.  
ON (Normal operating position):  
This position turns on the ignition system and  
electrical accessories.  
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF  
position.  
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is  
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the  
Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted  
in the port.  
The shift selector can be moved from the P  
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in  
the ON position and the brake pedal is  
depressed.  
CAUTION  
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition  
switch in ACC or ON positions when the  
engine is not running for an extended pe-  
riod. This can discharge the battery.  
The ignition switch will lock when any door is  
opened or closed with the ignition switched off.  
In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it  
must be turned about 1/8 of a right or left turn  
from the straight–up position.  
OFF:  
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when  
the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.  
No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™  
BATTERY DISCHARGE  
To lock the steering wheel, push the igni-  
tion switch to the LOCK position. To unlock  
the steering wheel, push the ignition switch  
while slightly turning the steering wheel  
right and left.  
ACC (Accessories):  
This position activates electrical accessories,  
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.  
5-8 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
● Never place anything except the Intelli-  
gent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Do-  
ing so may cause damage to the  
equipment.  
● Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the  
correct direction when inserting it to  
the Intelligent Key port. The engine may  
not start if it is in the wrong direction.  
● Remove the Intelligent Key from the  
Intelligent Key port after the ignition  
switch is pushed to the LOCK position.  
WSD0232  
WSD0233  
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis-  
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push  
A
charged, the guide light  
of the Intelligent Key  
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pull  
᭺
C
port blinks and the indicator appears on the ve-  
hicle information display. See “Vehicle informa-  
tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”  
section.  
the Intelligent Key out of the port  
.
᭺
NOTE:  
The Intelligent Key port does not charge  
the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the  
low battery indicator, replace the battery as  
soon as possible. See “NISSAN Intelligent  
Key™ battery replacement” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section.  
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the  
B
port  
allows you to start the engine. Make sure  
᭺
the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc-  
tion: The front side faces upward and the key ring  
side faces downward as illustrated.  
Starting and driving 5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE  
STARTING THE ENGINE  
●
●
Make sure the area around the vehicle is  
clear.  
1. Apply the parking brake.  
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-  
tremely cold weather or when restarting,  
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-  
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while  
holding, crank the engine. Release the  
accelerator pedal when the engine starts.  
2. Continuously Variable Transmission  
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-  
ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as  
frequently as possible, or at least whenever  
you refuel.  
(CVT) model:  
Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N  
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.  
● If the engine is very hard to start because  
it is flooded, depress the accelerator  
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.  
Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-  
tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or  
6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the  
ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking  
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.  
Crank the engine with your foot off the  
accelerator pedal by depressing the  
brake pedal and pushing the push-button  
ignition switch to start the engine. If the  
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the  
above procedure.  
The starter is designed not to operate if  
the shift selector is in any of the driving  
positions.  
●
●
Check that all windows and lights are clean.  
Visually inspect tires for their appearance  
and condition. Also check tires for proper  
inflation.  
Manual transmission:  
Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-  
press the clutch pedal to the floor.  
●
●
●
●
Lock all doors.  
Position seat and adjust head restraints.  
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.  
The starter is designed not to operate  
unless the clutch pedal is fully de-  
pressed.  
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to  
do likewise.  
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.  
Depress the brake pedal and the clutch  
pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition  
switch to start the engine.  
●
Check the operation of warning lights when  
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON  
position. See “Warning/indicator lights and  
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and  
controls” section of this manual.  
CAUTION  
To start the engine immediately, push and  
release the ignition switch while depressing  
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in  
any position.  
Do not operate the starter for more than  
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does  
not start, push the ignition switch to the  
OFF position and wait 10 seconds before  
cranking again, otherwise the starter  
could be damaged.  
5-10 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DRIVING THE VEHICLE  
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-  
trolled to produce maximum power and smooth  
operation.  
4. Warm-up  
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE  
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so  
equipped)  
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-  
onds after starting. Do not race the engine  
while warming it up. Drive at moderate  
speed for a short distance first, especially in  
cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-  
gine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes  
before shutting it off. Starting and stopping  
the engine over a short period of time may  
make the vehicle more difficult to start.  
The recommended operating procedures for this  
transmission are shown on the following pages.  
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle  
performance and driving enjoyment.  
WARNING  
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal  
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-  
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manual  
shift mode. Always depress the brake  
pedal until shifting is completed. Fail-  
ure to do so could cause you to lose  
control and have an accident.  
NOTE:  
Engine power may be automatically re-  
duced to protect the CVT if the engine  
speed increases quickly when driving on  
slippery roads or while being tested on  
some dynamometers.  
5. To stop the engine, shift the selector to the P  
(Park) position (CVT) or to N (Neutral) and  
apply the parking brake (MT) and push the  
ignition switch to the OFF position.  
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use  
caution when shifting into a forward or  
reverse gear before the engine has  
warmed up.  
Starting the vehicle  
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the  
foot brake pedal before moving the shift  
selector out of the P (Park) position.  
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery  
roads. This may cause a loss of control.  
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)  
while the vehicle is moving. This could  
cause an accident.  
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and  
move the shift selector into a driving gear.  
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start  
the vehicle in motion.  
CAUTION  
4. Stop the vehicle completely before placing  
the shift selector in the P (Park) position.  
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill  
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-  
ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake  
should be used for this purpose.  
Starting and driving 5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The CVT is designed so the foot brake  
pedal MUST be depressed before shifting  
from P (Park) to any drive position while  
the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
WARNING  
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-  
tor is in any position while the engine is  
not running. Failure to do so could cause  
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll  
away and result in serious personal injury  
or property damage.  
The shift selector cannot be moved out of P  
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-  
tions if the ignition switch is placed in the  
LOCK or ACC position.  
P (Park):  
CAUTION  
To prevent transmission damage, use the  
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when  
the vehicle is completely stopped.  
LSD0182  
To move the shift selector:  
Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the  
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.  
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.  
The brake pedal should be depressed to  
move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or  
any drive position to P (Park). Apply the  
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the  
parking brake first, then move the shift selector  
into the P (Park) position.  
Push the button while depressing the brake  
pedal  
Push the button to shift  
Shift without pushing button  
Shifting  
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake  
pedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) to  
any of the desired shift positions.  
5-12 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R (Reverse):  
6 (Sixth):  
Use this position for all normal forward driving at  
highway speeds.  
CAUTION  
To prevent transmission damage, use the  
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when  
the vehicle is completely stopped.  
5 (Fifth):  
Use this position when driving up long slopes, or  
for engine braking when driving down long  
slopes.  
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make  
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before  
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake  
pedal must be depressed to move the shift  
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any  
drive position to R (Reverse).  
4 (Fourth), 3 (Third) and 2 (Second):  
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill  
grades.  
M1 (First):  
N (Neutral):  
LSD0182  
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The  
engine can be started in this position. You may  
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine  
while the vehicle is moving.  
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly  
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or  
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep  
downhill grades.  
Manual shift mode  
When the shift selector is shifted from D to the  
manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or  
while driving, the transmission enters the manual  
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-  
ally.  
D (Drive):  
●
Remember not to drive at high speeds for  
extended periods of time in lower than 6  
range. This reduces fuel economy.  
Use this position for all normal forward driving.  
In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-  
played on the position indicator in the meter.  
When shifting the shift selector to the manual  
shift gate, the position indicator displays 1 (first)  
up to 6 (sixth) depending on vehicle speed.  
When shifting up:  
Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shifts  
to higher range.)  
When shifting down:  
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:  
Move the shift selector to the Ϫ (down) side.  
1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6  
(Shifts to lower range.)  
Starting and driving 5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
The transmission will automatically down-  
shift the gears. (For example, if you select the  
3rd range, the transmission will shift down  
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)  
●
●
CVT operation is limited to automatic drive  
mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex-  
tremely low even if manual shift mode is  
selected. This is not a malfunction. When  
CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be  
selected.  
Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same  
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.  
When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the  
shift range may upshift in lower rpm than  
usual. This is not a malfunction.  
When canceling the manual shift mode:  
Return the shift selector to the D (Drive) position  
to return the transmission to the normal driving  
mode.  
●
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-  
sion may not shift to the selected gear.  
This helps maintain driving perfor-  
mance and reduces the chance of ve-  
hicle damage or loss of control.  
LSD0183  
Shift lock release  
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the  
shift selector may not be moved from the P (Park)  
position even with the brake pedal depressed  
and the shift selector button pushed.  
●
In the manual shift mode, the transmis-  
sion may shift up automatically to a  
higher range than selected if the en-  
gine speed is too high. When the ve-  
hicle speed decreases, the transmis-  
sion automatically shifts down and  
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle  
comes to a stop.  
If the battery is discharged completely, the steer-  
ing wheel cannot be locked or unlocked. Do not  
move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.  
It will be necessary to jump start or have your  
battery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “In  
case of emergency” section. Contact your  
NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.  
5-14 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To move the shift selector, complete the following  
procedure:  
tion. This will occur even if all electrical  
circuits are functioning properly. In this  
case, place the ignition switch in the OFF  
position and wait for 10 seconds. Then  
push the switch back to the ON position.  
The vehicle should return to its normal op-  
erating condition. If it does not return to its  
Accelerator downshift  
— in D position —  
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-  
tion.  
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-  
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-  
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the  
vehicle speed.  
2. Apply the parking brake.  
3. Remove the shift lock release cover as  
shown.  
normal operating condition, have  
a
High fluid temperature protection  
mode  
NISSAN dealer check the transmission and  
repair if necessary.  
4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lock  
release slot and push down.  
This transmission has a high fluid temperature  
protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-  
comes too high (for example, when climbing  
steep grades in high temperature with heavy  
loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine  
power and, under some conditions, vehicle  
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce  
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle  
speed can be controlled with the accelerator  
pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be  
limited.  
WARNING  
5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)  
position while holding down the shift lock  
release.  
When the high fluid temperature protec-  
tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,  
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.  
The reduced speed may be lower than  
other traffic, which could increase the  
chance of a collision. Be especially care-  
ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the  
side of the road at a safe place and allow  
the transmission to return to normal op-  
eration, or have it repaired if necessary.  
6. Push the ignition switch to the ON position  
to unlock the steering wheel. Now the ve-  
hicle may be moved to the desired location.  
If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P  
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-  
mission as soon as possible.  
Fail-safe  
WARNING  
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-  
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning  
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe  
system may be activated. The MIL may  
come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is  
activated, see “Malfunction indicator light  
(MIL)”in the “Instrument and controls”sec-  
If the selector lever cannot be moved from  
the P (Park) position while the engine is  
running and the brake pedal is depressed,  
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-  
ing stop lights could cause an accident  
injuring yourself and others.  
Starting and driving 5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
To back up, lift up on the shift selector ring  
and  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so  
equipped)  
᭺
then move it to the R (Reverse) position after  
stopping the vehicle completely.  
1
WARNING  
The shift selector ring  
returns to its original  
᭺
position when the shift selector is moved to the N  
(Neutral) position.  
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery  
roads. This may cause a loss of control.  
If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R  
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then  
release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch  
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).  
● Do not over-rev the engine when shift-  
ing to a lower gear. This may cause a  
loss of control or engine damage.  
CAUTION  
Suggested upshift speeds  
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal  
while driving. This may cause clutch  
damage.  
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for  
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions  
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.  
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road  
conditions, the weather and individual driving  
habits.  
LSD0180  
Shifting  
● Fully depress the clutch pedal before  
shifting to help prevent transmission  
damage.  
To change gears or when upshifting or down-  
shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into  
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch  
slowly and smoothly.  
● Stop your vehicle completely before  
shifting into R (Reverse).  
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress  
the clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-  
tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed  
before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise  
may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.  
● When the vehicle is stopped with the  
engine running (for example, at a stop  
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release  
the clutch pedal with the foot brake  
applied.  
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,  
4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according  
to vehicle speed.  
5-16 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas (less  
than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):  
For quick acceleration in low altitude areas and  
high altitude areas (over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):  
Suggested maximum speed in each  
gear  
For QR25DE:  
For QR25DE:  
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not  
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.  
GEAR CHANGE  
ACCEL shift  
point MPH  
(km/h)  
CRUISE shift  
point MPH  
(km/h)  
Gear change  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
MPH (km/h)  
8 (13)  
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed  
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,  
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.  
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive  
according to the road conditions, which will en-  
sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine  
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause  
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.  
17 (27)  
25 (40)  
36 (58)  
51 (82)  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
15 (24)  
25 (40)  
33 (53)  
44 (71)  
51 (82)  
8 (24)  
17 (27)  
25 (40)  
36 (58)  
51 (82)  
For VQ35DE:  
Gear change  
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
MPH (km/h)  
15 (24)  
25 (40)  
40 (64)  
45 (72)  
50 (80)  
For VQ35DE:  
GEAR CHANGE  
GEAR  
QR25DE  
MPH (km/h)  
VQ35DE  
MPH (km/h)  
ACCEL shift  
point MPH  
(km/h)  
CRUISE shift  
point MPH  
(km/h)  
1st  
2nd  
3rd  
4th  
5th  
6th  
32 (53)  
59 (95)  
82 (133)  
—
36 (58)  
58 (93)  
81 (131)  
—
1st to 2nd  
2nd to 3rd  
3rd to 4th  
4th to 5th  
5th to 6th  
15 (25)  
25 (40)  
31 (50)  
36 (58)  
43 (69)  
9 (14)  
19 (30)  
26 (42)  
31 (50)  
37 (59)  
—
—
—
—
Starting and driving 5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARKING BRAKE  
WARNING  
● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-  
leased before driving. Failure to do so  
can cause brake failure and lead to an  
accident.  
● Do not release the parking brake from  
outside the vehicle.  
● Do not use the gear shift in place of the  
parking brake. When parking, be sure  
the parking brake is fully engaged.  
● Do not leave children unattended in a  
vehicle. They could release the parking  
brake and cause an accident.  
LSD0158  
WSD0169  
Type A  
To engage: Type A, firmly depress the parking  
Type B  
3. Type A, firmly depress the parking brake  
pedal and it will release. Type B, while pulling  
up on the parking brake lever slightly, push  
B
A
brake. Type B, pull the lever up  
.
᭺
To release:  
the button and lower completely  
.
᭺
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.  
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning  
light goes out.  
2. Manual transmission models:  
Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)  
position.  
CVT models:  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion.  
5-18 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CRUISE CONTROL  
●
The SET indicator light may blink when the  
cruise control switch is turned ON while  
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or  
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise  
control system, use the following proce-  
dures.  
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to  
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch  
and release it. The SET indicator light in the  
instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set  
speed.  
●
To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-  
celerator pedal. When you release the  
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously  
set speed.  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control when driving  
under the following conditions:  
●
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed  
when going up or down steep hills. If this  
happens, drive without the cruise control.  
● When it is not possible to keep the  
vehicle at a set speed.  
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in  
speed.  
LSD0184  
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the  
following three methods.  
1. CANCEL switch  
2. ACCEL/RES switch  
3. COAST/SET switch  
4. ON/OFF switch  
● On winding or hilly roads.  
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).  
● In very windy areas.  
●
●
●
Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator  
light in the instrument panel goes out.  
Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light  
goes out.  
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE  
CONTROL  
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle  
control and result in an accident.  
Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the  
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator  
light in the instrument panel go out.  
●
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it  
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS  
cancels automatically. The SET indicator  
light in the instrument panel then blinks to  
warn the driver.  
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-  
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without  
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.  
●
If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the  
cruise control switch off and have the sys-  
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
To turn on the cruise control, push the  
ON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in  
the instrument panel comes on.  
Starting and driving 5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE  
The cruise control is automatically canceled and  
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:  
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one  
of the following three methods.  
CAUTION  
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),  
follow these recommendations to obtain  
maximum engine performance and en-  
sure the future reliability and economy of  
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these  
recommendations may result in short-  
ened engine life and reduced engine  
performance.  
●
you depress the brake or clutch pedal while  
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST  
switch. The preset speed is deleted from  
memory.  
●
●
●
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-  
hicle attains the desired speed, push the  
COAST/SET switch and release it.  
Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-  
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to  
the desired speed.  
●
●
the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH  
(13 km/h) below the set speed.  
you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-  
mission), or move the shift selector to N  
(Neutral) (CVT or A/T)).  
Push and release the COAST/SET switch.  
Each time you do this, the set speed de-  
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).  
●
Avoid driving for long periods at constant  
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the  
engine over 4,000 rpm.  
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one  
of the following three methods.  
To resume the preset speed, push and re-  
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-  
turns to the last set cruising speed when the  
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).  
●
●
●
●
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.  
Avoid quick starts.  
●
●
●
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the  
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and  
release the COAST/SET switch.  
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.  
Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles  
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts  
could be damaged.  
Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.  
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-  
sire, release the switch.  
Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.  
Each time you do this, the set speed in-  
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).  
5-20 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY  
●
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain  
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator  
position.  
●
●
When cruising at highway speeds, it is more  
economical to use the air conditioner and  
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.  
●
●
Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.  
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.  
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.  
See “Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-  
sumer information” section of this manual.  
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.  
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-  
hicles.  
●
Use a proper gear range which suits road  
conditions. On level roads, shift into high  
gear as soon as possible.  
●
●
●
Avoid unnecessary engine idling.  
Keep your engine tuned up.  
Follow the recommended periodic mainte-  
nance schedule.  
●
●
●
Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-  
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear  
and lowers fuel economy.  
Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-  
proper alignment increases tire wear and  
lowers fuel economy.  
Air conditioner operation lowers fuel  
economy. Use the air conditioner only when  
necessary.  
Starting and driving 5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS  
Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)  
position. When parking on an uphill grade,  
place the shift selector in 1st gear.  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) models:  
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-  
tion.  
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into  
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good  
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.  
1
●
●
●
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:  
᭺
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the  
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel  
gently touches the curb.  
SSD0488  
selector has been pushed as far for-  
ward as it can go and cannot be moved  
without depressing the foot brake  
pedal.  
WARNING  
2
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:  
᭺
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over  
flammable materials such as dry grass,  
waste paper or rags. They may ignite  
and cause a fire.  
Turn the wheels away from the curb and  
move the vehicle back until the curb side  
wheel gently touches the curb.  
● Never leave the engine running while  
the vehicle is unattended.  
● Safe parking procedures require that  
both the parking brake be set and the  
transmission placed into P (Park) for  
CVT models or in an appropriate gear  
for manual transmission models. Fail-  
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to  
move unexpectedly or roll away and re-  
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift  
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO  
● Do not leave children unattended inside  
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-  
tivate switches or controls. Unattended  
children could become involved in seri-  
ous accidents.  
3
CURB:  
᭺
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road  
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-  
ter of the road if it moves.  
4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position  
and remove the key.  
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.  
2. Manual transmission models:  
5-22 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
POWER STEERING  
BRAKE SYSTEM  
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic  
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.  
The brake system has two separate hydraulic  
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still  
have braking at 2 wheels.  
WARNING  
● While driving on a slippery surface, be  
careful when braking, accelerating or  
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-  
erating could cause the wheels to skid  
and result in an accident.  
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you  
will still have control of the vehicle. However,  
much greater steering effort is needed, especially  
in sharp turns and at low speeds.  
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS  
Vacuum assisted brakes  
The brake booster aids braking by using engine  
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the  
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,  
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be  
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-  
tance will be longer.  
● If the engine is not running or is turned  
off while driving, the power assist for  
the brakes will not work. Braking will be  
harder.  
WARNING  
If the engine is not running or is turned off  
while driving, the power assist for the  
steering will not work. Steering will be  
harder to operate.  
Parking brake break-in  
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the  
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened  
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or  
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the  
best brake performance.  
Using the brakes  
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while  
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the  
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.  
This procedure is described in the vehicle service  
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the  
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and  
downshift to a lower gear before going down a  
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may  
reduce braking performance and could result in  
loss of vehicle control.  
Wet brakes  
When the vehicle is washed or driven through  
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your  
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle  
may pull to one side during braking.  
Starting and driving 5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe  
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to  
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return  
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high  
speeds until the brakes function correctly.  
Using the system  
– When replacing tires, install the  
specified size of tires on all four  
wheels.  
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-  
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,  
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-  
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer  
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.  
– When installing a spare tire, make  
sure that it is the proper size and type  
as specified on the Tire and Loading  
Information label. See “Tire and  
Loading Information label” in the  
“Technical and consumer informa-  
tion” section of this manual.  
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM  
(ABS)  
WARNING  
WARNING  
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so  
may result in increased stopping  
distances.  
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a  
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-  
vent accidents resulting from careless  
or dangerous driving techniques. It can  
help maintain vehicle control during  
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-  
ber that stopping distances on slippery  
surfaces will be longer than on normal  
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-  
tances may also be longer on rough,  
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you  
are using tire chains. Always maintain a  
safe distance from the vehicle in front  
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-  
sible for safety.  
– For detailed information, see  
“Wheels and tires” in the Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section of  
this manual.  
Self-test feature  
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric  
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The  
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that  
tests the system each time you start the engine  
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or  
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear  
a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake  
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a  
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-  
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the  
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The  
brake system then operates normally, but without  
anti-lock assistance.  
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the  
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard  
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.  
The system detects the rotation speed at each  
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-  
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By  
preventing each wheel from locking, the system  
helps the driver maintain steering control and  
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-  
pery surfaces.  
● Tire type and condition may also affect  
braking effectiveness.  
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the  
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle  
checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
5-24 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)  
(if so equipped)  
When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tire  
may spin or slip. With the vehicle Traction Control  
System (TCS), sensors detect these movements  
and control the braking and engine output to help  
improve vehicle road traction.  
Normal operation  
WARNING  
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5  
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road  
conditions.  
● The Traction Control System is de-  
signed to help maintain traction with  
the road surface but does not prevent  
accidents due to abrupt steering opera-  
tion at high speeds or by careless or  
dangerous driving techniques. Reduce  
vehicle speed and be especially careful  
when driving and cornering on slippery  
surfaces and always drive carefully.  
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are  
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies  
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is  
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You  
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a  
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from  
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal  
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.  
However, the pulsation may indicate that road  
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-  
quired while driving.  
●
When the TCS is operating, the  
indicator in the instrument panel blinks.  
●
If the  
indicator blinks, the vehicle  
may be under slippery conditions. Be sure to  
drive carefully. See “Slip indicator light” and  
“Traction Control System (TCS) off indicator  
light” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
● If brake related parts such as brake  
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-  
dard equipment or are extremely dete-  
riorated, the Traction Control System  
may not operate properly and the  
indicator light may come on.  
●
If a malfunction occurs in the system,  
the  
and  
indicator lights  
come on in the instrument panel.  
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.  
If suspension parts such as shock ab-  
sorbers, struts, springs, bushings and  
wheels are not standard equipment or  
are extremely deteriorated, the Traction  
Control System may not operate prop-  
As long as these lights are on, the traction control  
function is canceled. The vehicle will behave like  
a vehicle without the system.  
erly and the  
come on.  
indicator light may  
Starting and driving 5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)  
SYSTEM (if so equipped)  
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses  
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-  
hicle motion. Under certain driving situations, the  
system will control braking and engine output to  
help keep the vehicle on its steered path.  
When the VDC system is operating, you may feel  
a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or  
vibration from under the hood. This is normal and  
indicates that the VDC system is working prop-  
erly.  
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-  
faces such as higher banked corners,  
the Traction Control System may not  
operate properly and the  
indica-  
tor light may come on. Do not drive on  
these types of roads.  
●
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)  
system is operating, the SLIP indicator in  
the instrument panel blinks:  
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature  
that tests the system each time you start the  
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse  
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you  
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in  
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an  
indication of a malfunction.  
● If wheels or tires other than the recom-  
mended ones are used, the Traction  
Control System may not operate prop-  
●
If the SLIP indicator blinks, the road condi-  
tions may be slippery. Be sure to adjust your  
speed and driving to these conditions. See  
“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle Dynamic  
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-  
struments and controls” section.  
erly and the  
come on.  
indicator light may  
● The Traction Control System is not a  
substitute for winter tires or tire chains  
on a snow covered road.  
WARNING  
●
Indicator light  
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is  
designed to help maintain traction with  
the road surface but does not prevent  
accidents due to abrupt steering opera-  
tion at high speeds or by careless or  
dangerous driving techniques. Reduce  
vehicle speed and be especially careful  
when driving and cornering on slippery  
surfaces and always drive carefully.  
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the  
SLIP and  
indicator lights come on in  
the instrument panel.  
As long as these indicator lights are on, the  
traction control function is canceled.  
If the vehicle is operated with the Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control system OFF using the VDC OFF  
switch, VDC and TCS functions will be turned off.  
The SLIP indicator will flash if wheel spin is  
detected. The ABS will still operate with the VDC  
system off.  
5-26 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
COLD WEATHER DRIVING  
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK  
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.  
If suspension parts such as shock ab-  
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,  
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN  
approved for your vehicle or are ex-  
tremely deteriorated the Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control system may not operate  
properly. This could adversely affect ve-  
hicle handling performance, and the  
VDC OFF indicator light may come on.  
● When driving on an unstable surface  
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or  
ramp, the Vehicle Dynamic Control off  
indicator light may illuminate. This is  
not a malfunction. Restart the engine  
after driving onto a stable surface.  
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-  
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes  
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key  
hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob.  
ANTI-FREEZE  
● If wheels or tires other than the recom-  
mended ones are used, the Vehicle Dy-  
namic Control system may not operate  
properly and the Vehicle Dynamic Con-  
trol off indicator light may come on.  
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-  
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the  
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.  
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
● If brake related parts such as brake  
pads, rotors and calipers are not stan-  
dard equipment or are extremely dete-  
riorated, the Vehicle Dynamic Control  
system may not operate properly and  
the Vehicle Dynamic Control off indica-  
tor light may come on.  
● The Vehicle Dynamic Control system is  
not a substitute for winter tires or tire  
chains on a snow covered road.  
BATTERY  
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely  
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may  
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-  
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked  
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
● If engine related parts such as the muf-  
fler are not standard equipment or are  
extremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF”  
indicator or SLIP” indicator or both in-  
dicator lights may illuminate.  
● When driving on extremely inclined sur-  
faces such as higher banked corners,  
the Vehicle Dynamic Control system  
may not operate properly and the VDC  
OFF indicator light may come on. Do  
not drive on these types of roads.  
Starting and driving 5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Tire chains may be used. For details see  
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-  
yourself” section of this manual.  
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER  
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-  
tion. Accelerate and slow down with  
care. If accelerating or downshifting too  
fast, the drive wheels will lose even  
more traction.  
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-  
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the  
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.  
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT  
It is recommended that the following items be  
carried in the vehicle during winter:  
● Allow more stopping distance under  
these conditions. Braking should be  
started sooner than on dry pavement.  
●
●
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove  
ice and snow from the windows and wiper  
blades.  
TIRE EQUIPMENT  
● Allow greater following distances on  
slippery roads.  
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to  
provide superior performance on dry pave-  
ment. However, the performance of these  
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy  
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-  
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-  
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL  
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please  
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,  
size, speed rating and availability informa-  
tion.  
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the  
jack to give it firm support.  
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).  
These may appear on an otherwise  
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of  
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-  
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,  
and avoid any sudden steering  
maneuvers.  
●
●
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.  
Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-  
voir tank.  
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE  
● Do not use the cruise control on slip-  
pery roads.  
WARNING  
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust  
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow  
clear of the exhaust pipe and from  
around your vehicle.  
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),  
very cold snow or ice can be slick and  
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will  
have much less traction or “grip” under  
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on  
wet ice until the road is salted or  
sanded.  
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded  
tires may be used. However, some U.S.  
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their  
use. Check local, state and provincial laws  
before installing studded tires.  
Skid and traction capabilities of studded  
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be  
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.  
5-28 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To use the engine block heater:  
1. Turn the engine off.  
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so  
equipped)  
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block  
heater cord.  
WARNING  
● Do not use your engine block heater  
with an ungrounded electrical system  
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-  
riously injured by an electrical shock if  
you use an ungrounded connection.  
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a  
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension  
cord.  
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault  
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-  
volt AC (VAC) outlet.  
● Disconnect and properly store the en-  
gine block heater cord before starting  
the engine. Damage to the cord could  
result in an electrical shock and can  
cause serious injury.  
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in  
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside  
temperatures, to properly warm the engine  
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the  
engine block heater on.  
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-  
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug  
the extension cord into a Ground Fault  
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded  
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the  
proper extension cord or a grounded  
outlet can result in a fire or electrical  
shock and cause serious personal  
injury.  
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-  
erly store the cord to keep it away from  
moving parts.  
Engine block heaters are available through  
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature  
starting. The engine block heater should be used  
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or  
lower.  
Starting and driving 5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMO  
5-30 Starting and driving  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 In case of emergency  
Flat tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7  
Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9  
Towing your vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11  
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . .6-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FLAT TIRE  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING  
SYSTEM (TPMS)  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
WARNING  
● If the low tire pressure warning light  
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden  
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,  
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road  
to a safe location and stop the vehicle  
as soon as possible. Driving with under-  
inflated tires may permanently damage  
the tires and increase the likelihood of  
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage  
could occur and may lead to an acci-  
dent and could result in serious per-  
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for  
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to  
the recommended COLD tire pressure  
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label to turn the low tire pressure  
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,  
replace it with a spare tire as soon as  
possible.  
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-  
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low  
tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of  
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the  
vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the  
TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low  
tire pressure warning light. This system will acti-  
vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds  
above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For more details, refer  
to “Warning/indicator lights and audible remind-  
ers” in the “Instruments and controls” section,  
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”  
in the “Starting and driving” section.  
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol  
tire sealant into the tires, as this may  
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure  
sensors.  
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE  
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-  
low:  
Stopping the vehicle  
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and  
away from traffic.  
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.  
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking  
brake. Shift the manual transmission into R  
(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, the TPMS will not function  
and the low tire pressure warning light  
will flash for approximately 1 minute.  
The light will remain on after 1 minute.  
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
4. Turn off the engine.  
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to  
signal professional road assistance person-  
nel that you need assistance.  
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle  
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic  
and clear of the vehicle.  
6-2 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WARNING  
● Make sure the parking brake is securely  
applied and the manual transmission is  
shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is  
shifted into P (Park).  
● Never change tires when the vehicle is  
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is  
hazardous.  
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is  
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-  
sional road assistance.  
WCE0044  
LCE0148  
Blocking wheels  
Getting the spare tire and tools  
1
Place suitable blocks  
at both the front and  
Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and  
᭺
1
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire  
spare tire cover. Remove the jack  
and wheel  
᭺
2
2
to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is  
nut wrench  
from the tool box.  
᭺
᭺
jacked up.  
WARNING  
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle  
may move and result in personal injury.  
In case of emergency 6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LCE0149  
LCE0183  
A
Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire. Remove  
the spare tire.  
Apply cloth  
between the wheel and jack rod to  
᭺
Removing the bolt-on wheel cover (if  
so equipped)  
prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.  
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or  
wheel surface.  
CAUTION  
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel  
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-  
sult in personal injury.  
The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts.  
The wheel cover will be removed along with the  
wheel when the nuts are removed.  
B
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod  
᭺
as illustrated.  
6-4 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Do not allow passengers to stay in the  
vehicle while it is on the jack.  
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off  
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to  
move.  
WCE0147  
WCE0160  
Jack-up point coupe  
Jack-up point sedan  
Jacking up vehicle and removing the  
damaged tire  
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never  
use any other part of the vehicle for jack  
support.  
WARNING  
● Never jack up the vehicle more than  
necessary.  
● Never get under the vehicle while it is  
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-  
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-  
port it with safety stands.  
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.  
● Do not start or run the engine while  
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the  
vehicle to move. This is especially true  
● Use only the jack provided with your  
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the  
jack provided with your vehicle on other  
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting  
only your vehicle during a tire change.  
for  
vehicles  
with  
limited  
slip  
differentials.  
In case of emergency 6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LCE0020  
WCE0056  
notches in the front or the rear as shown.  
Also fit the groove of the jack head between  
the notches as shown.  
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the  
correct placement and jack-up points for your  
specific vehicle model and jack type.  
Installing the spare tire  
The spare tire is designed for emergency  
use. See specific instructions under the  
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-  
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
The jack should be used on firm and  
level ground.  
Carefully read the caution label attached to  
the jack body and the following instruc-  
tions.  
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever  
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the  
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-  
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the  
tire.  
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by  
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut  
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts  
until the tire is off the ground.  
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-  
tween the wheel and hub.  
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten  
the wheel nuts finger tight.  
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up  
point as illustrated so the top of the jack  
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.  
Align the jack head between the two  
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel  
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until  
they are tight.  
6-6 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JUMP STARTING  
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire  
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel  
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely  
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.  
To start your engine with a booster battery, the  
instructions and precautions below must be fol-  
lowed.  
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been  
parked for three hours or more or driven  
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).  
A
B
C
D
in the sequence illustrated (  
,
,
,
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺  
,
E
). Lower the vehicle completely.  
WARNING  
᭺
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire  
and loading information label affixed to the  
driver side center pillar.  
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can  
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in  
severe injury or death. It could also  
damage your vehicle.  
WARNING  
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly  
tightened wheel nuts can cause the  
wheel to become loose or come off.  
This could cause an accident.  
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-  
ment in the vehicle.  
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always  
present in the vicinity of the battery.  
Keep all sparks and flames away from  
the battery.  
6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor  
carpeting over the damaged tire.  
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel  
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts  
to become loose.  
7. Close the trunk.  
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into  
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or  
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-  
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can  
cause severe burns. If the fluid should  
come into contact with anything, imme-  
diately flush the contacted area with  
water.  
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-  
hicle has been driven for 600 miles  
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,  
etc.).  
WARNING  
● Always make sure that the spare tire  
and jacking equipment are properly se-  
cured after use. Such items can become  
dangerous projectiles in an accident or  
sudden stop.  
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts  
to the specified torque with  
wrench.  
a
torque  
● The spare tire is designed for emer-  
gency use. See specific instructions un-  
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in  
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”  
section of this manual.  
● Keep battery out of the reach of  
children.  
Wheel nut tightening torque:  
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)  
● The booster battery must be rated at 12  
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery  
can damage your vehicle.  
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to  
specification at all times. It is recom-  
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to  
specifications at each lubrication interval.  
In case of emergency 6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Whenever working on or near a battery,  
always wear suitable eye protectors (for  
example, goggles or industrial safety  
spectacles) and remove rings, metal  
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean  
over the battery when jump starting.  
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen  
battery. It could explode and cause se-  
rious injury.  
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine  
cooling fan. It could come on at any  
time. Keep hands and other objects  
away from it.  
WCE0054  
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-  
lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)  
or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable Trans-  
mission). Switch off all unnecessary electri-  
cal systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,  
etc.).  
WARNING  
Always follow the instructions below.  
Failure to do so could result in damage to  
the charging system and cause personal  
injury.  
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,  
position the two vehicles to bring their bat-  
teries near each other.  
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so  
equipped). Cover the battery with an old  
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.  
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.  
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-  
A
B
C
D
᭺ ᭺ ᭺ ᭺  
lustrated (  
,
,
,
).  
6-8 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PUSH STARTING  
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS  
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an  
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if  
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal  
noise, etc., take the following steps.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
● Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive  
(ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for  
example, strut mounting bolt, engine  
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.  
● Do not push start this vehicle. The  
three-way catalyst may be damaged.  
● Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) models cannot be push-started or  
tow-started. Attempting to do so may  
cause transmission damage.  
WARNING  
● Make sure the jumper cables do not  
touch moving parts in the engine com-  
partment and that the cable clamps do  
not contact any other metal.  
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle  
overheats. Doing so could cause engine  
damage or a vehicle fire.  
● For manual transmission models, never  
try to start the vehicle by towing it.  
When the engine starts, the forward  
surge could cause the vehicle to collide  
with the tow vehicle.  
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,  
never remove the radiator cap while the  
engine is still hot. When the radiator  
cap is removed, pressurized hot water  
will spurt out, possibly causing serious  
injury.  
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and  
let it run for a few minutes.  
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-  
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-  
gine of the vehicle being jump started.  
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-  
ing out.  
CAUTION  
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for  
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does  
not start right away, turn the key off and  
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.  
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply  
the parking brake and move the shift selector  
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P  
(Park) (CVT).  
7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-  
nect the negative cable and then the positive  
cable.  
Do not stop the engine.  
2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so equipped).  
Open all the windows, move the heater or air  
conditioner temperature control to maximum  
hot and fan control to high speed.  
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be  
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover  
the vent holes as it may be contaminated  
with corrosive acid.  
In case of emergency 6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE  
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for  
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator  
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-  
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not  
open the hood further until no steam or  
coolant can be seen.  
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-  
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank  
with the engine running. Add coolant to the  
engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.  
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN  
dealer.  
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in  
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be  
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-  
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-  
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-  
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws  
and procedures for towing. To assure proper  
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your  
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service  
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have  
the service operator carefully read the following  
precautions:  
4. Open the engine hood.  
WARNING  
If steam or water is coming from the en-  
gine, stand clear to prevent getting  
burned.  
WARNING  
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or  
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is  
running. The radiator hoses and radiator  
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,  
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or  
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-  
gine.  
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being  
towed.  
● Never get under your vehicle after it has  
been lifted by a tow truck.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
● When towing, make sure that the trans-  
mission, axles, steering system and  
powertrain are in working condition. If  
any of these conditions apply, dollies or  
a flatbed tow truck must be used.  
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,  
jewelry or clothing to come into contact  
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the  
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling  
fan can start at any time.  
● Always attach safety chains before  
towing.  
6-10 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For information about towing your vehicle behind  
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”  
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
ACE0511  
SCE0199A  
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY  
NISSAN  
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed  
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or  
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.  
In case of emergency 6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● When towing Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) or manual trans-  
mission models with the rear wheels on  
the ground (if you do not use towing  
dollies): Always release the parking  
brake.  
CAUTION  
● Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-  
mission (CVT) models with the front  
wheels on the ground or four wheels on  
the ground (forward or backward), as  
this may cause serious and expensive  
damage to the transmission. If it is nec-  
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear  
wheels raised always use towing dollies  
under the front wheels.  
● When towing Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT) models with the  
front wheels on towing dollies, or when  
towing manual transmission models  
with the front wheels on the ground:  
LCE0138  
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck  
vehicle)  
– Turn the ignition switch to the OFF  
position, and secure the steering  
wheel in a straight-ahead position  
with a rope or similar device. Never  
secure the steering wheel by turning  
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-  
tion. This may damage the steering  
lock mechanism  
Pulling a stuck vehicle  
Do not use the hook (if so equipped) to tow the  
vehicle.  
– Move the shift selector to the N (Neu-  
tral) position.  
6-12 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rocking a stuck vehicle  
WARNING  
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,  
use the following procedure:  
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.  
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.  
This could cause them to explode and  
result in serious injury. Parts of your  
vehicle could also overheat and be  
damaged.  
1. Make sure the area in front and behind the  
vehicle is clear of obstructions.  
2. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear  
an area around the front tires.  
3. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-  
ward.  
CAUTION  
● Tow chains or cables must be attached  
only to the main structural members of  
the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body  
will be damaged.  
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)  
and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)  
and R (Reverse) (MT models).  
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible  
to maintain the rocking motion.  
● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free  
a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.  
Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle  
tie downs or recovery hooks.  
● Release the accelerator pedal before  
shifting between R (Reverse) and D  
(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R  
(Reverse) (MT models).  
● Always pull the cable straight out from  
the front or rear of the vehicle. Never  
pull the vehicle at an angle.  
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55  
km/h).  
● Pulling devices should be routed so  
they do not touch any part of the sus-  
pension, steering, brake or cooling  
systems.  
4. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few  
tries, contact a professional towing service  
to remove the vehicle.  
● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas  
straps are not recommended for use in  
vehicle towing or recovery.  
In case of emergency 6-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
6-14 In case of emergency  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Appearance and care  
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Waxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Tire dressings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4  
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Corrosion protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Most common factors contributing to vehicle  
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Environmental factors influence the rate of  
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEANING EXTERIOR  
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-  
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.  
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas  
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the  
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are  
open. Spray water under the body and in the  
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away  
road salt.  
CAUTION  
● Do not use car washes that use acid in  
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-  
cially brushless ones, use some acid for  
cleaning. The acid may react with some  
plastic vehicle components, causing  
them to crack. This could affect their  
appearance, and also could cause them  
not to function properly. Always check  
with your car wash to confirm that acid  
is not used.  
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your  
vehicle as soon as you can:  
●
after a rainfall to prevent possible damage  
from acid rain.  
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to  
avoid water spots.  
●
●
after driving on coastal roads.  
WAXING  
when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-  
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get  
on the paint surface.  
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and  
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is  
recommended to remove built-up wax residue  
and to avoid a weathered appearance before  
re-applying wax.  
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong  
household soap, strong chemical deter-  
gents, gasoline or solvents.  
●
when dust or mud builds up on the surface.  
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle  
inside a garage or in a covered area.  
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-  
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as  
the surface may become water-spotted.  
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the  
proper product.  
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a  
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body  
cover.  
●
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-  
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the  
wax.  
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough  
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care  
must be taken when removing  
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-  
stances so the paint surface is not  
scratched or damaged.  
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface  
when putting on or removing the body  
cover.  
●
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,  
cutting compounds or cleaners that may  
damage the vehicle finish.  
WASHING  
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing  
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the  
finish or leave swirl marks.  
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean  
water.  
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of  
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild  
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose  
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm  
(never hot) water.  
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,  
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to  
7-2 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film  
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to  
become coated with a film after the vehicle is  
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft  
cloth will easily remove this film.  
REMOVING SPOTS  
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,  
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the  
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or  
staining. Special cleaning products are available  
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory  
store.  
CAUTION  
When cleaning the inside of the windows,  
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive  
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant  
cleaners. They could damage the electri-  
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or  
rear window defroster elements.  
UNDERBODY  
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is  
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in  
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and  
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-  
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-  
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must  
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.  
WAI0005  
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS  
GLASS  
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-  
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during  
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If  
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.  
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier  
to clean if the high-mounted stop light is removed  
first.  
Be careful when removing the high-mounted  
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the  
high-mounted stop light wires.  
CAUTION  
Follow the directions below to avoid  
staining or discoloring the wheels:  
To remove the high-mounted stop light:  
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong  
acid or alkali contents to clean the  
wheels.  
1
Push toward rear of vehicle.  
᭺
2
Lift to remove.  
᭺
The high-mounted stop light must be properly  
reinstalled before driving your vehicle.  
Appearance and care 7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLEANING INTERIOR  
●
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help  
prevent it from entering the tire  
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to  
remove).  
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior  
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum  
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and  
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-  
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a  
dry, soft cloth.  
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the  
wheels when they are hot. The wheel  
temperature should be the same as am-  
bient temperature.  
●
●
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry  
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-  
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.  
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove  
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the  
cleaner is applied.  
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to  
maintain the appearance of the leather.  
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-  
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.  
CHROME PARTS  
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-  
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-  
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or  
bleach the seat material.  
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-  
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.  
TIRE DRESSINGS  
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean  
the meter and gauge lens.  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire  
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to  
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-  
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may  
react with the coating and form a compound. This  
compound may come off the tire while driving and  
stain the vehicle paint.  
WARNING  
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot  
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can  
damage the seat or occupant classifica-  
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-  
tion of the air bag system and result in  
serious personal injury.  
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the  
following precautions:  
●
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-  
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than  
with an oil-based tire dressing.  
7-4 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
●
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on  
the vents. These products can cause imme-  
diate damage and discoloration when  
spilled on interior surfaces.  
CAUTION  
● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-  
lar material.  
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and  
damaging to leather surfaces and  
should be removed promptly. Do not  
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,  
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-  
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as  
they may damage the leather’s natural  
finish.  
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-  
structions before using the air fresheners.  
FLOOR MATS  
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-  
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it  
easier to clean the interior. No matter what  
mats are used, be sure they are fitted for  
your vehicle and are properly positioned in  
the footwell to prevent interference with  
pedal operation. Mats should be maintained  
with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-  
come excessively worn.  
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-  
ommended by the manufacturer.  
WAI0006  
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on  
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-  
age the lens cover.  
Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side  
only)  
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to  
act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor  
mats have been specially designed for your ve-  
hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a  
grommet hole incorporated in it. Position the mat  
by placing the floor mat bracket hook through the  
floor mat grommet hole while centering the mat in  
the footwell.  
AIR FRESHENERS  
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect  
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,  
take the following precautions:  
●
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-  
manent discoloration when they contact ve-  
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-  
ener in a location that allows it to hang free  
and not contact an interior surface.  
Periodically check to make certain the mats are  
properly positioned.  
Appearance and care 7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CORROSION PROTECTION  
SEAT BELTS  
MOST COMMON FACTORS  
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE  
CORROSION  
Temperature  
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them  
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.  
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade  
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”  
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-  
tal restraint system” section of this manual.  
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-  
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.  
●
The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt  
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,  
and other areas.  
Air pollution  
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air  
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-  
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-  
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.  
●
Damage to paint and other protective coat-  
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or  
minor traffic accidents.  
WARNING  
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the  
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or  
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,  
since these materials may severely  
weaken the seat belt webbing.  
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE  
FROM CORROSION  
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS  
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF  
CORROSION  
●
●
●
●
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the  
vehicle clean.  
Always check for minor damage to the paint  
and repair it as soon as possible.  
Moisture  
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-  
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.  
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside  
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to  
avoid floor panel corrosion.  
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors  
open to avoid water accumulation.  
Check the underbody for accumulation of  
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water  
as soon as possible.  
Relative humidity  
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high  
relative humidity, especially those areas where  
the temperatures stay above freezing and where  
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is  
used.  
7-6 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-  
bris from the passenger compartment  
by washing it out with a hose. Remove  
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.  
● Never allow water or other liquids to  
come in contact with electronic compo-  
nents inside the vehicle as this may  
damage them.  
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are  
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion  
and deterioration of underbody components  
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,  
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.  
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned  
periodically.  
For additional protection against rust and corro-  
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-  
sult a NISSAN dealer.  
Appearance and care 7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
7-8 Appearance and care  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6  
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9  
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10  
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . .8-13  
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Brake and clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18  
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18  
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
In-cabin microfilter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21  
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21  
Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24  
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26  
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Front park/turn/sidemarker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38  
Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41  
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42  
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS  
GENERAL MAINTENANCE  
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-  
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-  
vice intervals to save you both time and money.  
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-  
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s  
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-  
sions and engine performance.  
Performing general maintenance checks requires  
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general  
automotive tools.  
During the normal day-to-day operation of the  
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-  
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If  
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or  
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a  
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you  
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that  
repairs are required.  
These checks or inspections can be done by you,  
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Where to go for service  
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that  
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general  
maintenance, is performed.  
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle  
appears to malfunction, have the systems  
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.  
When performing any checks or maintenance  
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-  
tions” later in this section.  
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who  
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper  
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-  
nance chain.  
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists  
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service  
information through technical bulletins, service  
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They  
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-  
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather  
than after they have worked on it.  
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL  
MAINTENANCE ITEMS  
Additional information on the following  
items with “ * ”is found later in this section.  
Scheduled maintenance  
For your convenience, both required and optional  
scheduled maintenance items are described and  
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance  
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure  
that necessary maintenance is performed on your  
NISSAN at regular intervals.  
Outside the vehicle  
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s  
service department performs the best job to meet  
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —  
in a reliable and economical way.  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
performed from time to time, unless otherwise  
specified.  
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors  
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure  
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,  
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.  
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the  
hood from opening when the primary latch is  
released.  
General maintenance  
General maintenance includes those items which  
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-  
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-  
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these  
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.  
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When driving in areas using road salt or other  
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.  
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at  
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be  
needed.  
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-  
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-  
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the  
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a  
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat  
away from the pedal.  
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.  
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail  
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all  
operating properly and installed securely. Also  
check headlight aim.  
●
For additional information regarding tires,  
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”  
(US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in  
the Warranty Information Booklet.  
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the  
vehicle to one side when applied.  
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking  
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,  
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if  
necessary.  
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular  
basis. Check the windshield at least every six  
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-  
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair  
facility.  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly  
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely  
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position  
without applying any brakes.  
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every  
7,500 miles (12,000 km).  
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or  
wear if they do not wipe properly.  
Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-  
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held  
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake  
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,  
see a NISSAN dealer.  
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often  
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-  
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the  
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully  
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.  
Inside the vehicle  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-  
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-  
hicle, etc.  
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat  
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they  
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in  
every position. Check that the head restraints  
move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so  
equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
transmitter components Replace the TPMS  
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap  
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.  
Additional information on the following  
items with an “*” is found later in this sec-  
tion.  
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle  
should pull to either side while driving on a  
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or  
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel  
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth  
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind  
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away  
from the pedal.  
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt  
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters  
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-  
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.  
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level  
when the engine is cold.  
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the  
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose  
connections.  
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-  
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard  
steering or strange noises.  
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts  
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.  
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-  
posed to corrosive substances such as those  
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very  
important to remove these substances from the  
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor  
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the  
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-  
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas  
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See  
the “Appearance and care” section of this  
manual.  
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking  
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.  
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain  
back into the oil pan.  
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all  
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.  
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that  
the wipers and washer operate properly and that  
the wipers do not streak.  
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose  
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the  
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of  
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust  
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the  
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and  
driving” section of this manual.  
Windshield defroster Check that the air  
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in  
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or  
air conditioner.  
Windshield washer fluid* Check that there is  
adequate fluid in the reservoir.  
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,  
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has  
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the  
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should  
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,  
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-  
diately.  
Under the hood and vehicle  
The maintenance items listed here should be  
checked periodically (for example, each time you  
check the engine oil or refuel).  
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It  
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-  
hicles operated in high temperatures or under  
severe conditions require frequent checks of the  
battery fluid level.  
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check  
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine  
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,  
cracks, etc.  
Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that  
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the  
MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.  
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the  
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,  
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS  
When performing any inspection or maintenance  
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent  
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to  
the vehicle. The following are general precau-  
tions which should be closely observed.  
● If you must run the engine in an en-  
closed space such as a garage, be sure  
there is proper ventilation for exhaust  
gases to escape.  
● Never leave the engine or the CVT re-  
lated component harness connector  
disconnected while the ignition switch  
is in the ON position.  
● Never get under the vehicle while it is  
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-  
sary to work under the vehicle, support  
it with safety stands.  
● Never connect or disconnect the battery  
or any transistorized component while  
the ignition switch is in the ON position.  
WARNING  
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-  
ply the parking brake securely and  
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle  
from moving. For manual transmission  
models, move the shift selector to N  
(Neutral). For CVT models, move the  
shift selector to P (Park).  
● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-  
matic engine cooling fan. It may come  
on at any time without warning, even if  
the ignition key is in the OFF position  
and the engine is not running. To avoid  
injury, always disconnect the negative  
battery cable before working near the  
fan.  
● Keep smoking materials, flame and  
sparks away from the fuel tank and  
battery.  
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel  
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by  
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines  
are under high pressure even when the  
engine is off.  
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF  
or LOCK position when performing any  
parts replacement or repairs.  
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section  
gives instructions regarding only those items  
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.  
● If you must work with the engine run-  
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair  
and tools away from moving fans, belts  
and any other moving parts.  
CAUTION  
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-  
able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-  
der information” in the “Technical and consumer  
information” section of this manual.  
● Do not work under the hood while the  
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and  
wait until it cools down.  
● It is advisable to secure or remove any  
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,  
such as rings, watches, etc. before  
working on your vehicle.  
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and  
coolant. Improperly disposed engine  
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle  
fluids can damage the environment. Al-  
ways conform to local regulations for  
disposal of vehicle fluid.  
You should be aware that incomplete or improper  
servicing may result in operating difficulties or  
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty  
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,  
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.  
● Always wear eye protection whenever  
you work on your vehicle.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK  
LOCATIONS  
QR25DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid reservoir  
2. Engine oil filler cap  
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid  
reservoir (M/T model)  
4. Air cleaner  
5. Fuse block  
6. Battery  
7. Fuse/Fusible link box  
8. Engine oil dipstick  
9. Radiator cap  
10. Drive belt location  
11. Engine coolant reservoir  
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
LDI0553  
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VQ35DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid reservoir  
2. Engine oil filler cap  
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid  
reservoir (M/T model)  
4. Air cleaner  
5. Fuse block  
6. Battery  
7. Fuse/Fusible link box  
8. Engine oil dipstick  
9. Radiator cap  
10. Drive belt location  
11. Engine coolant reservoir  
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
LDI0552  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM  
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory  
CAUTION  
with  
Genuine  
NISSAN  
Long  
Life  
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure  
to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long Life  
Antifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalent  
with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-  
freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled  
water. The use of other types of coolant  
solutions or coolant colors, such as or-  
ange, may damage the engine cooling  
system.  
Antifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-  
freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freeze  
solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.  
Additional engine cooling system additives are  
not necessary.  
WARNING  
● Never remove the radiator or coolant  
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.  
Wait until the engine and radiator cool  
down. Serious burns could be caused  
by high pressure fluid escaping from  
the radiator. See precautions in “If your  
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case  
of emergency” section of this manual.  
Outside temperature  
down to  
Genuine  
NISSAN  
Long Life  
Antifreeze/  
Coolant or  
equivalent  
Demineral-  
ized or dis-  
tilled water  
LDI0554  
°C  
°F  
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT  
LEVEL  
-34  
-29.2  
50%  
50%  
● The radiator is equipped with a pres-  
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when  
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below  
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-  
B
gine damage, use only  
NISSAN radiator cap.  
a
genuine  
the MIN level  
᭺
, add coolant to the MAX level  
᭺
A
. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant  
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If  
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the  
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and  
A
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level  
.
᭺
If the cooling system frequently requires  
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENGINE OIL  
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT  
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.  
The service procedure can be found in the  
NISSAN Service Manual.  
Improper servicing can result in reduced  
heater performance and engine overheat-  
ing.  
WARNING  
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,  
never change the coolant when the en-  
gine is hot.  
LDI0555  
LDI0556  
● Never remove the radiator cap when the  
engine is hot. Serious burns could be  
caused by high pressure fluid escaping  
from the radiator.  
QR25DE engine  
VQ35DE engine  
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
● Avoid direct skin contact with used  
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash  
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner  
as soon as possible.  
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches  
operating temperature.  
● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-  
dren and pets.  
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10  
minutes for the oil to drain back into  
the oil pan.  
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.  
Check your local regulations.  
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-  
insert it all the way.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTION  
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-  
erating the engine with an insufficient  
amount of oil can damage the engine, and  
such damage is not covered by warranty.  
WDI0492  
WDI0214  
QR25DE  
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil  
level. It should be between the H (High) and  
CHANGING ENGINE OIL  
B
L (Low) marks  
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below  
the L (Low) mark , remove the oil filler cap  
and pour recommended oil through the  
. This is the normal oper-  
᭺
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
A
᭺
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches  
operating temperature, then turn it off.  
C
opening. Do not overfill  
.
᭺
A
3. Remove the oil filler  
counterclockwise.  
cap by turning it  
᭺
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.  
It is normal to add some oil between oil  
maintenance intervals or during the  
break-in period, depending on the severity  
of operating conditions.  
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug  
B
.
᭺
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The drain and refill capacity depends on the  
oil temperature and drain time. Use these  
specifications for reference only. Always use  
the dipstick to determine when the proper  
amount of oil is in the engine.  
WARNING  
● Prolonged and repeated contact with  
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.  
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with  
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash  
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner  
as soon as possible.  
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around  
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-  
quired.  
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of  
children.  
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10  
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.  
Add engine oil if necessary.  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine  
oil may be hot.  
WDI0493  
VQ35DE  
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new  
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with  
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.  
B
5. Remove the drain plug  
with a wrench by  
᭺
turning it counterclockwise and completely  
drain the oil.  
Drain plug tightening torque:  
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)  
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and  
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine  
oil filter” later in this section.  
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through  
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler  
cap securely.  
●
●
Waste oil must be disposed of prop-  
erly.  
See “Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-  
sumer information”section of this manual for  
drain and refill capacity.  
Check your local regulations.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean  
engine oil.  
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance  
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.  
8. Start the engine and check for leakage  
around the oil filter. Correct as required.  
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10  
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if  
necessary.  
WDI0494  
WDI0495  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER  
CAUTION  
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply  
the parking brake.  
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine  
oil may be hot.  
2. Turn the engine off.  
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with  
a clean rag.  
A
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter  
.
᭺
A
4. Loosen the oil filter  
with an oil filter  
᭺
CAUTION  
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then  
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.  
Be sure to remove any old gasket material  
remaining on the sealing surface of the  
engine. Failure to do so could lead to  
engine damage.  
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE  
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID  
POWER STEERING FLUID  
CAUTION  
CAUTION  
● DO NOT OVERFILL.  
● Recommended fluid  
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.  
● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid  
NS-2-V. Do not mix with other fluids.  
is  
Genuine  
● Using transmission fluid other than  
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2-V will  
damage the CVT, which is not covered  
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited  
warranty.  
When checking or replacement of CVT Fluid is  
required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for  
servicing.  
LDI0557  
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT  
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir  
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -  
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the  
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-  
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).  
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-  
ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX  
depending on system fluid temperature. Remove  
the cap and fill through the opening.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BRAKE AND CLUTCH FLUID  
For further brake and clutch fluid specification  
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-  
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and  
consumer information” section of this manual.  
WARNING  
● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-  
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated  
fluid may damage the brake and clutch  
systems. The use of improper fluids can  
damage the brake system and affect  
the vehicle’s stopping ability.  
● Clean the filler cap before removing.  
LDI0558  
LDI0558  
● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and  
should be stored carefully in marked  
containers out of reach of children.  
BRAKE FLUID  
CLUTCH FLUID  
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the  
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake  
warning light comes on, add DOT 3 brake fluid up  
to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently,  
the system should be checked by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir  
(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is  
below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super  
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid  
up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-  
quently, the system should be checked by a  
NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-  
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is  
spilled, immediately wash the surface  
with water.  
For further brake and clutch fluid specification  
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-  
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and  
consumer information” section of this manual.  
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDOW WASHER FLUID  
BATTERY  
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving  
conditions require an increased amount of win-  
dow washer fluid.  
●
Keep the battery surface clean and dry.  
Clean the battery with a solution of baking  
soda and water.  
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-  
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-  
freeze or equivalent.  
●
●
Make certain the terminal connections are  
clean and securely tightened.  
If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or  
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery  
terminal cable to prevent discharge.  
CAUTION  
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze  
coolant for window washer solution.  
This may result in damage to the paint.  
WARNING  
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an  
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-  
gen gas generated by the battery is ex-  
plosive. Explosive gases can cause  
blindness or injury. Do not allow battery  
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics  
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can  
cause blindness or injury. After touch-  
ing a battery or battery cap, do not  
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly  
wash your hands. If the acid contacts  
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately  
flush with water for at least 15 minutes  
and seek medical attention.  
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir  
tank with washer fluid concentrates at  
full strength. Some methyl alcohol  
based washer fluid concentrates may  
permanently stain the grille if spilled  
while filling the window washer reser-  
voir tank.  
LDI0559  
WINDOW WASHER FLUID  
RESERVOIR  
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.  
Add window washer fluid when the low window  
washer fluid warning light comes on.  
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with  
water to the manufacturer’s recom-  
mended levels before pouring the fluid  
into the window washer reservoir tank.  
Do not use the window washer reservoir  
tank to mix the washer fluid concen-  
trate and water.  
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the  
cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window  
washer fluid into the tank opening.  
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better  
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield  
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-  
structions for the mixture ratio.  
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent  
caps tight and the battery level.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in  
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can  
cause a higher load on the battery  
which can generate heat, reduce bat-  
tery life, and in some cases lead to an  
explosion.  
● When working on or near a battery, al-  
ways wear suitable eye protection and  
remove all jewelry.  
● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-  
cessories contain lead and lead com-  
pounds. Wash hands after handling.  
● Keep battery out of the reach of  
children.  
WDI0224  
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as  
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery  
case.  
LDI0302  
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is  
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled  
water to bring the level up to the bottom of  
the filler opening. Do not overfill. . Reinstall  
the vent caps.  
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DRIVE BELT  
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under  
severe conditions require frequent checks of the  
battery fluid level.  
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual  
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is  
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced  
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.  
JUMP STARTING  
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-  
tion and tension in accordance with the  
maintenance schedule found in the  
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.  
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”  
in the “In case of emergency” section of this  
manual. If the engine does not start by jump  
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.  
Contact a NISSAN dealer.  
WDI0673  
QR25DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid pump  
2. Water pump  
3. Generator  
4. Air conditioner  
5. Crank pulley  
6. Automatic belt tensioner  
WARNING  
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the  
OFF or LOCK position before servicing  
drive belt. The engine could rotate  
unexpectedly.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPARK PLUGS  
WARNING  
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are  
off and that the parking brake is engaged  
securely.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-  
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket  
can damage the spark plugs.  
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN  
dealer for assistance.  
LDI0564  
SDI1895  
VQ35DE engine  
1. Power steering fluid pump  
2. Generator  
3. Air conditioner  
4. Crank pulley  
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS  
Iridium-tipped spark plugs (if so  
equipped)  
A
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped  
᭺
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type  
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-  
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN  
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service  
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-  
ping.  
●
Always replace spark plugs with rec-  
ommended or equivalent ones.  
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AIR CLEANER  
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or  
attempt to start the engine with the air  
cleaner removed. Doing so could result  
in serious injury.  
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER  
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-  
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces  
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is  
located behind the glove box. Refer to the  
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for  
change intervals.  
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN  
dealer.  
LDI0562  
LDI0563  
Type A  
Type B  
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and  
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance  
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-  
nance Guide.”When replacing the filter, wipe the  
inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the  
cover with a damp cloth.  
WARNING  
● Operating the engine with the air  
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-  
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not  
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if  
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and  
the engine backfires, you could be  
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner  
removed, and be careful when working  
on the engine with the air cleaner  
removed.  
To remove the air cleaner filter, push the tabs and  
pull the unit upward.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES  
6. Return the wiper to its original position and  
release it until it has made contact with the  
windshield.  
CLEANING  
If your windshield is not clear after using the  
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters  
when running, wax or other material may be on  
the blade or windshield.  
CAUTION  
● After wiper blade replacement, return  
the wiper arm to its original position;  
otherwise it may be damaged when the  
hood is opened.  
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer  
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is  
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear  
water.  
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the  
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-  
aged from wind pressure.  
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked  
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then  
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-  
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades  
and using the wiper, replace the blades.  
WDI0594  
REPLACING  
CAUTION  
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.  
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-  
age the windshield and impair driver  
vision.  
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.  
2
Push the release tab, then move the wiper  
blade down the wiper arm to remove.  
᭺
3
Remove the wiper blade.  
᭺
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper  
arm until it clicks into place.  
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the  
groove.  
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BRAKES  
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the  
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.  
Proper brake inspection intervals should  
be followed. For more information regarding  
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-  
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-  
vice and Maintenance Guide”.  
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES  
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting  
brakes.  
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust  
every time the brake pedal is applied.  
WARNING  
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system  
check if the brake pedal height does not  
return to normal.  
BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS  
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible  
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-  
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-  
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in  
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the  
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes  
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator  
sound is heard.  
WDI0570  
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not  
to let wax get into the washer nozzle . This may  
cause clogging or improper windshield washer  
operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it  
A
᭺
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-  
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may  
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to  
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the  
function or performance of the brake system.  
B
with a needle or small pin  
.
᭺
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FUSES  
LDI0455  
LDI0457  
LDI0560  
A
Two types of fuses are used. Type  
is used in  
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,  
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse  
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not  
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the  
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.  
᭺
ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type  
B
is used in the passenger compartment fuse  
᭺
CAUTION  
box.  
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower  
amperage rating than specified on the  
fuse box cover. This could damage the  
electrical system or cause a fire.  
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They  
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse  
box.  
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-  
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the  
underhood fuse boxes.  
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-  
partment and passenger compartment fuse  
boxes.  
If any electrical equipment does not come on,  
check for an open fuse.  
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight  
switch are OFF.  
2. Open the engine hood.  
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the  
tab and lifting the cover up.  
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The  
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse  
block in the passenger compartment.  
WDI0452  
A
5. If the fuse is open  
, replace it with a new  
᭺
B
fuse  
.
᭺
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical  
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Fusible links  
If the electrical equipment does not operate and  
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible  
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,  
replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WDI0452  
WDI0402  
Type A  
A
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.  
4. If the fuse is open  
, replace it with an  
.
᭺
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT  
B
equivalent good fuse  
᭺
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.  
CAUTION  
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical  
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN  
dealer.  
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower  
amperage rating than specified on the  
fuse box cover. This could damage the  
electrical system or cause a fire.  
If any electrical equipment does not operate,  
check for an open fuse.  
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight  
switch are OFF.  
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.  
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
BATTERY REPLACEMENT  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to allow children to swallow  
the battery or removed parts.  
LDI0456  
Type B  
WDI0567  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operation is subject to the following two  
conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device  
must accept any interference received, in-  
cluding interference that may cause undes-  
ired operation of the device.  
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™  
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-  
lows:  
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-  
gent Key.  
A
B
2. Insert a small screwdriver  
into the slit  
᭺
᭺
of the corner and twist it to separate the  
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to  
protect the casing.  
3. Replace the battery with a new one.  
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-  
lent.  
WDI0568  
● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-  
tric terminals as doing so could cause a  
malfunction.  
C
᭺ ᭺  
D
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated  
.
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.  
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for  
replacement.  
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding  
the battery across the contact points will  
seriously deplete the storage capacity.  
FCC Notice:  
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-  
proved by the party responsible for compli-  
ance could void the user’s authority to op-  
erate the equipment.  
● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-  
tom of the case.  
This device complies with Part 15 of the  
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry  
Canada.  
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LIGHTS  
HEADLIGHTS  
Replacing the xenon headlight bulb (if  
so equipped)  
FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKER  
LIGHT  
● Do not leave the headlight assembly  
open without a bulb installed for a long  
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,  
etc. entering the headlight body may  
affect bulb performance. Remove the  
bulb from the headlight assembly just  
before a replacement bulb is installed.  
Bulb replacement requires the removal of the  
headlight assembly. If replacement is required,  
see your NISSAN dealer.  
WARNING  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
Ꮨ
● Only touch the base when handling the  
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.  
Touching the glass could significantly  
affect bulb life and/or headlight  
performance.  
When xenon headlights are on, they pro-  
duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric  
shock, never attempt to modify or disas-  
semble. Always have your xenon head-  
lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For  
additional information, see “Headlight  
and turn signal switch” in the “Instru-  
ments and controls” section.  
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed  
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may  
break if the glass envelope is scratched  
or the bulb is dropped.  
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb  
● Use the same number and wattage as  
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which  
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-  
cause the headlight assembly must be removed  
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your  
NISSAN dealer.  
shown in the chart.  
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the  
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A  
temperature difference between the inside and  
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not  
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect  
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
CAUTION  
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing  
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is  
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS  
Item  
Wattage (W)  
Bulb No.*1  
Headlight assembly *2  
Low (Halogen)  
Low (Xenon)  
High  
55  
35  
65  
8
H11  
D2R  
H9  
Park  
168  
Turn  
27  
3457NAK  
Sidemarker  
Sedan  
Coupe  
5
5
55  
—
168  
W5W  
H11  
Front fog light (if so equipped) *2  
Step light  
194  
Rear combination light  
Tail/Stop  
8/27  
27  
3157K  
3156  
Turn  
Backup (reversing)  
Sedan  
18  
13  
5
921  
912  
W5W  
Coupe  
License plate light *2  
High-mounted stop light *2  
Inside (coupe)  
Inside (sedan)  
Spoiler (if so equipped)  
Front map light  
Rear map light  
Trunk light  
—
18  
—
8
LED  
921  
LED  
B5  
B5  
158  
8
3.4  
—
—
Vanity mirror light  
HTU–14v  
—
Glove box light *2  
*1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.  
*2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.  
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Coupe  
1. Mirror-mounted turn signal light  
(if so equipped)  
2. Interior light  
3. Map light  
4. Headlamp assembly  
5. Fog light (if so equipped)  
6. Step light  
7. High-mount stoplight  
8. Trunk light  
9. License plate light  
10. Rear combination light  
WDI0626  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sedan  
1. Rear map light  
2. Front map light  
3. Step light  
4. Headlamp assembly  
5. Fog light (if so equipped)  
6. High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)  
7. Trunk light  
8. Spoiler mounted stoplight  
(if so equipped)  
9. Rear combination light  
10. License plate light  
11. Mirror-mounted turn signal light  
(if so equipped)  
WDI0680  
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicates bulb installation  
LDI0341  
Step light  
1
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
᭺
WDI0306  
Replacement procedures  
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When  
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light  
and/or cover.  
Indicates bulb removal  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LDI0571  
WDI0632  
Map light  
Interior light  
1
1
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
Use a cloth  
to protect the housing.  
᭺
᭺
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear combination light  
To access the bulbs in the rear combination light:  
1
Remove the fasteners. Carefully push back  
the carpet.  
᭺
2
Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rear  
combination light.  
᭺
3
Rotate the bulb(s) counterclockwise and  
pull out to remove:  
᭺
A
Turn signal light  
᭺
B
Sidemarker light  
᭺
C
Tail/stop light  
᭺
D
Backup light  
᭺
WDI0635  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WHEELS AND TIRES  
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the  
“In case of emergency” section of this  
manual.  
Tire inflation pressure  
Check the tire pressures (including the  
spare) often and always prior to long dis-  
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-  
sure specifications are shown on the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label  
or the Tire and Loading Information label  
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.  
The Tire and Loading Information label is  
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire  
pressures should be checked regularly  
because:  
TIRE PRESSURE  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS)  
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It  
monitors tire pressure of all tires except  
the spare. When the low tire pressure  
warning light is lit, one or more of your  
tires is significantly under-inflated.  
WDI0343  
Trunk light  
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.  
The TPMS will activate only when the  
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH  
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-  
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for  
example a flat tire while driving).  
● Tires can lose air suddenly when  
driven over potholes or other objects  
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while  
parking.  
The tire pressures should be checked  
when the tires are cold. The tires are  
considered COLD after the vehicle has  
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven  
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate  
speeds.  
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-  
sure warning light”in the “Instruments and  
controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-  
ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and  
driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In  
case of emergency” section.  
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-  
der inflation, may adversely affect  
tire life and vehicle handling.  
● Before taking a long trip, or  
whenever you heavily load your  
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge  
to ensure that the tire pressures  
are at the specified level.  
WARNING  
● Improperly inflated tires can fail  
● For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
suddenly and cause an accident.  
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating  
(GVWR) is located on the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-  
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-  
pacity is indicated on the Tire and  
Loading Information label (if so  
equipped). Do not load your ve-  
hicle beyond this capacity. Over-  
loading your vehicle may result in  
reduced tire life, unsafe operat-  
ing conditions due to premature  
tire failure, or unfavorable han-  
dling characteristics and could  
also lead to a serious accident.  
Loading beyond the specified ca-  
pacity may also result in failure of  
other vehicle components.  
“Tire  
Safety  
Information”  
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-  
mation Booklet.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
᭺
Spare tire size (if so equipped).  
LDI0549  
4
Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to  
this pressure when the tires are cold.  
Tires are considered COLD after the  
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more  
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6  
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-  
mended cold tire inflation is set by the  
manufacturer to provide the best bal-  
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,  
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the  
vehicle’s GVWR.  
Tire and loading information label  
᭺
1
᭺
Seating capacity: The maximum num-  
ber of occupants that can be seated  
in the vehicle.  
2
᭺
Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-  
mation in the “Technical and con-  
sumer information” section.  
3
᭺
Original tire size: The size of the tires  
originally installed on the vehicle at  
the factory.  
5
᭺
Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later  
in this section.  
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge  
stem and compare to the specifica-  
tion shown on the Tire and Loading  
Information label.  
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too  
much air is added, press the core of  
the valve stem briefly with the tip of  
the gauge stem to release pressure.  
Recheck the pressure and add or  
release air as needed.  
6. Install the valve stem cap.  
LDI0393  
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,  
including the spare.  
Checking tire pressure  
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the  
tire.  
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely  
onto the valve stem. Do not press too  
hard or force the valve stem side-  
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing  
sound of air escaping from the tire is  
heard while checking the pressure,  
reposition the gauge to eliminate this  
leakage.  
3. Remove the gauge.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Size  
Cold Tire Inflation Pres-  
sure  
Front Original Tire  
Rear Original Tire  
Spare Tire  
P215/60/R16  
P215/55R17  
P235/45R18  
P215/60R16  
P215/55R17  
P235/45R18  
220 kPa, 32 PSI  
230 kPa, 33 PSI  
220 kPa, 32 PSI  
230 kPa, 33 PSI  
T135/70R16  
T135/90R16  
420 kPa, 60 PSI  
WDI0394  
Example  
TIRE LABELING  
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the  
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-  
tifies and describes the fundamental  
characteristics of the tire and also pro-  
vides the tire identification number (TIN)  
for safety standard certification. The TIN  
can be used to identify the tire in case of a  
recall.  
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not  
drive the vehicle faster than the tire  
speed rating.  
WDI0395  
Example  
1
᭺
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.  
Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)  
5. Two-digit number (15): This number  
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.  
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-  
signed for passenger vehicles (not all  
tires have this information).  
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This  
number is the tire’s load index. It is a  
measurement of how much weight  
each tire can support. You may not  
find this information on all tires be-  
cause it is not required by law.  
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-  
ber gives the width in millimeters of  
the tire from sidewall edge to side-  
wall edge.  
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,  
known as the aspect ratio, gives the  
tire’s ratio of height to width.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
᭺
Tire ply composition and material  
The number of layers or plies of rubber-  
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-  
ers also must indicate the materials in the  
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,  
and others.  
4
sure  
Maximum permissible inflation pres-  
᭺
This number is the greatest amount of air  
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do  
not exceed the maximum permissible in-  
flation pressure.  
WDI0396  
Example  
5
᭺
Maximum load rating  
2
᭺
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code  
(Optional).  
TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a  
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX  
XXXX)  
This number indicates the maximum load  
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-  
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires  
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has  
the same load rating as the factory in-  
stalled tire.  
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-  
ture.  
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-  
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol  
can be placed above, below or to the  
left or right of the Tire Identification  
Number.  
6. Four numbers represent the week  
and year the tire was built. For ex-  
ample, the numbers 3103 means the  
31st week of 2003. If these numbers  
are missing, then look on the other  
sidewall of the tire.  
6
᭺
Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”  
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-  
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).  
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s  
identification mark.  
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.  
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
᭺
The word “radial”  
TYPES OF TIRES  
Summer tires  
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models  
to provide superior performance on dry roads.  
Summer tire performance is substantially re-  
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have  
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.  
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has  
radial structure.  
WARNING  
● When changing or replacing tires, be  
sure all four tires are of the same type  
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and  
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be  
able to help you with information about  
tire type, size, speed rating and  
availability.  
8
᭺
Manufacturer or brand name  
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.  
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy  
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of  
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four  
wheels.  
Other Tire-related Terminology  
In addition to the many terms that are  
defined throughout this section, Intended  
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that  
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering  
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or  
model name molding that is higher or  
deeper than the same molding on the  
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-  
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical  
tire that has a particular side that must  
always face outward when mounted on a  
vehicle.  
● Replacement tires may have a lower  
speed rating than the factory equipped  
tires, and may not match the potential  
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed  
the maximum speed rating of the tire.  
Snow tires  
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select  
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the  
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can  
adversely affect the safety and handling of your  
vehicle.  
● For additional information regarding  
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-  
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-  
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-  
tion Booklet.  
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings  
than factory equipped tires and may not match  
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-  
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.  
All season tires  
If you install snow tires, they must be the same  
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all  
four wheels.  
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-  
els to provide good performance all year, includ-  
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season  
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S  
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow  
traction than All Season tires and may be more  
appropriate in some areas.  
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires  
may be used. However, some U.S. states and  
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check  
local, state and provincial laws before installing  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of  
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be  
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.  
A tire chain that provides the specified amount of  
space will provide the necessary clearance be-  
tween the tire and the closest vehicle suspension  
or body component. The minimum clearances are  
determined using the factory-equipped tires.  
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain  
tensioners when recommended by the tire chain  
manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links  
of the tire chain must be secured or removed to  
prevent the possibility of whipping action dam-  
age to the fenders or underbody. If possible,  
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire  
chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.  
Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or  
vehicle handling and performance may be ad-  
versely affected.  
TIRE CHAINS  
CAUTION  
Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can  
be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong  
Class “S” chains on this vehicle will cause  
damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use  
tire chains/cables, you should use a tire  
chain that meets the minimum clearances  
for your vehicle.  
LDI0574  
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to  
location. Check the local laws before installing  
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure  
they are the proper size for the tires on your  
vehicle and are installed according to the chain  
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain that  
Tire chains must be installed only on the  
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.  
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire.  
A
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with  
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage  
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to  
some overstress.  
is designed to provide the specified space  
᭺
1
between the installed tire chain  
and where the  
᭺
2
tire meets the rim  
as shown on the chart.  
Minimum space required  
.7 in (17 mm)  
᭺
Wheel size  
16 in  
17 in  
.2 in (4 mm)  
18 in  
.2 in (4 mm)  
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Wheel nut tightening torque:  
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)  
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-  
ened to specifications at all times. It  
is recommended that wheel nuts be  
tightened to specification at each  
tire rotation interval.  
WARNING  
● After rotating the tires, check and  
adjust the tire pressure.  
● Retighten the wheel nuts when  
the vehicle has been driven for  
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in  
cases of a flat tire, etc.).  
WDI0258  
WDI0259  
1. Wear indicator  
2. Location mark  
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES  
Tire rotation  
Tire wear and damage  
● Do not include the spare tire in  
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires  
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).  
the tire rotation.  
WARNING  
● For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
● Tires should be periodically in-  
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-  
ing or objects caught in the tread.  
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging  
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)  
should be replaced.  
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-  
gency” section of this manual for tire re-  
placing procedures.  
“Tire  
Safety  
Information”  
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-  
mation Booklet.  
As soon as possible, tighten the  
wheel nuts to the specified torque  
with a torque wrench.  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Replacing wheels and tires  
● If the wheels are changed for any rea-  
son, always replace with wheels which  
have the same off-set dimension.  
Wheels of a different off-set could  
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-  
hicle handling characteristics, affect  
the VDC system and/or interference  
with the brake discs/drums. Such inter-  
ference can lead to decreased braking  
efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe  
wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the  
“Technical and consumer information”  
section of this manual for wheel off-set  
dimensions.  
● The original tires have built-in  
tread wear indicators. When the  
wear indicators are visible, the  
tire(s) should be replaced.  
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread  
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity  
as originally equipped. Recommended types and  
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the  
“Technical and consumer information” section of  
this manual.  
● Tires degrade with age and use.  
Have tires, including the spare,  
over 6 years old checked by a  
qualified technician because  
some tire damage may not be ob-  
vious. Replace the tires as neces-  
sary to prevent tire failure and  
possible personal injury.  
WARNING  
● The use of tires other than those recom-  
mended or the mixed use of tires of  
different brands, construction (bias,  
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns  
can adversely affect the ride, braking,  
handling, VDC system, ground clear-  
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain  
clearance, speedometer calibration,  
headlight aim and bumper height.  
Some of these effects may lead to acci-  
dents and could result in serious per-  
sonal injury.  
● Improper service of the spare tire  
may result in serious personal in-  
jury. If it is necessary to repair the  
spare tire, contact a NISSAN  
dealer.  
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel  
is replaced, the TPMS will not function  
and the low tire pressure warning light  
will flash for approximately 1 minute.  
The light will remain on after 1 minute.  
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as  
possible for tire replacement and/or  
system resetting.  
● For additional information re-  
garding tires, refer to “Important  
Tire Safety Information” (US) or  
● If your vehicle was originally equipped  
with 4 tires that were the same size and  
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,  
install the new tires on the rear axle.  
Placing new tires on the front axle may  
cause loss of vehicle control in some  
driving conditions and cause an acci-  
dent and personal injury.  
“Tire  
Safety  
Information”  
● Replacing tires with those not originally  
specified by NISSAN could affect the  
proper operation of the TPMS.  
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-  
mation Booklet.  
8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
For additional information regarding  
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety  
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-  
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-  
formation Booklet.  
● Do not install a damaged or deformed  
wheel or tire even if it has been re-  
paired. Such wheels or tires could have  
structural damage and could fail with-  
out warning.  
WARNING  
● The spare tire should be used for emer-  
gency use only. It should be replaced  
with the standard tire at the first oppor-  
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-  
tial damage.  
● The use of retread tires is not  
recommended.  
Care of wheels  
● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY  
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid  
sharp turns and abrupt braking while  
driving.  
●
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle  
to maintain their appearance.  
● For additional information regarding  
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-  
formation”(US) or “Tire Safety Informa-  
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-  
tion Booklet.  
●
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the  
wheel is changed or the underside of the  
vehicle is washed.  
● Periodically check spare tire inflation  
pressure. Always keep the pressure of  
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire  
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).  
●
●
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing  
the wheels.  
Wheel balance  
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling  
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get  
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-  
anced as required.  
● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare  
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at  
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).  
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or  
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of  
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.  
● When driving on roads covered with  
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire should be used on the  
rear wheels and the original tire used  
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use  
tire chains only on the front (original)  
tires.  
●
NISSAN recommends waxing the road  
wheels to protect against road salt in areas  
where it is used during winter.  
Wheel balance service should be per-  
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.  
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle  
could lead to mechanical damage.  
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY  
spare tire)  
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-  
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.  
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or  
involved in an accident:  
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE  
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate  
than the standard tire. Replace the  
spare tire as soon as the tread wear  
indicators appear.  
● Do not use the spare tire on other  
vehicles.  
● Do not use more than one spare tire at  
the same time.  
● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-  
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.  
CAUTION  
● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-  
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains  
will not fit properly and may cause dam-  
age to the vehicle.  
● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY  
spare tire is smaller than the original  
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To  
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not  
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive  
the vehicle through an automatic car  
wash since it may get caught.  
8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Technical and consumer information  
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil  
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
When traveling or registering your vehicle in  
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Vehicle identification number  
Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13  
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15  
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15  
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16  
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16  
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19  
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19  
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23  
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24  
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25  
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25  
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . .9-26  
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-27  
In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28  
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED  
FUEL/LUBRICANTS  
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure  
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.  
Capacity (Approximate)  
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants  
US measure  
20 gal  
Imp measure  
16-5/8 gal  
Liter  
75.6  
Fuel  
See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.  
Engine oil *6  
Drain and Refill  
With oil filter change  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
4-7/8 qt  
4-7/8 qt  
4-1/2 qt  
4-1/2 qt  
4 qt  
4 qt  
3-3/4 qt  
3-3/4 qt  
4.6  
4.6  
4.3  
4.3  
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1  
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1  
Without oil filter  
change  
Cooling system  
With reservoir  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
2 gal  
2-1/8 gal  
—
1-5/8 gal  
1-3/4 gal  
—
7.6  
8.2  
50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent  
50% Demineralized or distilled water  
Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi  
75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85  
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *2  
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*3  
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *4 or equivalent  
DOT 3  
Manual transmission gear oil  
—
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid  
Power steering fluid (PSF)  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Brake and clutch fluid  
Multi-purpose grease  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)  
HFC-134a (R-134a) *5  
NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *5  
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-  
freeze fluid or equivalent  
Air conditioning system refrigerant  
Air conditioning system oil  
Windshield washer fluid  
*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.”  
*2: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT transmission, which is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.  
*3: DEXRON™ VI type ATF can be used.  
*4: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.  
*5: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”  
*6: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.  
9-2 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-  
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station  
manager.  
FUEL RECOMMENDATION  
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is not designed to run on  
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage  
the fuel system components and is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-  
ited warranty.  
For 2.5L engine  
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane  
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-  
ber (Research octane number 91).  
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take  
the following precautions as the usage of such  
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems  
and/or fuel system damage.  
For 3.5L engine  
Gasoline specifications  
●
The fuel should be unleaded and have  
an octane rating no lower than that  
recommended for unleaded gasoline.  
NISSAN recommends the use of premium un-  
leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least  
91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research  
octane number 96). If unleaded premium gaso-  
line is not available, you may use unleaded regular  
gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI  
number (Research octane number 91), but you  
may notice a decrease in performance.  
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets  
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-  
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-  
bile manufacturers developed this specification  
to improve emission control system and vehicle  
performance. Ask your service station manager if  
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.  
●
If an oxygenate-blend other than  
methanol blend is used, it should con-  
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.  
(MTBE may, however, be added up to  
15%.)  
Reformulated gasoline  
●
If a methanol blend is used, it should  
contain no more than 5% methanol  
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It  
should also contain a suitable amount  
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-  
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-  
lated with appropriate cosolvents and  
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol  
blends may cause fuel system damage  
and/or vehicle performance problems.  
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-  
able to ensure that all methanol blends  
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-  
hicles.  
CAUTION  
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-  
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially  
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN  
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-  
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when  
available.  
● Using a fuel other than that specified  
could adversely affect the emission  
control system, and may also affect the  
warranty coverage.  
● Under no circumstances should  
leaded gasoline be used, because this  
will damage the three-way catalyst.  
a
Gasoline containing oxygenates  
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-  
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol  
with or without advertising their presence.  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of  
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-  
Technical and consumer information 9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-  
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after  
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately  
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a  
low blend of MTBE.  
Octane rating tips  
CAUTION  
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane  
rating lower than recommended can cause  
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark  
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-  
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you  
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even  
when using gasoline of the stated octane  
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock  
while holding a steady speed on level  
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the  
condition. Failure to correct the condition  
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN  
is not responsible.  
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on  
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle  
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel  
can damage fuel system components  
and is not covered by the NISSAN new  
vehicle limited warranty.  
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-  
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can  
cause paint damage.  
● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%  
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded  
gasoline.  
E–85 fuel  
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel  
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can  
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do  
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government  
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing  
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange  
and black label with the common abbreviation or  
the appropriate percentage for that region.  
● U.S. government regulations require  
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-  
fied by a small, square, orange and  
black label with the common abbrevia-  
tion or the appropriate percentage for  
that region.  
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark  
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may  
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine  
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-  
countered, have your vehicle checked at a  
NISSAN dealer.  
Aftermarket fuel additives  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any  
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-  
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit  
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.  
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish  
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or  
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel  
system and engine.  
However, now and then you may notice  
light spark knock for a short time while  
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a  
cause for concern, because you get the  
greatest fuel benefit when there is light  
spark knock for a short time under heavy  
engine load.  
9-4 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil viscosity  
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes  
with temperature. Because of this, it is important  
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the  
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-  
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil  
viscosity other than that recommended could  
cause serious engine damage.  
Selecting the correct oil filter  
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a  
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-  
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its  
equivalent for the reason described in “Change  
intervals.”  
WTI0183  
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-  
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-  
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which  
do not have the specified quality label should not  
be used as they could cause engine damage.  
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER  
RECOMMENDATIONS  
Change intervals  
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your  
engine are based on the use of the specified  
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters  
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding  
recommended oil and filter change intervals  
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine  
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-  
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-  
ranty.  
Selecting the correct oil  
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality  
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory Oil additives  
engine life and performance. See “Capacities  
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil  
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this  
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an  
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel  
economy.  
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-  
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-  
tenance intervals are followed.  
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been  
previously used should not be used.  
Select only engine oils that meet the American  
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-  
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval  
Technical and consumer information 9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine  
oil when it was built. You do not have to change  
the oil before the first recommended change  
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend  
upon how you use your vehicle.  
CAUTION  
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will  
cause severe damage to the air condition-  
ing system and will require the replace-  
ment of all air conditioner system  
components.  
Operation under the following conditions may  
require more frequent oil and filter changes:  
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your  
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone  
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the  
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-  
tions require the recovery and recycling of any  
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-  
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained  
technicians and equipment needed to recover  
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-  
ant.  
●
repeated short distance driving at cold out-  
side temperatures  
●
●
●
●
driving in dusty conditions  
extensive idling  
towing a trailer  
stop and go commuting  
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance  
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.  
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air  
conditioner system.  
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM  
REFRIGERANT AND OIL  
RECOMMENDATIONS  
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN  
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-  
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSAN  
A/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-  
lents.  
9-6 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIFICATIONS  
ENGINE  
Model  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
Type  
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC  
4-cylinder in-line  
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC  
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°  
3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)  
213.45 (3,498)  
Cylinder arrangement  
Bore x Stroke  
Displacement  
Firing order  
in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)  
cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488)  
1–3–4–2  
1–2–3–4–5–6  
Idle speed  
M/T  
CVT (in “N” position)  
No adjustment is necessary.  
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle  
speed)  
CO % at idle  
Spark plug  
DILKAR6A-11  
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)  
Timing chain  
FXE22HR-11  
0.043 (1.1)  
Spark plug gap (Nominal)  
Camshaft operation  
Timing chain  
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.  
Technical and consumer information 9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHEELS AND TIRES  
Wheel type  
Aluminum/Steel  
Aluminum  
Size  
Offset in (mm)  
1.77 (45)  
16 x 7JJ  
17 x 7 1/2JJ  
18 x 7.5JJ  
16 x 4T  
1.77 (45)  
Aluminum  
1.77 (45)  
T type (Spare)  
1.77 (45)  
Tire size  
P215/60R16  
P215/55R17  
P235/45R18  
T135/70R16  
T135/90R16  
Spare tire  
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS  
Coupe  
Sedan  
Overall length  
Overall width  
Overall height  
Front track  
Rear track  
Wheelbase  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
in (mm)  
182.5 (4,636)  
70.7 (1,795)  
55.3 (1,405)  
61.0 (1,549)  
60.8 (1,544)  
105.3 (2,675)  
189.8 (4,820)  
70.7 (1,795)  
57.9 (1,471)  
61.0 (1,549)  
61.0 (1,549)  
109.3 (2,776)  
Gross vehicle weight rating  
lb (kg)  
Gross axle weight rating  
Front  
Rear  
See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the center pillar between the driver’s side front  
and rear doors.  
lb (kg)  
lb (kg)  
9-8 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING  
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER  
COUNTRY  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION  
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-  
hicle in another country, you should first find  
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-  
cle’s engine.  
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low  
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles  
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-  
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where  
appropriate fuel is not available.  
When transferring the registration of your  
vehicle to another country, state, province  
or district, it may be necessary to modify the  
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.  
LTI0025  
WTI0037  
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-  
sion control and safety standards vary according  
to the country, state, province or district; there-  
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
(VIN) PLATE  
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER  
(chassis number)  
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is  
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-  
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle  
registration.  
The vehicle identification number is located as  
shown.  
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-  
other country, state, province or district  
and registered, its modifications, transpor-  
tation, and registration are the responsibil-  
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible  
for any inconvenience that may result.  
Technical and consumer information 9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WTI0096  
WTI0049  
LTI0197  
QR25DE  
VQ35DE  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
CERTIFICATION LABEL  
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER  
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.  
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-  
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-  
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle  
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight  
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,  
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review  
it carefully.  
9-10 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
WTI0173  
WTI0174  
WTI0178  
EMISSION CONTROL  
INFORMATION LABEL  
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION  
LABEL  
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION  
LABEL  
The emission control information label is at-  
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.  
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. The label is located as  
shown.  
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to  
the underside of the hood as shown.  
Technical and consumer information 9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE  
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION  
WARNING  
Use the following steps to mount the front license  
plate:  
● It is extremely dangerous to ride  
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In  
a collision, people riding in these  
areas are more likely to be seri-  
ously injured or killed.  
1
Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher  
᭺
at the location mark (small dimple) using a  
0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the  
threads behind the finisher, apply only light  
pressure to the drill.  
2
● Do not allow people to ride in any  
area of your vehicle that is not  
equipped with seats and seat  
belts.  
Mount the license plate bracket using two 8  
mm slotted hex head screws.  
᭺
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle  
is in a seat and using a seat belt  
properly.  
TERMS  
It is important to familiarize yourself with  
the following terms before loading your  
vehicle:  
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your  
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:  
standard and optional equipment, flu-  
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire  
assembly. This weight does not in-  
clude passengers and cargo.  
WTI0179  
9-12 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb  
weight plus the combined weight of  
passengers and cargo.  
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, To get “the combined weight of occu-  
pants and cargo”, add the weight of all  
occupants, then add the total luggage  
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-  
ing illustration.  
Total load capacity - maximum total  
weight limit specified of the load  
(passengers and cargo) for the ve-  
hicle. This is the maximum combined  
weight of occupants and cargo that  
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the  
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the  
trailer tongue weight must be in-  
cluded as part of the cargo load. This  
information is located on the Tire and  
Loading Information label (if so  
equipped).  
● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-  
ing)  
-
maximum total combined  
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-  
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer  
tongue load and any other optional  
equipment. This information is lo-  
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
certification label.  
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -  
maximum weight (load) limit specified  
for the front or rear axle. This informa-  
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight  
of cargo, the subtracted weight of  
occupants from the load limit.  
tion  
is  
located  
on  
the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label.  
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY  
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight  
rating) - The maximum total weight  
rating of the vehicle, passengers,  
cargo, and trailer.  
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-  
hicle shown as “The combined weight of  
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and  
Loading Information label. Do not exceed  
the number of occupants shown as  
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-  
ing Information label.  
Technical and consumer information 9-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Steps for determining correct load  
limit  
1. Locate the statement “The combined  
weight of occupants and cargo  
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX  
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of  
the driver and passengers that will be  
riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the  
driver and passengers from XXX kg  
or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-  
able amount of cargo and luggage  
load capacity. For example, if the  
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and  
there will be five 150 lb. passengers  
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-  
able cargo and luggage load capac-  
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)  
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =  
300 kg.)  
LTI0152  
Example  
9-14 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Determine the combined weight of  
luggage and cargo being loaded on  
the vehicle. That weight may not  
safely exceed the available cargo and  
luggage load capacity calculated in  
Step 4.  
LOADING TIPS  
● Overloading not only can shorten  
the life of your vehicle and the  
tire, but can also cause unsafe  
vehicle handling and longer brak-  
ing distances. This may cause a  
premature tire failure which  
could result in a serious accident  
and personal injury. Failures  
caused by overloading are not  
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR  
or GAWR as specified on the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label.  
● Do not load the front and rear axle to  
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the  
GVWR.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,  
load from your trailer will be trans-  
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this  
manual to determine how this re-  
duces the available cargo and lug-  
gage load capacity of your vehicle.  
covered  
by  
the  
vehicle’s  
warranty.  
WARNING  
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS  
● Properly secure all cargo with  
ropes or straps to help prevent it  
from sliding or shifting. Do not  
place cargo higher than the seat-  
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-  
sion, unsecured cargo could  
cause personal injury.  
Secure loose items to prevent weight  
shifts that could affect the balance of your  
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive  
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear  
wheels separately to determine axle  
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-  
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-  
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads  
should not exceed the gross vehicle  
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are  
given on the vehicle certification label. If  
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-  
move items to bring all weights below the  
ratings.  
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm  
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle  
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.  
See “Measurement of Weights” later in  
this section.  
● Do not load your vehicle any  
heavier than the GVWR or the  
maximum front and rear GAWRs.  
If you do, parts of your vehicle  
can break, tire damage could oc-  
cur, or it can change the way your  
vehicle handles. This could result  
in loss of control and cause per-  
sonal injury.  
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-  
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-  
tion label.  
Technical and consumer information 9-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TOWING A TRAILER  
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS  
Maximum trailer loads  
WARNING  
Overloading or improper loading of a  
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect  
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-  
mance and may lead to accidents.  
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the  
value  
specified  
in  
the  
“Towing  
Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-  
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight  
plus its cargo weight.  
CAUTION  
●
When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.  
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake  
system must be used.  
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load  
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your  
engine, axle or other parts could be  
damaged.  
● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you  
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph  
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full  
throttle. This helps the engine and other  
parts of your vehicle wear in at the  
heavier loads.  
LTI0164  
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)  
equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle  
(including passengers and cargo) plus the total  
trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or  
using improper towing equipment could ad-  
versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-  
formance.  
Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-  
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember  
that towing a trailer places additional loads on  
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-  
ing and other systems.  
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not  
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also  
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-  
priate for level highway driving may have to be  
reduced for low traction situations (for example,  
on slippery boat ramps).  
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available  
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This  
guide includes information on trailer towing ca-  
pability and the special equipment required for  
proper towing.  
9-16 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.  
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside  
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine  
performance and cause overheating. The engine  
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance  
of engine damage, could activate and automati-  
cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may  
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully  
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather  
and road conditions.  
WARNING  
Overheating can result in reduced engine  
power and vehicle speed. The reduced  
speed may be lower than other traffic,  
which could increase the chance of a col-  
lision. Be especially careful when driving.  
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-  
ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a  
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and  
return to normal operation. See “If your  
vehicle overheats”in the “In case of emer-  
gency” section of this manual.  
WTI0160  
TI1012M  
Tongue load  
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight  
(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight  
Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of  
the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load (GAW)  
specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue  
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed  
load must be within the maximum tongue load  
limits shown in the following “Towing  
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-  
comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for  
proper tongue load.  
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)  
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification  
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of  
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,  
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional  
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must  
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating  
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.  
certification label.  
CAUTION  
Vehicle damage resulting from improper  
towing procedures is not covered by  
NISSAN warranties.  
Technical and consumer information 9-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a  
base vehicle with driver and any options required  
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,  
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the  
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and  
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity  
and trailer tongue load.  
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh  
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and  
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is  
towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not  
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown  
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated  
available maximum towing capacity.  
4,203 lb. (1906 kg)  
GVWR  
GVW  
– 4,103 lb. (1861 kg)  
= 100 lb. (45 kg)  
Available for tongue  
weight  
1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available for  
towing  
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to  
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front  
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight  
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.  
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to  
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear  
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front  
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight  
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.  
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to  
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-  
ings.  
100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight  
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured  
using platform type scales commonly found at  
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building  
supply centers or salvage yards.  
/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg)  
=
Available capacity  
10 % tongue weight  
The available towing capacity may be less than  
the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-  
ger and cargo load in the vehicle.  
To determine the available payload capacity for  
tongue load, use the following procedure.  
Example:  
●
●
●
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed  
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and  
hitch - 4,103 lb. (1861 kg).  
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-  
tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the  
trailer tongue load specification recommended  
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load  
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-  
tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the  
maximum tongue weight specification shown in  
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the  
calculated available tongue weight is greater  
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less  
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to  
match the available tongue weight.  
1. Locate  
the  
GVWR  
on  
the  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.  
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of  
the passengers and cargo that are normally  
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.  
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from  
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -  
4,203 lb. (1906 kg).  
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the  
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-  
able maximum tongue load.  
Maximum Towing Load from “Towing  
Load/SpecificationЉ chart - 1,000 lb. (454  
kg).  
9-18 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Always verify that available capacities are within  
the required ratings.  
Ball mount  
WARNING  
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and  
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.  
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the  
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should  
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the  
ground.  
Trailer hitch components have specific  
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-  
pable of towing a trailer heavier than the  
weight rating of the hitch components.  
Never exceed the weight rating of the  
hitch components. Doing so can cause  
serious personal injury or property  
damage.  
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION  
TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION  
UNIT: lb (kg)  
MAXIMUM TOWING  
1,000 (454)  
LOAD  
Sway control device  
MAXIMUM TONGUE  
100 (45)  
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting  
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-  
dling. Sway control devices may be used to help  
control these affects. If you choose to use one,  
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make  
sure the sway control device will work with the  
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-  
tem. Follow the instructions provided by the  
manufacturer for installing and using the sway  
control device.  
Hitch ball  
LOAD  
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight  
rating for your trailer:  
TOWING SAFETY  
Trailer hitch  
●
The required hitch ball size is stamped on  
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also  
have the size printed on the top of the ball.  
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.  
Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to  
the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or prop-  
erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,  
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.  
●
●
Choose the proper class hitch ball based on  
the trailer weight.  
Class I hitch  
The diameter of the threaded shank of the  
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount  
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should  
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole  
in the ball mount.  
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball  
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers  
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).  
●
The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be  
long enough to be properly secured to the  
ball mount. There should be at least 2  
threads showing beyond the lock washer  
and nut.  
Technical and consumer information 9-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment that  
has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating to  
the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of  
towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the  
Towing Load/Specification Chart earlier in this  
section.  
Tire pressures  
Trailer lights  
● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-  
hicle tires to the recommended cold  
tire pressure indicated on the Tire  
and Loading Information label.  
CAUTION  
When splicing into the vehicle electrical  
system, a commercially available power-  
type module/converter must be used to  
provide power for all trailer lighting. This  
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct  
power source for all trailer lights while  
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and  
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The  
module/converter must draw no more  
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail  
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter  
that exceeds these power requirements  
may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-  
tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-  
tain the proper equipment and to have it  
installed.  
CAUTION  
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating  
and proper inflation pressure should  
be in accordance with the trailer and  
tire manufacturer’s specifications.  
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.  
● The hitch should not be attached to or  
affect the operation of the impact-  
absorbing bumper.  
Safety chains  
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-  
tem, brake system, etc. to install a  
trailer hitch.  
Always use suitable safety chains between your  
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should  
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,  
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave  
enough slack in the chains to permit turning  
corners.  
● To reduce the possibility of additional  
damage if your vehicle is struck from  
the rear, where practical, remove the  
receiver when not in use.  
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or  
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up  
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-  
table trailer dealer.  
● After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt  
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water  
or dust from entering the passenger  
compartment.  
Trailer brakes  
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch  
mounting bolts are securely mounted.  
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,  
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local  
regulations and that it is properly installed.  
9-20 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-  
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and  
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a  
trailer to the vehicle.  
Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking  
systems are activated by an electronic sig-  
nal sent from a trailer brake controller  
(special brake-sensing module). If electric  
trailer brakes are used, see ؆Electric trailer  
brake controller؆ in this section.  
WARNING  
Never connect a trailer brake system di-  
rectly to the vehicle brake system.  
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.  
(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake  
system MUST be used. However, most  
states require a separate braking system  
on trailers with a loaded weight above a  
specific amount. Make sure the trailer  
meets the local regulations and the regu-  
lations where you plan to tow.  
Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to  
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,  
install any mirrors required for towing before  
driving the vehicle.  
Have a professional supplier of towing  
equipment make sure the trailer brakes  
are properly installed and demonstrate  
proper brake function testing.  
Determine the overall height of the vehicle  
and trailer so the required clearance is  
known.  
Pre-towing tips  
Several types of braking systems are  
available.  
Trailer towing tips  
●
Be certain your vehicle maintains a level  
position when a loaded and/or unloaded  
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it  
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down  
condition; check for improper tongue load,  
overload, worn suspension or other possible  
causes of either condition.  
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the  
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,  
stopping and backing up in an area which is free  
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-  
mance will be somewhat different than under  
normal driving conditions.  
Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator  
is mounted on the trailer tongue with a  
hydraulic line running to each trailer  
wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the  
trailer pushing against the hitch ball when  
the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge  
brakes are common on rental trailers and  
some boat trailers. In this type of system,  
there is no hydraulic or electric connec-  
tion for brake operation between the tow  
vehicle and the trailer.  
●
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent  
load shift while driving.  
●
Always secure items in the trailer to prevent  
load shift while driving.  
Keep the cargo load as low as possible in  
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity  
low.  
●
Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or  
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-  
ently becoming unlatched.  
●
Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the  
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in  
the back half. Also make sure the load is  
balanced side to side.  
●
●
Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.  
Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.  
Technical and consumer information 9-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
●
●
Always drive your vehicle at a moderate  
speed.  
To drive away:  
●
●
●
Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first  
500 miles (805 km).  
1. Start the vehicle.  
When backing up, hold the bottom of the  
steering wheel with one hand. Move your  
hand in the direction in which you want the  
trailer to go. Make small corrections and  
back up slowly. If possible, have someone  
guide you when you are backing up.  
For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do  
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).  
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.  
3. Shift the transmission into gear.  
4. Release the parking brake.  
Have your vehicle serviced more often than  
at intervals specified in the recommended  
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-  
vice and Maintenance Guide”.  
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are  
clear from the blocks.  
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and  
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not  
recommended; however, if you must do so:  
●
●
When making a turn, your trailer wheels will  
be closer to the inside of the turn than your  
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,  
make a larger than normal turning radius  
during the turn.  
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.  
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.  
●
While going downhill, the weight of the  
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may dete-  
riorate overall handling characteristics.  
Therefore, to maintain adequate control, re-  
duce your speed and shift to a lower gear.  
Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes  
when descending a hill, as this reduces their  
effectiveness and could cause overheating.  
Shifting to a lower gear instead provides  
“engine braking” and reduces the need to  
brake as frequently.  
CAUTION  
If you move the shift selector lever to the P  
(Park) position before blocking the  
wheels and applying the parking brake,  
transmission damage could occur.  
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely  
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-  
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by  
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible  
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-  
hicle handling.  
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.  
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill  
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.  
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:  
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly  
release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-  
sorb the vehicle load.  
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to  
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as  
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.  
This combination will help stabilize the ve-  
hicle  
●
●
If the engine coolant temperature rises to a  
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle  
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”  
section of this owner’s manual.  
4. Apply the parking brake.  
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).  
6. Turn off the engine.  
Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal  
circumstances.  
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or  
applying the brakes.  
9-22 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the  
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a  
safe area.  
●
Some states or provinces have specific  
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that  
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed  
limits.  
CAUTION  
● Failure to follow these guidelines can  
result in severe transmission damage.  
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-  
anced as described earlier in this section.  
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-  
ways tow forward, never backward.  
●
●
●
Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-  
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50  
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.  
●
Be careful when passing other vehicles.  
Passing while towing a trailer requires con-  
siderably more distance than normal pass-  
ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must  
also pass the other vehicle before you can  
safely change lanes.  
● DO NOT tow any continuously variable  
transmission vehicle with all four  
wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-  
ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-  
sion parts due to lack of transmission  
lubrication.  
When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-  
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or  
rear bumper.  
Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights  
before backing the trailer into the water or  
the trailer lights may burn out.  
●
●
Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-  
mission to a lower gear for engine braking  
when driving down steep or long hills. This  
will help slow the vehicle without applying  
the brakes.  
● For emergency towing procedures refer  
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”  
in the “In case of emergency” section of  
this manual.  
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil  
should be replaced and transmission  
oil/fluid should be changed more fre-  
quently. For additional information, see the  
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section  
earlier in this manual.  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long  
or too frequently. This could cause the  
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced  
braking efficiency.  
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously  
variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle  
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s  
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-  
turer’s recommendations when using their prod-  
uct.  
FLAT TOWING  
●
●
Increase your following distance to allow for  
greater stopping distances while towing a  
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.  
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the  
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This  
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle  
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor  
home.  
NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-  
trol not be used while towing a trailer.  
Technical and consumer information 9-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality  
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to  
federal safety requirements in addition to these  
grades.  
Manual Transmission  
WARNING  
●
Always tow with the manual transmission in  
Neutral.  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is  
based on straight-ahead braking traction  
tests, and does not include acceleration,  
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction  
characteristics.  
●
After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and  
idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-  
tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine  
after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing  
may cause damage to internal transmission  
parts.  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on  
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For example:  
Temperature A, B and C  
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,  
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the  
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained  
high temperature can cause the material of the  
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-  
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.  
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-  
mance which all passenger car tires must meet  
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.  
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than  
the minimum required by law.  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating  
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested  
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-  
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded  
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times  
as well on the government course as a tire graded  
100. The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,  
and may depart significantly from the norm due to  
variations in driving habits, service practices and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
Traction AA, A, B and C  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are  
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the  
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-  
sured under controlled conditions on specified  
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-  
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction  
performance.  
9-24 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
WARRANTY  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US  
only)  
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following  
emission warranties:  
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-  
fect which could cause a crash or could  
cause injury or death, you should immedi-  
ately inform the National Highway Traffic  
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-  
tion to notifying NISSAN.  
WARNING  
The temperature grade for this tire is es-  
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated  
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,  
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-  
ther separately or in combination, can  
cause heat build-up and possible tire  
failure.  
For USA  
1. Emission Defects Warranty  
2. Emissions Performance Warranty  
Details of this warranty may be found with other  
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information  
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.  
If you did not receive a Warranty Information  
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-  
ment by writing to:  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it  
may open an investigation, and if it finds  
that a safety defect exists in a group of  
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy  
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-  
come involved in individual problems be-  
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.  
●
Nissan North America, Inc.  
Consumer Affairs Department  
P.O. Box 685003  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-  
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-  
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go  
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:  
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh  
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.  
You can also obtain other information  
about motor vehicle safety from  
http://www.safercar.gov.  
Franklin, TN 37068-5003  
For Canada  
Emission Control System Warranty  
Details of this warranty may be found with other  
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information  
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.  
If you did not receive a Warranty Information  
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-  
ment by writing to:  
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our  
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at  
1-800-NISSAN-1.  
●
Nissan Canada Inc.  
5290 Orbitor Drive  
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5  
Technical and consumer information 9-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/  
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST  
Due to legal requirements in some states and  
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-  
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-  
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of  
the emission control system.  
8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-  
lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)  
position.  
WARNING  
Always drive the vehicle in a safe and  
prudent manner according to traffic con-  
ditions and obey all traffic laws.  
9. Turn the engine off.  
10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.  
1. Start the engine when the engine coolant  
temperature gauge needle points to C. Al-  
low the engine to idle until the gauge needle  
points between the C and H (normal oper-  
ating temperature).  
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it  
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,  
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary  
usage of the vehicle.  
If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat the  
preceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-  
able between steps. Do not stop the engine until  
step 7 is completed.  
If a powertrain system component is repaired or  
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be  
reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the  
2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88  
km/h), then quickly release the accelerator  
pedal completely and keep it released for at  
least 10 seconds.  
I/M  
test,  
check  
the  
vehicle’s  
inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-  
tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without starting  
the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light  
(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then  
blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is  
“not ready”. If the MIL does not blink after 20  
seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. If the  
MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “not ready” con-  
dition, drive the vehicle through the following  
pattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. If  
you cannot or do not want to perform the driving  
pattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.  
3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a  
moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of  
53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9  
minutes.  
4. Stop the vehicle.  
5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)  
and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.  
6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.  
7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)  
and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-  
utes.  
9-26 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)  
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE  
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION  
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-  
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to  
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-  
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a  
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-  
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR  
is designed to record data related to vehicle  
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of  
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this  
vehicle is designed to record such data as:  
the type of personally identifying data routinely  
acquired during a crash investigation.  
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best  
source of service and repair information for your  
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations  
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-  
cedures, this manual is the same one used by the  
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN  
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN  
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service  
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.  
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-  
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the  
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-  
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such  
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-  
ment, can read the information if they have ac-  
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only  
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle  
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-  
mitted by law.  
For USA  
●
●
●
How various systems in your vehicle were  
operating;  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model  
year and later contact:  
Whether or not the driver and passenger  
safety belts were buckled/fastened;  
1-800-450-9491  
www.nissan-techinfo.com  
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing  
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model  
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:  
●
●
How fast the vehicle was traveling.  
Sounds are not recorded.  
1-800-247-5321  
These data can help provide a better understand-  
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and  
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by  
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation  
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under  
normal driving conditions and no personal data  
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are  
recorded. However, other parties, such as law  
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with  
For current pricing and availability of genuine  
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year  
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:  
1-800-247-5321  
Technical and consumer information 9-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For Canada  
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage  
caused by a non-genuine part.  
It’s your right!  
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-  
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact  
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-  
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area  
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-  
387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-  
tive will assist you.  
If you should need further information visit us at:  
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or  
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).  
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect  
your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-  
tection and maintain the resale value of your  
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using  
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-  
necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the  
end of your lease.  
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and  
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.  
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to  
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the  
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-  
genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such  
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-  
ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.  
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION  
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely  
event, there is some important information you  
should know.  
Why should you take a chance?  
Many insurance companies routinely authorize  
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to  
cut costs, among other reasons.  
In over 40 states, the law says you must be  
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair  
your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws  
that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-  
ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during  
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-  
tect you, so you can take action to protect your-  
self.  
Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN  
collision parts!  
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts  
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-  
tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its  
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your  
insurance agent and your repair shop to  
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.  
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,  
9-28 Technical and consumer information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10 Index  
FM-AM radio with compact disc  
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc  
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-16, 8-21  
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18  
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21  
Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20  
Brightness control  
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . . . .4-7  
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint  
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43  
Air bag system  
(CD) changer. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-38  
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21  
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Automatic  
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-45  
Transmission selector lever lock  
release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14  
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-29  
Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
AUX jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30, 4-36, 4-42  
Front (See supplemental front impact  
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52  
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-58, 2-14  
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
Air conditioner  
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-13  
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11  
Air conditioner system refrigerant and  
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6  
Heater and air conditioner  
C
Capacities and recommended  
B
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45  
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12  
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43  
CD changer (See audio system) . . . .4-34, 4-40  
CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-29  
Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-27  
Child restraints . . . . . . . . . .1-18, 1-23, 1-25  
Precautions on child  
restraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-33, 1-39  
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-27  
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . .3-6  
Chimes, audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . .2-16  
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2  
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-18  
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14  
Alarm system  
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-25  
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45  
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-24  
Armrests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-11  
Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16  
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21  
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-34, 4-40  
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-29  
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
Block heater  
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29  
Bluetoothா hands-free phone  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-61  
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39  
Brake  
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-24  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-28  
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23  
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-28, 4-32, 4-38  
(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-5  
(models without navigation  
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28, 4-32  
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-28, 4-32  
Clutch  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-29  
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6  
Console box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . .5-11  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40  
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-8  
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-6  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5  
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5  
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-12  
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5  
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10  
English/metric setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6  
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2  
Eyeglass case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
D
Daytime running light system  
(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Defroster switch  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28  
Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8  
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-32  
Display controls  
(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . . .4-2  
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4  
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17  
Driving  
(CVT) fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Driving with Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Transmission selector lever lock  
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27  
Driving with Continuously Variable  
Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-16  
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2  
release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14  
Control panel buttons  
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-7  
Setup button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3  
Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3  
With navigation system . . . . . . . . . . .4-2  
Controls  
F
Flashers  
(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-33  
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2  
Floor mat positioning aid. . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5  
Fluid  
E
Heater and air conditioner  
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-18  
Coolant  
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21  
Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-11  
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-25  
Engine  
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-8  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5  
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6  
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Block heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10  
10-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Front air bag system  
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-52  
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Fuel  
Intelligent Key system  
H
Key operating range. . . . . . . . . .3-8, 3-18  
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9  
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3  
Remote keyless entry operation. . .3-12, 3-18  
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . .3-16, 3-22  
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-22  
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Interior trunk lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24  
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25  
Hands-free phone system,  
Bluetoothா . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-61  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-29  
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Heater  
Capacities and recommended  
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6  
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4  
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3  
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Fuel-filler door and cap. . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-25  
Fuel-filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22  
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23  
Heater and air conditioner  
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-18  
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-12, 4-19  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-51  
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7  
K
I
Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-25  
Keyless entry  
G
Ignition Switch  
With Intelligent Key system  
(See Intelligent Key system). . . . .3-12, 3-18  
Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-2  
Push-Button Ignition Switch. . . . . . . . .5-7  
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-3  
Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10  
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19  
Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21  
Indicator lights and audible reminders  
Garage door opener, HomeLinkா Universal  
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51  
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25  
Gauge  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5  
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2  
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43  
L
(See warning/indicator lights and audible  
Labels  
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . .3-29  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-32  
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-8, 2-2  
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-32  
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11  
C.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .9-10  
Emission control information label . . . . .9-11  
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10  
F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10  
Tire and Loading Information label. . . . .9-11  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9  
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-58  
Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6  
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers  
for CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25  
License plate  
Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-23  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-12  
Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . . . .2-23  
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12  
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Oil  
Capacities and recommended  
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Light  
M
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2  
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10  
Changing engine oil filter. . . . . . . . . .8-12  
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9  
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5  
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29  
Overheat  
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-9  
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Owner’s manual/service manual order  
information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-58, 2-14  
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-28  
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-10  
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-29  
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48  
Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12  
Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . .2-23  
Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-53  
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-15  
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Warning/indicator lights and audible  
Maintenance  
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2  
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3  
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5  
Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2  
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4  
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-14  
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3  
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-32  
Mirror  
P
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . .3-29  
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29  
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Parking  
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18  
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . .5-22  
Phone, Bluetoothா hands-free  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-61  
Power  
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Lights  
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Lock  
N
Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
Power outlet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36  
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45  
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17  
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . .2-26, 3-3  
NISSAN voice recognition system. . . . . . .4-69  
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . .3-6  
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4  
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-25  
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41  
Power door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
10-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45  
Precautions  
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20  
Setup button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3  
Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14  
Shifting  
S
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5  
Precautions on child  
restraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-33, 1-39  
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-15  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
Safety  
Child safety rear door lock. . . . . . . . . .3-6  
Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-33, 1-39  
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-25  
Seat adjustment  
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2  
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4  
Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9  
Seat belt  
Continuously Variable Transmission  
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12  
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16  
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-22  
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-58  
Starting  
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7  
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2  
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9  
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10  
Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3  
Steering  
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-23  
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28  
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38  
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46  
Supplemental air bag warning light. . .1-58, 2-14  
Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-52  
Supplemental restraint system  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43  
Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2  
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3  
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9  
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18  
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-18  
Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19  
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18  
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-15  
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19  
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22  
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-23  
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15  
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-22  
Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-19  
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37  
Seats  
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2  
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34  
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2  
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9  
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15  
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer  
system), engine start . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-3  
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21  
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
R
Radio  
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-45  
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-34, 4-40  
FM-AM radio with compact disc  
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27  
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc  
(CD) changer. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31, 4-38  
Readiness for inspection maintenance  
(I/M) test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26  
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45  
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28  
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8  
Recorders  
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27  
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6  
Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9  
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-25  
Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-58  
Precautions on supplemental restraint  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43  
Supplemental restraint system  
(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-43  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Switch  
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8  
Tire pressure  
V
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-45  
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33  
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-29  
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-29  
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-5  
Rear window and outside mirror defroster  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28  
Traction control system (TCS) off  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off  
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27  
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28  
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-35  
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-26  
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Vehicle identification number (VIN)  
(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9  
Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12  
Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12  
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3  
Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-27  
Towing  
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23  
Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10  
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-19  
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16  
Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . .2-35  
Transceiver  
HomeLinkா Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-51  
Transmission  
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)  
fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13  
Driving with Continuously Variable  
immobilizer system), engine start. . . . .2-26, 3-3  
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10  
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27  
Voice recognition system. . . . . . . . . . . .4-69  
T
Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11  
Driving with manual transmission . . . . .5-16  
Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-14  
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another  
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Trip odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4  
Troubleshooting guide (NISSAN voice  
recognition system). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73  
Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-9  
Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . . .3-23  
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50  
Turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33  
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5  
Temperature gauge  
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5  
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),  
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-3  
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2  
Tire  
W
Warning  
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . .1-58, 2-14  
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . .2-11  
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11  
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11  
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-12  
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-33  
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-23  
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12  
Low washer fluid warning light. . . . . . .2-23  
Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-53  
Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13  
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-25  
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2  
Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-45  
Tire and Loading Information label. . . . .9-11  
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-42  
Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11  
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-43  
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-41  
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-24  
U
Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-24  
10-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-58  
Warning/indicator lights and audible  
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10  
Washer switch  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27  
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8  
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34  
Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8  
When traveling or registering your vehicle  
in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9  
Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15  
Windows  
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-45  
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45  
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44  
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-27  
Wiper  
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-27  
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GAS STATION INFORMATION  
RECOMMENDED FUEL:  
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE  
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:  
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is not designed to run on  
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage  
the fuel system components and is not  
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-  
ited warranty.  
For 2.5L engine  
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle  
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the  
“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found in  
the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.  
Follow these recommendations for the future re-  
liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure  
to follow these recommendations may result in  
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.  
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane  
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-  
ber (Research octane number 91).  
For additional information, see “Capacities and  
recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical  
and consumer information” section.  
For 3.5L engine  
NISSAN recommends the use of premium un-  
leaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least  
91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research  
octane number 96). If unleaded premium gaso-  
line is not available, you may use unleaded regu-  
lar gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87  
AKI number (Research octane number 91), but  
you may notice a decrease in performance.  
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:  
●
Engine oil with API Certification Mark  
Viscosity SAE 5W-30  
●
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” in  
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-  
tion of this manual.  
CAUTION  
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:  
● Using a fuel other than that specified  
could adversely affect the emission  
control system, and may also affect the  
warranty coverage.  
See Tire and Loading Information label.  
The label is typically located on the driver side  
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional  
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-  
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this  
manual.  
● Under no circumstances should  
leaded gasoline be used, because this  
will damage the three-way catalyst.  
a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Napoleon Grills Gas Grill Gourmet Grill User Manual
NETGEAR Switch XS708E User Manual
NeumannBerlin Microphone KM 74 User Manual
Nilfisk Advance America Vacuum Cleaner RS 1300 User Manual
Oregon Scientific Weather Radio RMR802 User Manual
Panasonic Air Conditioner CS E18FKR User Manual
Panasonic Answering Machine KX TG9471B User Manual
Panasonic Blu ray Player DMP DSB100 User Manual
Panasonic Network Card 2SA0720 User Manual
Panasonic Network Card 2SB1320A User Manual